ZXG10-BSC(V2)Operation Manual Vol 1

March 18, 2018 | Author: Bahara Kh | Category: Oracle Database, Installation (Computer Programs), Operating System, Databases, Quality Of Service
Share
Report this link


Comments



Description

ZXG10Z T E G S M W L L S Y S T E M GSM WLL SYSTEM Operation Manual OF ZXG10-BSC (V2) Vol. 1 SHENZHEN, CHINA Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Preface ZXG10 is the GSM mobile communication system independently developed by ZTE. It is composed of ZXG10-MSS mobile switching system and ZXG10-BSS base station subsystem. The ZXG10-BSS base station subsystem is responsible for providing and managing wireless transmission in GSM, and comprises the ZXG10-BSC base station controller and the ZXG10-BTS base station transceiver, etc. ZXG10-OMCR (V2) is the operation & maintenance platform of the ZXG10-BSS (V2) base station subsystem, and the ZXG10-BSC Base Station Controller Operation Manual mainly introduces the operation of the ZXG10-OMCR (V2). Unless otherwise specified in this manual, OMCR (V2) refers to the operation and maintenance center of ZXG10-OMCR (V2) base station sub-system, and BSC (V2) refers to ZXG10-BSC (V2) base station controller. This manual is divided into Volume I and Volume II. Volume I includes 7 chapters: Chapter 1 outlines the position, function and composition of the OMCR (V2) system; Chapter 2 mainly introduces the running environment of OMCR (V2) system and the procedure of installing the server and client; Chapter 3 introduces in detail the safety management functions of the OMCR (V2) system, including user management and operation log; Chapter 4 introduces specifically the fault management functions of the OMCR (V2) system, including alarm management and test management; Chapter 5 introduces in detail the performance management functions of the OMCR (V2) system, including performance management, performance analysis console, invoke tracing and signaling tracing; Chapter 6 introduces in detail the configuration management functions of the OMCR (V2), including radio resource management, software loading, integrated configuration management and dynamic data management; Chapter 7 introduces in detail the database configuration and monitoring functions of the OMCR (V2) system; Appendix sums up the used abbreviations for ease of reading this manual. Volume II consists of two chapters and appendixes. Chapter 1 introduces the man-machine commands of each module of the OMCR (V2) system; Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Chapter 2 describes in detail the common basic operations of each module of the OMCR (V2) system according to the functional category; Appendix A lists all performance measurement counters and their descriptions; Appendix B sums up all mentioned abbreviations for the ease of reading this manual. This set of the manuals also include the following documents: Technical Manual for ZXG10-BSC (V2) Base Station Controller Installation Manual for ZXG10-BSC (V2) Base Station Controller. Maintenance Manual for ZXG10-BSC (V2) Base Station Controller. Statement: The actual product may differ from what is described in this manual due to frequent update of ZTE products and fast development of technologies. Please contact the local ZTE office for the latest updating information of the product. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Contents 1 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 3 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................1 System position ...............................................................................................................1 Functions and structure ...................................................................................................2 COMPOSITION OF THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SYSTEM ...............................................5 WSF module....................................................................................................................6 LMF module.....................................................................................................................7 LAF module .....................................................................................................................8 MSF module ....................................................................................................................8 BMF module ....................................................................................................................8 NAF module.....................................................................................................................9 INSTALLATION OF THE O&M SYSTEM ......................................................................10 RUNNING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................10 Server requirements ......................................................................................................10 Client requirements........................................................................................................11 SERVER INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................12 Software requirements...................................................................................................12 Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................13 CLIENT INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................33 Software requirements...................................................................................................33 Installation procedure ....................................................................................................34 MAIN INTERFACE ..............................................................................................................38 User logon .....................................................................................................................39 Main interface ................................................................................................................40 Exiting the system..........................................................................................................44 SECURITY MANAGEMENT..........................................................................................46 USER MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................................46 Overview........................................................................................................................46 Operations of user management interface.....................................................................48 OPERATION LOG ..............................................................................................................64 Overview........................................................................................................................64 Operations of the operation log interface .......................................................................65 Page I of III Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 6 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.3 6.3.1 FAULT MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................72 ALARM MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................73 Overview........................................................................................................................73 Classification of alarm information .................................................................................74 Operations of the alarm management interface .............................................................75 TEST MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................114 Overview......................................................................................................................114 Operations of the test management interface ..............................................................117 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT..............................................................................129 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................130 Performance management items.................................................................................130 Operations of the performance management interface ................................................138 PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS CONSOLE .................................................................................166 Overview......................................................................................................................166 Operations of the performance analysis console interface...........................................167 CALL TRACING ...............................................................................................................178 Overview......................................................................................................................178 Operations of the call tracing interface.........................................................................179 SIGNALING TRACING .......................................................................................................185 Overview......................................................................................................................185 Operations of the signaling tracing interface ................................................................185 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT............................................................................197 RADIO RESOURCES MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................197 Overview......................................................................................................................197 BSS .............................................................................................................................199 Cell parameters ...........................................................................................................263 Configuring Cell ...........................................................................................................359 SOFTWARE LOADING ......................................................................................................426 Overview......................................................................................................................426 Software loading flow...................................................................................................427 Version information......................................................................................................429 Operations of the software loading interface................................................................431 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................447 INTEGRATED CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT.....................................................................448 Overview......................................................................................................................448 Page II of III Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6.3.2 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 7 7.1 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 Operations of the integrated configuration management interface...............................450 DYNAMIC DATA MANAGEMENT ..........................................................................................499 Overview......................................................................................................................499 Operations of the dynamic data management interface...............................................500 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................505 DATABASE CONFIGURATION AND MONITORING ..................................................507 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................507 INTERFACE OPERATIONS .................................................................................................507 Selecting monitoring contents......................................................................................509 Monitoring database information..................................................................................511 Monitoring alarm threshold ..........................................................................................511 Setting threshold parameters.......................................................................................512 ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................................514 APPENDIX Page III of III Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1 1.1 Overview Overview OMC (Operation and Maintenance Center) refers to the management center of BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and MSS (Mobile Switching System). In GSM specifications, OMC is divided into two parts in light of different objects: OMCS and OMCR. OMCR refers to the operation and maintenance center of BSS and OMCS refers to the operation and maintenance center of MSS. This manual mainly introduces OMCR (V2) of ZTE. With the managed object as its core, OMCR (V2) provides management function in addition to other management tools. It features powerful functions, reasonable structure, high modularity, high flexibility and reliability. It supports ZXG10-BSS base station subsystem and the new-type base station equipment developed by ZTE, such as micro-BTS (micro base station transceiver). 1.1.1 System position OMCR (V2) controls the object called BSS, which includes Base Station Controller (BSC) and Base Station Transceiver (BTS). The main functions of MCR (V2) include the following: perform effective configuration management of BSS equipment, reflect the BSS fault information in the course of running in real time, make analysis and statistics of BSS performance, and provide the access interface to Network Management Center (NMC). As shown in Fig. 1-1, OMCR (V2) provides the standard interface to NMS, accepts the management operations from NMC, and reports the operation results and events; it manages BSS via the standard or non-standard interface and accepts the information reported by BSS. Page 1 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Network management center (NMC) Network management layer (NML) Operation & maintenance center (OMCR) Element management layer (EML) Base station subsystem (BSS) Network element layer (NEL) Fig. 1-1 Position of OMCR (V2) in the PLMN system and its functions In TMN logical layered architecture, BSS is located at the NE layer, OMCR (V2) at NE management layer and NMC at NM layer. 1.1.2 Functions and structure ZXG10-OMCR (V2) is based on the client/server structure; the application is achieved by the application server, the client application does not directly establish the communication connection with MP of the BSC; the client application is not involved with the implementation of the application, it only enables the operator to input the operation commands and output the operation results, as shown in Fig. 1-2. SUN (development environment) is used in the server, and Oracle as the database system, so as to meet the performance requirements during system running. Meanwhile, the modular division of system software lays a solid foundation for system expandability so that multiple software modules are able to run on several servers in a distributed manner according to different requirements so as to enhance the processing capacity of the system. The overall system structure is designed in compliance with the TMN (telecom management network) system structure as described in ITU-T. TMN is designed by ITU-T as a standard for system management within the telecom field. Using standard specifications in open system interconnection (OSI) for reference, TMN puts forward the functional model, information model and physical model for system interconnection. TMN stipulates not only the management system structure but also the mechanism for specific management functions, including configuration, fault, performance etc. TMN utilizes managed object (MO) to abstract the Page 2 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 managed resources, that is, the operations on managed objects in the system management are mapped to MO. Thanks to its modular design plan, OMCR (V2) provides guarantee in terms of expandability and reliability, so that it is able to configure the system size in light of system load. The functions of OMCR (V2) system are designed in line with TMN specifications and GSM specifications of ETSI. On the basis of standard management functions, the system also provides the users with more additional applications. The system functions are organized based on the managed objects as the core in addition to a variety of management tools. OMCR (V2) system follows the development specifications recommended by TMN in its whole development process from setting up the information model, which is the general reflection of the objectives to be reached in the entire system. Operation terminal Operation terminal Operation terminal Application server T CP/IP,X.25 etc. BSS BSS BSS Fig. 1-2 Architecture of OMCR (V2) distributed applications OMCR (V2) system mainly offers such functions: configuration management, performance management, fault management and security management 1. Configuration management It is to configure the BSS system equipment and the radio resource data, including: integrated configuration management, radio resource management, software loading and dynamic data management. Page 3 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2. Performance management 1) The operator creates measurement task to gather the system running data, which will be finally stored in the measurement database and no longer have any connection with the measurement task. The operator may either analyze these data using the performance analysis console or export these data intended for other analysis platform or network optimization software. 2) As for the measurement task ongoing with data collection, the operator may observe the current value of a counter for a certain measurement object in time. 3) The operator may observe some designated events occurring in a cell, including handover observation and channel assignment observation. The handover observation involves the observation of intra-cell handover, intra-BSS handover and inter-BSS handover. 4) The operator is able to set the statistical interval and indexes for BSS quality of service (QoS) alarm. When the system QOS index exceeds the specified value, an alarm will occur. QoS alarm measurement is independent of performance data collection and still can collect or calculate the related data when no measurement job is assigned. 3. Fault management Fault management serves to display the alarm at the administrator side. The core of fault management lies in the accurate location of system faults. The relevance judgment may help display the real alarms on the interface. Fault management also involves diagnostic test, which mainly functions to test the BSS system by setting test tasks, so as to locate the fault or discover the hidden fault. 4. Security management Security management guarantees the security of handling administrative affairs. The system security architecture can be divided into three levels: the user, operation and managed object. The security management has four major functional modules: authorization module, authentication module, data management module and network transmission security module. Meanwhile, Page 4 of 516 ). LMF provides the interface for the WSF management application access. MSF to Management Support Function. such as Database Information Function (DIF) and Message Communication Function (MCF). As BMF and NAF serve as the extended part of the system. NAF provides the interface for the management access of the NMC. they are not marked in the Page 5 of 516 . 1-3. LAF to Local Access Function. the MO set is called Management Information Base (MIB). They are Management Support Function (MSF). WSF of the local operation and maintenance. LAF implements the proxy function specified by TMN. 1-4 shows the overall functional architecture of system software.2 Composition of the operation and maintenance system The application system is based on the client/server structure. NMC Management Access Function (NAF). MSF is the common function of the system. which is called the Management Information Tree (MIT). and it is the core of achieving the system management. NAF to NMC Access Function. 1-3 Overall structure of the system software Of which: WSF refers to Workstation Function. which are the links of each part and the set of common functions. MIB is organized just like a tree. Four application entities are available on the server. NAF WSF LMF MSF LAF BMF Fig. Local Management Function (LMF) and Local Access Function (LAF). LMF to Local Management Function. and the BMF running on the MP is shown in Fig. and maintains one MIT tree. The relationship among these entities. also called MO instance tree.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 security management also enables the query and cancellation of user operation history records. The information exchange in the management activity is based on the Managed Objects. 1. and BMF to BSS Management Function. Fig. To achieve these functions.1 WSF module WSF is an application located at the client workstation to provide F and G interface functions as stated in TMN. Therefore. the WSF is required to resolve the user’s commands and the result returned by the server correctly. WSF mainly involves user interface support function (UISF). Security management LMF (management functions) User management Group management View management Operation management Performance management Task management Threshold management Instant view History query Configuration management Network planning interface Sy stem sy nchronization Radio resource management Version management Fault management Fault handling rule Historical fault query Fault customization handling Diagnostics test LMF (Basic components) Topology management Operation authentication Event management Log management Status and information display Relevance management LAF (Agent) Instance management Agency function Communication management MSF (Common functions) Database access interface File transfer interface Sy stem post office service Sy stem equipment management State machine management Sy stem process management Fig. 1-4 Functional architecture of OMCR (V2) software 1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 figure. command resolution function (CRF). Page 6 of 516 . network communication function (NCF). MMI kernel function (MKF) and window administration function (WAF). F interface exchanges the information between LMFs on the server. it is necessary to provide the appropriate communication management mechanism responsible for the session between the management user and the server. so that the information can be presented to the customers in a correct and consistent manner.2. and G interface provides character and graphical operation modes. As all application functions are implemented on the server. fault management function (FMF) and security management function (SMF). LMF includes the following functions: command distribution function (CDF). MAF is composed of configuration management function (CMF). configuration management and fault management. while the later mainly aims at the system itself and the operations on the management resource historical data. alarm modification.2. LMF receives the resolved operation requests from the client. LMF mainly functions to achieve BSS management. Organized in line with TMN specifications. statistics and performance analysis. LMF management functions can be divided into security management. and the configuration management and fault management can modify the system topology information by way of topology management. action activation and confirmation as well as notice delivery. and responds to the received information. command log management function (CLF). such as data query of the performance management and some non-query operations (e. management application function (MAF) and operation output function (OOF). session service function (SSF). LMF is still required to support user management access function WSF. It works to process information related to BSS management.g. security management). process original data and generate value-added data. LMF acts an administrator mainly to achieve the operating system functions as stipulated in TMN. performance management. such as data concentration. For example. support and control the realization of BSS equipment management functions.2 LMF module From the angle of TMN information model. LMF has two interfaces.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1. The messages at Q interface falls into two types: One is the operation request of the LMF for Page 7 of 516 . The basic LMF components serve as the foundation for the realization of system functions. One is the F interface between it and WSF and the other is the Q interface between it and LAF. The former is mainly of interests to the operation on the current management resources. topology management provides the system with topology data. and implements the operations using different application processing functions in light of operation contents. The user’s operations can be done whether to MIT tree or not. Its functions mainly include data acquisition and data control. performance management function (PMF). transmit information between BSS and OMCR (V2). LAF functions to support the realization of administrative operations. The MO instances it manages is part of MIT tree in LAF. etc. system process running monitoring. system intra-module (node) communications. 1. system post office server and state machine management and so on. system resource occupation monitoring. The Page 8 of 516 . it is necessary to synchronize it to the real state of network resources.5 BMF module From the view point of TMN information model. Information contained on the nodes gives a description of all the managed resources.3 LAF module From the view point of TMN information model. These functions are to implement the management functions of LMF. The nodes on MIT tree stand for the specific and manageable resources in a network.2. Its main functional modules include: database access. 1. 1. If the modification cannot keep in step with the real resource state. the other is the alarm notice that has been transmitted after the LAF has received the alarms generated by the NE. LAF acts as the agent and is the general agent of the system-controlled BSS.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the MIT tree and the response returned by the LAF. including database interface. etc. filter. BMF serves as the agent for its BSC. Its application core is MO instance tree (MIT) and manage BSS by way of MIT maintenance.2. Its main functions are to maintain the MO management instance trees (MIT). one with LMF and the other with BMF. LAF has two interfaces.2. The main functions include temporary storage. and ensure the correct interpretation of messages from BSS. MSF is a set of common functions of the system. The modification of MIT must correspond to the change in the current network resources. threshold management and test.4 MSF module MSF provides management support functions and serves as the base for other functions. This interface is developed by NMC and OMCR (V2) through mutual cooperation. so as to finalize the administrative operations of OMCR (V2).6 NAF module NAF is able to provide access functions in line with NMC requirements. BMF should also have the function of access authentication to prevent invalid host access. 1. BMF serves as the agent for background applications. BMF should be able to receive LMT commands. As an application on BSC main processor (MP). BMF serves to translate the operation commands on MO from OMCR (V2) into MP database operations and operations on various boards. BMF interface serves externally as LAF and internally as MP database system. BMF is expected to notify OMCR (V2) of the information change in the form of event report. while the data scan process is developed by NMC and runs in NMC system. i.e. As an agent. the Q3 interface. If the operation instruction has changed the state or attribute of the corresponding MO resources.2. NAF functions to provide an interface for NMC access. OMCR (V2) provides the database and its structure.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 specific storage forms of MO instances are transparent to OMCR (V2). OMCR (V2) system shall provide database access interface. These commands are divided into two types: inquiry and operation. To support the application of local maintenance terminal (LMT) in BSC. Page 9 of 516 . to increase the number of TRXs manageable by system. For server hardware configuration. “ftpuser” user and “omclog” user.1 2. requiring Solaris version 5. etc. Table 2-1 contains typical server system hardware configurations.0.1 Running environment Server requirements 1. 3. 4. Page 10 of 516 . Install Solaris Unix operating system. Note: For specific usage of UNIX commands in this section. while client in the NT platform. many factors should be considered for good balance.5 database system in Oracle user mode. such as CPU primary frequency and CPU amount. such as database. Create DBA user group and Oracle user. please refer to Solaris online help. 2. as well as the OMCR (V2) main interface displayed after the client is installed. 5. CPU processing ability and number of managed objects. For example. 2.1.6 with relevant Patch packages released by SUN (they are preinstalled on SUN’s computer). Install and configure OMCR (V2) server system in “omc” user mode. Install Oracle 8. as well as the influence of system response time to user commands on the performance of the whole system.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2 Installation of the O&M System OMCR (V2) server is located in the UNIX platform. some component configurations can be improved. In actual deployment. This chapter introduces the system installation of OMCR (V2) server and client. respective configuration parameters can be adjusted according to system contributing factors and overall performance for a better adaptability to various possible applications. Create “omc” user group and “omc” user. LAF and DB run Used situation low server.2 Client requirements 1. Install Microsoft Windows NT 4. which is related to the specific disk type. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 2-1 Typical system hardware configurations (main components) System configuration s Server quantity Small capacity Configuration capacity Medium capacity Large capacity 3 pcs LMF: 400MHz×4 CPU 400MHz×2 400MHz×4 400MHz×4 DB: 400MHz×8 LAF: 400MHz×8 1GB 1GB 80GB 2 ~ 4 BSS 5000 TRX Two compose (LAF+LMF)+DB. It d to recommende adopt for access high RAID high-speed data and reliability. redundant disk capacity for RAID adoption should be added. 2. First expand various (vertical the servers components expansion). module on one three servers running LMF. then is number expand of RAID Number TRXs manageable of 40GB 1 ~ 2 BSS 1024 TRX LMF. It is recommended to adopt RAID for high-speed data access and high reliability. servers LMF: 1GB DB: 2GB LAF: 2GB 120GB 5 ~ 10BSS 10000 TRX Consist of ≥400MHz×8 Super large capacity 1 pcs 2 pcs ≥3 pcs Memory 512MB ≥2GB ≥120GB ≥10 BSS ≥10000 TRX Expand based on large capacity configuration. LAF+(LMF+DB) in with reliability or (LAF+DB)+LMF. In specific design. LAF and DB module respectively. (horizontal expansion).1. Remarks requirement (users do not want high investment). Server here refers to SUN’s server. Note: 1.0 Workstation (or Windows 2000 Page 11 of 516 . Select WE8ISO8859P1 for SERVER database character set 2.1 Software requirements System software required for server installation includes: 1. please refer to ZXG10-BSC (V2) Base Station Controller Installation Manual. For the installation of other software systems. and create “omc” user group and “omc” user. For the installation of Solaris and Oracle system. Select AMERICAN NLS_LANGUAGE. two points should be noted for our system: 1. Install the Excel of Microsoft Office 97 or versions above. This chapter mainly introduces the installation of OMCR (V2) server system and client system. If Windows NT 4.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 professional Edition). NLS_CHARACTERSET. Before it is started. 2. please refer to relevant installation instructions. 3.2 Server installation This section introduces the installation of OMCR (V2) server program. In Oracle system installation process. Install OMCR (V2) client program. Windows NT Service Pack 4 version or higher is required. 2. OMCR (V2) server installation is performed under UNIX environment. Page 12 of 516 .6 with relevant Patch packages released by SUN. for SERVER database language 2.2. Install printer for the system requiring printer. 5. 2. Solaris version 5. first install Solaris and Oracle system. 4.0 is to be installed. OMCR (V2) server program. then use the “select userenv ('language') from dual. namely: the operating system is Solaris 5. 3.2.5 and reinstall. Conduct the installation. obtain correct version of the operating system and reinstall.6. and Oracle version will be displayed after successful login. please install Solaris and Oracle first.5. 2.2. if it does not meet the above requirements. Installation environment Before the OMCR (V2) server software is installed. Before installing OMCR (V2) server program. Use the “uname –a” command to check the version of the operating system. FTP user “ftpuser” and Log file view user “omclog”.0.” SQL command to view language and character set.2. the software environment of SUN server should satisfy some requirements.5. the database system is Oracle 8.2 Installation Procedure The specific steps of installing the OMCR (V2) are as follows: 1. Confirmation and check after installation 2. obtain correct version of Oracle 8. which includes three users: running user “omc”. If they are inconsistent with above requirements. Use the “sqlplus” command and “system” user to login Oracle database. the NLS_LANGUAGE of Oracle is AMERICAN and the NLS_CHARACTERSET is WE8ISO8859P1. Please refer to ZXG10-BSC (V2) Base Station Controller Installation Manual. Of which: the user “omc” is to run Page 13 of 516 . Oracle 8. Preparations before installation 2.0.0.1 Installation preparations 1. User and authority OMCR(V2) server running needs to set an “omc” user group. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3. Please refer to ZXG10-BSC (V2) Base Station Controller Installation Manual. xxxx-sparc. Write environment variables Page 14 of 516 . the user “omclog” is to view the log file of the server and he only has the authority of reading the log file.tar” file.tar.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the server program of OMCR (V2).2 Installation procedure 1.xxxx-sparc. this user can only run the OMCHOME/tmp/ftp directory and only has the read authority. first obtain the password of the “root” user.2. 2.Z” of the OMCR (V2) software package to the directory specified by the environmental variable OMCHOME.xxxx-sparc. 2. Note that the key files should be backed up beforehand because the previous directory will be overwritten if it exists.tar. File copying 1) Copy the server software package “omc20. its HOME directory should be set as the start directory OMCHOME in principle. 2) Run the “uncompress omc20. 3) Run the “tar –vxf omc20. then run the following commands under root user environment: 1) Add the omc user group: groupadd omc 2) Add the omc user: useradd –g omc –d /export/home/omc omc 3) Set the password for the user omc: passwd omc 4) Setting the directory for the user omc: mkdir /export/home/omc 5) Assign the authority of accessing the directory to the user omc: chown omc: omc /export/home/omc The setting method of ftpuser user and omclog user are the same as that of omc user.Z” command to tar the software package so as to create the “omc20.2.tar” command to install the software package in the OMCHOME directory. All installation procedures below are implemented under omc user environment. To set above users and their authorities. the user “fptuser” is used for the OMCR (V2) client to transmit files via the FPT service and the server.xxxx-sparc. The default value is 0. Write the Config. The value of X is less than or equal to MaxModule. ModuleX indicates the module name. B. Section name: COMMON MaxProcess indicates the number of processes in the module. with the value range being: 0 ~ MaxModule.ini A. C. The value format of ProcessX is: “process mapping name + predefined Page 15 of 516 . OMCHOME = /export/home/omc export OMCHOME LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LD_LIBRARY_PATH:$ORACLE_HOME/lib :$OMCHOME/lib export LD_LIBRARY_PATH PATH = $PATH:$OMCHOME/bin export PATH OMCLOCALE=CHINESE export OMCLOCALE 3. The value of X is less than or equal to MaxLoas and is not allowed to repeat within a section. file 1) ampcfg. Then save and exit. Add the following contents in the file. with the value range being: 0~255. and is not allowed to repeat within a section. Section name: MODULE MaxModule indicates the number of modules in the system. with the value range being: 0 ~ 3. Currently. there are three modules. LoadX indicates the module list to be loaded for the server. Section name: LOAD MaxLoad indicates the number of modules to be loaded for the server. The number of modules can be extended.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Enter the HOME directory via the user omc and edit the profile file of the user via “vi”. please refer to the description in the [COMMON] section. The number must be equal to the set value of MaxProcess. which represents the loaded process information. and must be consistent with that of the corresponding item in the [MODULE] section. ModuleLoadTimeout indicates the module unloading timeout (in 100ms). The value of X should be less than that of MaxProcess. For the value format. Section name: PARAMETER AmpBCInterval indicates the broadcasting interval between the AMP machines (in 100ms). the time delay constant is 0. MaxProcess indicates the number of processes in the module. ModuleNoackTimeout indicates the module response timeout between the machines (in 100ms). The time delay constant should start with “D”. is not specified. and it is now allowed to repeat within the module. ProcessX indicates the information of the loaded process. and the time delay constant are optional. The time delay constant decides the time delayed to load the next process of the module after the current process is successfully loaded.. The default value is 0. The default value is 0. it will be allocated by the system after the process is loaded. The number of this item must be equal to the set value of MaxProcess. Section name: Application module ModuleNo is the module No. If the process No. The predefined process No. It is used for migration and the value range is: 0 to [MODULE]/MaxModule. The value of X is less than or equal to that of Takeover and is not allowed to repeat. with the value range being: 0 to 255. Page 16 of 516 . If not specified. ModuleLoadTimeout indicates the module loading timeout (in 100ms).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 process No. MaxTakeover indicates the number of other modules that can be taken over by the module. The value of X should be less than or equal to that of MaxProcess and is not allowed to repeat with the module. + time delay constant”. indicates the allocated process No. D. after the process is loaded. The predefined process No. TakeoverX indicates the names of modules that can be taken over. E. F.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 PsTestTimeout indicates the process test timeout (in 100ms). PsLoadTimeout indicates the process loading timeout (in 100ms). PsTestInterval indicates the process test interval (in 100ms). PsTestEnable indicates the process test enable switch. PsTestRetry indicates the retry times of testing the process. Configuration example [MODULE] MaxModule = 3 Module1 Module2 Module3 [LOAD] MaxLoad = 2 Load1 Load2 Load3 = DB = COM = AP = COM = DB = AP [COMMON] MaxProcess = 1 Process1 [COM] ModuleNo MaxProcess Process1 Process2 Process3 =1 =6 = MPCOMM 2 = CCF D10 = MPAC = GPO 1 Page 17 of 516 . PsShutdownTimeout indicates the process shut-down timeout (in 100ms). PsUnloadTimeout indicates the process unloading timeout (in 100ms). Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Process4 Process5 Process6 = PMONLAF = AGT = BAF MaxTakeover = 2 Takeover1 Takeover2 [DB] ModuleNo MaxProcess Process1 =2 =1 = DIF = DB = AP MaxTakeover = 1 Takeover1 [AP] ModuleNo MaxProcess Process1 Process2 Process3 Process4 Process5 Process6 Process7 Process8 Process9 Process10 Process11 Process12 =3 =1 = MPAA = ACF D10 = LMF 4 D10 = SMF = MCM = FMDISP = FMRELATE = FMFILTER = FMDBM = TOPM = DIAGLMF = OPMADMD = COM Page 18 of 516 . The configuration file defines the OMCR system. OPMADMD and PMONLMF in sequence of the loading. SMF. LMF. TOPM. Of which. LMF needs to be started via Process 4 one second later when ACF is successfully started. PMONLAF. which are MPAA. CCF. is 3. Description of the example As this configuration file is the configuration scheme for the standalone server. FMDBM. This machine is loaded with all three modules and one common module. MPAC is started one second later after the CCF is successfully started. MPCOMM is started via Process 2. It comprises one process DIF in total. MCM. is 1. FMDISP. FMRELATE. The process No. It comprises 13 processes in total. AP module No. DB module and AP module. COM module No. all the migration parameters in the configuration file are invalid.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Process13 = PMONLMF MaxTakeover = 0 [PARAMETER] AmpBCInterval ModuleNoackTimeout ModuleLoadTimeout = 30 = 90 = 1200 ModuleUnloadTimeout = 1200 PsTestInterval PsTestRetry PsUnloadTimeout PsShutdownTimeout PsLoadTimeout = 100 =3 = 800 = 300 = 50 F. which are: MPCOMM. the common module include one process GPO. ACF. DIAGLMF. is fixed as 1 after the loading. FMFILTER. COM module comprises 6 processes altogether. AGT and BAF in sequence of the loading. which are COM module. is 2. DB module No. SMF needs to be started one second later when LMF Page 19 of 516 . MPAC. It includes three logical modules altogether. The svrip2 indicates the IP address of Server 2.For Server: 128 ~ 139. B. for Client: 0~255. 2) syscfg. of different NMSS may be the same. no response timeout of the logical module among the multi-servers is 9 seconds. The machine No. It shall be set to 1 for the server. The svrmno1 indicates the machine No. the retry times for the process test failure are 3. the process test period within the server is 10 seconds. Section name: PROCESSNAME Process mapping name is used to set the information of the process when being loaded. of Server 1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 is successfully started. Mno indicates the machine No. and set to 0 for the client. the unloading timeout of a single Daemon process is 80 seconds. the loading timeout of a single process is 5 seconds. to uniquely identify one machine in the network management system (NMS). the shutdown timeout of a single process is 30 seconds. The nmdomain indicates the network management domain. used to identify a set of NMS. The svrip1 indicates the IP address of Server 1. The ip indicates the IP address of the machine. The running parameters of AMP are described as follows: The heart-beat test period among the AMP multi-servers is 3 seconds. of Server 2. Section name: LOCAL ”Server” indicates that this configuration file is used for the server or the client. The process mapping name is not allowed to contain more than 8 characters.ini A. both the loading and unloading timeout of the logical module are 120 seconds. Section name: SVRINFO (This section is invalid at the server) The svrnum indicates the number of servers in the system. The parameters of the command line are described as follows: Item Default value Description Page 20 of 516 . C. The svrmno2 indicates the machine No. The default value is 3. GSM indicates that the OMCR (V2) system is used in the GSM environment and GPRS indicates that the OMCR (V2) system is used in the GPRS environment. with the value range being: 0 to 5. The default value is 1. and 0 for No. 1 means to store all the debugging information in the same file (tracelog). The default value is 200 (in 100ms). FsmShutdownTimeout indicates the FSM shutdown timeout constant. FsmTestRetry indicates the FSM test retry times. Page 21 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 -C process -A invoking -M 100 Allowable max. 1 stands for Yes. Environment indicates the current environment of the OMCR (V2) system. E. number of the consumer threads within the 0 Size of the signal pool for the thread-level synchronous 128 Size of the mailbox of internal AMPA in the process D. The tracepath indicates the output path of the LOG file. AmpExist indicates the AMP existence flag (0 for the client). The traceprint indicates whether to print the debugging information on the screen or not. 2 means to respectively output the debugging information according to the process name. the output is to the current path. The tracemode indicates the output mode of the debugging information. Section name: AMPACFG FsmTestInterval indicates the Finite State Machine (FSM) test time interval. Section name: SYSCFG The trace indicates whether to record the debugging information in the LOG file. and 0 for No. with the value range being: 0~0xffffffff. As some windows are different in different environments. If it is null. the graphics shown in the two environments will be separately listed in this manual. 1 stands for Yes. The cmdlogfile indicates the path for storing the client command record file (used at the client). The value range is: 0 or 1. The value range is 0 or 1. MANumber indicates the number of CMIPM channels of LMF-LAF. MoThreshold indicates that the multi-threads should be adopted to load the data if the number of MOs in the database exceeds the specified value when the AGT starts to load the data. The default value is 4. The default value is 1. The value range is 0 or 1. The value range is 1~255 and the default value is 4. The default value is 1. FsmTestEnable indicates the FSM test enable flag. The default value is 1. The default value is 0.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 AmpNoackTimeout indicates the AMP no response timeout constant (invalid at the client). Section name: MITCFG LoadLevel indicates the layer at which the AGT starts to load the data. ABNumber indicates the number of CMIPM channels of LAF-BAF. The value range is 1~255. FsmTestNumEach indicates the number of FSMs tested each time. H. The value range is 1 ~ 10. AANumber indicates the number of CMIPM channels of LAF-LAF. The default value is 0. F. The value range is 0 or 1. Configuration example (syscfg.ini used by the server) [LOCAL] server = 1 mno = 129 nmdomain = 2 Page 22 of 516 . TraceErrorCode is used for debugging to output the errored bit stream. The value range is 1 ~ 10. The value range is 0 or 1. The default value is 1. The default value is 1. Section name: CMISCFG TraceCode is the flag of displaying the encoding and decoding bit stream. The value range is 1 ~ 10. G. AmpDependence indicates whether the process exists depending on the AMP. 20.11 [PROCESSNAME] GPO = gpo MPCOMM = mpcomm CCF = ccf DIF = difsvr ACF = acf BAF = baf bafctrl = bafctrl LMF = lmf AGT = agt -dbg -C1024 -M1024 MCM = cmproc SMF = fakesmf MPAC = mpac MPAA = mpaa DIFPROC = difproc TOPM = topm FMFILTER = fmfilter FMRELATE = fmrelate FMDISP = fmdisp FMDBM = fmdbm DIAGLMF = diaglmf OPMADMD = opmadmd [SYSCFG] trace = 1 traceprint=1 tracemode=2 Page 23 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 ip = 138.1. The FSM shutdown timeout is 30 seconds.1. the IP address is 138.ini example at the server Machine No. #MANumber = 2 #AANumber = 2 #ABNumber = 2 [MITCFG] LoadLevel = 4 MoThreshold = 500 I. AA for LAF-LAF and AB for LAF-BAF. The message mapping will not be shown. The FSM test time interval within the process is 20 seconds. of the server is 129. The number of FSMs Page 24 of 516 . Description of the syscfg.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 tracepath= showeventmap=0 [AMPACFG] FsmTestInterval = 200 FsmTestRetry = 3 FsmShutdownTimeout = 300 FsmTestNumEach = 20 AmpExist = 1 AmpNoackTimeout = 1000 AmpaTrace = 0 [CMISCFG] #TraceCode = 1 TraceErrorCode = 1 #CMIPM channel number configuration: MA stands for LMF-LAF.11 and the network management domain where the server resides is 29. The debugging record will be written into the file (stored at the current directory) according to the process. The test retry times is 3. and will be shown on the screen simultaneously.20. exe OPLOG = logop. J.1.11 [PROCESSNAME] GPO = gpocc.exe MKF = mkfc. The AMP no response timeout is 100 seconds. The number of CIMPM channels is 1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 tested each time is 40.exe PERFORMANCE = wpmadmx.3.exe DIAGTEST = diagwsf. The errored bit stream is shown.exe ALARM = fmwsf.1.exe DATABASEMONI= pmonwsf. The AGT starts to load the data at layer 4.exe TRACE = ivktrc.20.exe AUTH = smclient.exe Page 25 of 516 .exe SOFTLOAD = swwsf.exe TESTTOOL = CliWin.exe PERFORMANCEAN = pap. Configuration example (syscfg.ini used in the client) [LOCAL] server = 0 mno = 224 ip = 138.exe RADIORESOURCE = rrcwsf.154 [SVRINFO] svrnum = 1 svrmno1 = 129 svrip1 = 138.exe WAF = wafc. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 [SYSCFG] trace = 1 cmdlogfile = e:\OMCHOME\Client\dat\cmd.ini example at the client Machine No. Ipj (the value of j is 1 ~ m. of the foreground receiving process. Description of the syscfg. of the foreground sending process. which must be consistent with that configured at the BSC. BmfSendPno indicates the No. Section name: BSCi. IsRemote shows the physical location of the BSC relative to that of OMC-R. The client is connected with the server whose machine No. The IP address is 138. B.ini A.11.154.log [AMPACFG] FsmTestInterval = 1000 AmpExist=0 K. The path for storing the client command record file is e:\OMCHOME\Client\dat\cmd.1.20. Section name: GENERAL BSCNum indicates the number of BSCs managed by the OMC-R. ModuleIDj (the value of j is 1 ~ m. ModuleNum indicates all modules of the BSC (including the central and peripheral modules). where the value of i is from 1 to n. BSCID is the identity of BSC.log. where m represents the number of Page 26 of 516 . at the client is 224.1. based on the central module. where m is the module identity) indicates the IP address of MP at each module. BmfRecePno indicates the No. LocalModuleNum indicates the number of local modules of the BSC. is 129 and IP address is 138. The previous one is for the left MP and the later one is for the right MP.3. 3) bscfg. 200. ModuleNum = 4 # The number of local modules at the BSC LocalModuleNum = 4 # The IP address of the Main Processor (MP) at each module: the previous one is for the left MP and the later one is for the right MP. C.8 192.73.200. #BSC1: example.73.73. the module No. The first module must be the central module. IP1 = 192.73. all modules are local.119 IP2 = 192. [BSC1] #BSC ID is the identity of BSC. BSCNum = 2 # The name of each section in the following respectively indicates BSC1 ~ BSCn. [GENERAL] # The number of BSCs managed by the OMC-R. which must be consistent with that configured at the BSC. namely.200. based on the central module.200.200.73. BSCID = 55 # Show the physical location of the BSC relative to that of OMC-R.4 192. for local BSC. their IP addresses should be in the same network segment with that of OMC-R. is 1.38 Page 27 of 516 . Configuration example #GENERAL section stores the general information of OMC-R.200.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 modules) indicates the information of each module.73.21 192.19 IP3 = 192. # As all modules are local. IsRemote = 0 # The number of all modules at the BSC (including the central and peripheral modules). This IP address is not allowed to be in the same network segment with that of OMC-R to facilitate the IP routing.90 BmfRecePno = 90 BmfSendPno = 91 ModuleID1 = 1 ModuleID2 = 5 ModuleID3 = 2 D.77 # Numbers of the foreground sending and receiving processes BmfRecePno = 90 BmfSendPno = 91 # Information of each module. The first module must be the central module. ModuleID1 = 1 ModuleID2 = 3 ModuleID3 = 8 ModuleID4 = 5 #BSC: The remote BSC of the three modules [BSC2] BSCID = 10 IsRemote = 1 ModuleNum = 3 # The local module is unavailable for the remote BSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 IP4 = 192.73.89. BSC1 is the local BSC and BSC2 Page 28 of 516 .73. This item must be 0. LocalModuleNum = 0 # It is only necessary to write the IP address of the central module for the remote module.89 192.89. namely. is 1.200.200.89. Description of the example Two BSCs are configured in this example. IP1 = 192.17 192.89. Module No. ALMDIFQUERYABANDON indicates the query abandon request proportion alarm threshold (permillage). MAXQUERYRESULTTIME indicates the Max. DBALMREMAINSPACE indicates the alarm threshold of the remaining space of the alarm table.ini A. DBCFGREMAINSPACE indicates the alarm threshold of the remaining space for the configuration table. 4) dbcfg. holding time of querying the cache (in seconds). ALMDIFQUERYFAILURE indicates the query failure request proportion alarm threshold (permillage). Section name: ALARM ALMDIFSERVERABANDON indicates the service abandon request proportion alarm threshold (permillage). B. MAXSERVERWAITTIME indicates the Max. Section name: SPACE MAXSERVERCACHETIME indicates the Max. DBALMREMAINPROP indicates the proportion alarm threshold of the remaining space of the alarm table. DBCFGREMAINPROP indicates the proportion alarm threshold of the remaining space of the configuration table. Page 29 of 516 . The lines starting with the “#” symbol are the comment line. wait time for the server execution (in seconds). ALMDIFSERVERFAILURE indicates the service failure request proportion alarm threshold (permillage). DBPFMREMAINSPACE indicates the alarm threshold of the remaining space of the performance table.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 is the remote BSC. holding time of querying the result (in seconds). cache time requested by the server (in seconds). MAXQUERYCACHETIME indicates the Max. TRANS_SESSIONNUM indicates the number of connections of the transaction database. D. PROC_INTERVAL_DELAY indicates the time delay when the DIFSVR FSM starts the DIFPROC FSM. DBINSTANCE indicates the database instance No. F. INIT_CONFIG_FILE indicates the file-writing flag of the initial configuration. PASSWORD indicates the password used to connect the database. Section name: SESSION IND_SESSIONNUM indicates the number of connections of the independent (non-transaction) database. Section name: DATABASE DBMSTYPE indicates the database type. E. DIFVERSION indicates the database version No. Configuration example [SPACE] MAXSERVERCACHETIME = 50 MAXQUERYCACHETIME = 200 MAXSERVERWAITTIME = 50 MAXQUERYRESULTTIME = 200 [ALARM] ALMDIFSERVERABANDON = 50 ALMDIFSERVERFAILURE = 50 Page 30 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 DBPFMREMAINPROP indicates the percentage threshold of the remaining space proportion alarm of the performance table. USERNAME indicates the user name used to connect the database. Section name: DELAY PRE_PROC_DELAY indicates the time delay before the DIFSVR FSM starts several DIFPROC FSMs. C. DIFVERSION indicates the DIF version No. 0. cache time of the service request is 50s. the user name of Page 31 of 516 . holding time of querying the result is 200s.0 USERNAME = omc PASSWORD = omc G. the number of connections of the transaction database is 3. the database instance No. the alarm threshold of the service abandon request proportion is 5%. is OMC. the DIF version No.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 ALMDIFQUERYFAILURE = 50 DBCFGREMAINSPACE = 10 DBCFGREMAINPROP = 85 DBALMREMAINSPACE = 10 DBALMREMAINPROP = 85 DBPFMREMAINSPACE = 10 DBPFMREMAINPROP = 85 [SESSION] IND_SESSIONNUM = 3 TRANS_SESSIONNUM = 3 [DELAY] PRE_PROC_DELAY = 0 PROC_INTERVAL_DELAY = 5 INIT_CONFIG_FILE = 0 [DATABASE] DBMSTYPE = ORACLE DBINSTANCE = OMC DIFVERSION = V1. the max. the number of connections of the independent database is 3. Description of the example The max. the alarm threshold of the service failure request proportion is 5%. the max. the alarm threshold of query failure request proportion is 5%. the database type is ORACLE. waiting time for the service execution is 50s. is 1. 2. 4. Description The dbcfg. which stores the database user and the password.ini is the configuration file of the database. such as /export/omc/sql/. there is the following structure under the OMCHOME directory of OMCR (V2) server: OMCHOME: System initial /export/home/omc directory bin: lib: conf: directory. parameter2 indicates the data file path of the database.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 connecting the database is OMC. and which can only be read by the authorized system administrator. H. Run the database setup script in the sqlplus @/export/omc/sql/setup. usually corresponding to System executable file directory System dynamic link library directory System configuration file directory Special Chinese configuration file required for Chinese: internationalization English: internationalization dat: rlog: omcboot: Special English configuration file required for System data file directory Directory to store system operation log Directory to store system boot script Page 32 of 516 .2. the password for connecting the database is OMC. 2.sql parameter1 parameter2. Where: parameter1 indicates the directory where the setup.3 Installation check 1.sql script is stored. such as /export/oracle/omcdb/. Directory structure After the installation is completed. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 utility: Directory to store some system tools locale: Internationalized resource directory Chinese resource English resource System temporary file directory Directory used by the ftp client Directory to store LOG file (changeable) Chinese: English: tmp: ftp: log: pmmeas: Directory to store the files reported by the foreground performance data (changeable) 2. Running environment Run the “echo” command to check whether such environmental variables as OMCHOME.ini.ini. Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4. Run the “vi” command to check whether the configuration files such as syscfg. PATH.ini. One mobile office can be configured with multiple clients. 2.3. 2.3 Client installation This part introduces the installation of the OMCR (V2) client. Before it is started. vi syscfg. OMCR (V2) client installation is performed under NT environment. e.1 Software requirements The client has the following requirements on system software and machine performance: 1. 2. lmfcfg.ini and bsccfg. supporting OMCR (V2) multi-terminal operation. echo $OMCHOME. first install Windows NT and Excel. ampcfg. e. dbcfg. OMCR (V2) client program.0 (or Windows 2000 Page 33 of 516 .g.ini.g.ini are correctly set according to the OMCR (V2) server and the actual situations of BSC MP. LD_LIBRARY_PATH are properly configured according to the above directory structure. To install Windows NT 4. Microsoft Windows NT Service Pack 4 or higher version is required. Also ensure that the client setup tool and the client software are in the directory of the same level. and the server should be also installed. and 128MB or more is recommended. After selecting the necessary language. 3. A space of at least 50MB is required for client program and help file Help file can be installed in another directory. 5. The installation of the client in the OMCR (V2) system should be conducted on the basis of the wizard mode. More disk space will be needed during operation. 2-1.3. 2-2. Click setup. Before installing OMCR (V2) client program. please properly install NT Workstation and Excel in Microsoft Office first. English to install the client of English version.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 professional Edition).0. 4. 64MB memory is required for program running. click <OK> to pop up the window shown in Fig. Fig.exe to enter the language selection window shown in Fig.2 Installation procedure The client is installed after Windows NT and Service Pack 4 have been installed. 2. select U.S. 2-1 Client setup wizard 1 Select Chinese to install the client of Chinese version. Page 34 of 516 . 6. with the value range of 140 ~ 254. 2-3 Client setup wizard 3 Input the machine No. of the local host. 2-3. Fig. Click <Next> to enter the window of inputting the IP address of the local Page 35 of 516 . 2-2 Client setup wizard 2 Click <Next> to pop up the window of entering the machine No.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig.. as shown in Fig. 2-4 Client setup wizard 4 Check whether the displayed IP address is consistent with that of the local host. 2-5. Fig. Fig. manually change the IP address of the local host. If not. 2-5 Client setup wizard 5 Page 36 of 516 . 2-4.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 host. Then click <Next> to pop up the window shown in Fig. as shown in Fig. Click <Next> to pop up the window shown in Fig. 2-6. Then the server setting window will pop up. Click <Next> to start the setup program. 2-7. as shown in Fig. 2-6 Client setup wizard 6 Input the setup directory of the Help file. Page 37 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Input the client setup directory in the window. Fig. 2-8. Establish the session with server application. and it is the process started most earlier by the client. Click <OK> to end the installation. Disconnection. providing graphical interface to operation user for convenient and quick operation of the OMCR (V2) system. Realize main interface application of the client. 2. Realize the process for the user to exit the whole system.4 Main interface OMCR (V2) system main interface is a client process. 2-7 Client setup wizard 7 Add the configuration information of the server domain. 2-8 Client setup wizard 8 Select the restart computer item. It mainly implements the following functions: 1. as shown in Fig. The main interface shows the basic configuration of the system in the topology mode. Realize user logon and obtain information from server after logon succeeds. The user can also activate the appropriate application module via the menus in Page 38 of 516 . you can log on to the OMCR (V2) system and enter various operation/maintenance interfaces via the main interface for operation and maintenance. 2. Fig. 3. After the computer is restarted. Click <OK>.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Fig. The logon interface is shown in Fig.4.g. he should first log on to the system to be authenticated so as to ensure that only a legal user can execute the authorized operation. Special protection for client and server application link. if the user intends to enter the system. figures and underlines. 2. alarm code information and error message code from the server. security management and tool management} or start the character terminal. then the enter OMCR (V2) system main interface. The name shall contain 3 characters at least. 4. 2-9. In the WINDOW NT desktop. double click the icon of starting the OMCR (V2) system to enter the system. performance management. interface configuration information and command syntax structure table information required for syntax check.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the main interface (e. After the system is logged on successfully. where he is requested to input the user name and password. First the user will enter the system logon interface. configuration management. the system will prompt the user for the login failure and the user will be refused to enter the OMCR (V2) system. alarm management. and 20 characters at most. the user will be allowed to enter the OMCR (V2) system. It must start with Page 39 of 516 . Please note that one user on the client can only log on the system with one identity at the same time. If the user name and the password are verified to be correct.1 User logon From the point view of the system security. Otherwise. it will obtain relevant topology tree information. 2-9 System logon User name: It is required to input 3~20 visible characters (including uppercase and lowercase letters. figures and punctuation marks. it prompts “System login failure! Please try again!”.) Password: It is required to input 6~10 visible characters (including uppercase and lower case letters. Page 40 of 516 . 2.g. the user can enter the corresponding application module interface as desired (e. Otherwise. The password shall contain 6 characters at least and 10 characters at most. “Help” button: Click it to enter the help system of OMCR (V2) system. configuration management.4. ) “OK” button: Click this button to establish the link between client and server. performance management.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 a letter. “Cancel” button: Click this button to exit the process of the main interface. 2-10 after a successful login. alarm management. The main interface provides graphical interface and displays system basic configuration information in topology map or map for users’ convenient and quick operation of this system. security management and tool management} or start the character terminal. The cursor will focus on the position of inputting the user name. If the link is successfully created. Through the main interface. 2-10).2 Main interface The main interface is as shown in Fig. it will enter the main interface (as shown in Fig. Page 41 of 516 . so users can learn about the current configuration of the system clearly. Double click a BTS icon to pop up the interface for displaying all BTS configurations under the BSC. 2-11. as shown in Fig. 2-10 The main interface System topology map is displayed on the main interface.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. The smallest nodes on the topology map indicates BTSs. and each BSC has a base station icon to represent all the BTSs under it. as shown in Fig. the node will not flash. 2-11 BSC – BTS topology map The OMCR (V2) nodes on the main interface topology map indicate the link states between OMCR (V2) server and various modules of the BSC managed by it. Page 42 of 516 . Right click the node to display the link states between the server and all modules of the BSC. If all the links are normal. the node will flash.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig.If one link disconnects. 2-12. database configuration and monitoring. 2-12 Link state display There is a menu bar under the system topology map. Help: OMCR (V2) Help. Security management: Includes operation log management and user management. 7.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Configuration management: Includes radio resource management. invoke trace and signaling trace. Fault management: Includes alarm management and test management. refresh. software loading. 3. performance analysis console. Performance Management: Includes performance management. 5. Directory and index. which contains the following menus: 1. 4. and background selection. Users may select the desired menu item to enter the corresponding man Page 43 of 516 . About OMCR (V2). System Tools: Include character terminal. Exit. dynamic data management and integrated configuration management. 2. 6. The system will perform special processing under some special situations. The command equals to the operation on the man-machine window. The user need not log in to the system again. “Refresh” under "System Tools" is used to refresh the contents displayed on the main interface.4. the command result will be shown.3 Exiting the system To exit OMCR (V2) system. “Background selection” under “System Tools” is used to select different background settings so as to change the background shown on the main interface. Meanwhile. with the same effects of the command box at the bottom of the man-machine interface. which is used for inputting MMI man-machine commands.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 machine interface for operation and maintenance. The main interface process will disconnect all application links and pop up a prompt box. 2. the main interface will automatically re-establish the link and prompt the user about this. such as the interruption due to the server migration or physical causes. The main interface will also monitor the service process at the client and handle the abnormal service process so as to realize the system security and the normal shutdown. Click <OK> to exit the system. 2-13. as shown in Fig. Click “Character terminal” under “System Tools” to enter the character command inputting mode. As for the normal disconnection. the window is blank. Page 44 of 516 . click “Exit” on the menu bar of the main interface. In this case. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 2-13 Exit the system Page 45 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3 Security Management Security management includes user access security and network security. operation and managed object. 3. network transmission security. application process security and data integrity control. including verification. between system and client. illegal access reject. Users must have a certain right to perform the corresponding BSS and OMCR (V2) management operations. Security management involves user management and operation log modules on the background workstation. etc. intercepted. modified or falsified. In conclusion.1 Overview OMCR (V2) user management module ensures management transaction processing security. User management is mainly used to set legal users and their corresponding operation/administration right.1 User management User management handles contents related to user right and network transmission security. The network transmission security includes prevention of the data transmitted on the network from being eavesdropped. The security system is divided into three levels: user. access right verification. while operation log is used to record logon information and system fault detection. and between system and internal users. Page 46 of 516 . The node security includes the application process security and the protection of the data integrity. 3. security management includes the following four parts: user access control. The network security includes two aspects: network transmission security and network node security. The final requirement on the user access security is that only users with legal identities and network resources access rights can access the network resources. The requirements can be classified into identification.1. access control and data consistency between systems. Operation commands from the client are sent to LMF. The operated objects of grant include all manageable resources such as MO. rights of different users are organized via grant operations on the client using the user group and role. Operations requiring verification are written into configuration files. security management will authenticate them according to the configuration in configuration files. The security management has four major function modules: Grant module. so as to ensure the synchronization of the data in the memory and the database. Operation verification module verifies each user operation to make sure that it is granted. The grant module accomplishes the creation. verification module. role. if such operations are performed in the system. and then handles them in the corresponding modules. deletion and query function of OMCR (V2) user operation right information. which distributes them to various application modules for them to perform verification invoke.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 User management function is a functional module in OMCR (V2) system. First. it handles contents related to user right and network transmission security. Security verification includes user operation verification and compound command verification. the later of which is not available for now. data management module and network transmission security module. Page 47 of 516 . The verification module mainly completes the verification function. user. According to different management functions and different management resource ranges. User’s right can be organized by user group and role. The data management module mainly completes the secure data management and provides other modules with interfaces. The network transmission security module mainly completes the function of encrypting and decrypting information between the server and the client. Then. operation and operated object and return the commands to the invoked modules. user management divides users into multiple user groups. Security management accepts security operation requests from various applications. etc. which then authenticate the operations according to user ID. user group. different users log on from the client and perform various operations. modification. The grant module mainly completes the grant function. User group’s right is the sum of direct rights and rights of all contained roles. modification. and provides data interfaces for other modules. including the creation.1. 2. Role’s right is the sum of direct rights and rights of all contained roles. Non-management user cannot perform grant operations. 3.1 Operations of user management interface Brief introduction to operations After OMCR (V2) system is installed. 3. One role can contain other roles. The grant of operated objects is to define on which operated objects the operation can be performed. Granted objects include operated objects and special commands. Role setting: Create the role then add or delete rights of the role. User group is also a set of roles. the grant of special commands defines whether the command is available for use. It can be granted directly. Role is a group unit of right.1. Granted objects include operated objects and special commands. The objects of security management grant are user. 1. deletion and query of security data. and one user has all rights of all user groups containing the user. It can be granted directly. Since there is no operated object for special commands. Page 48 of 516 . The operation procedure is as follows: 1. Local management users can modify the rights of other users.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Data management module mainly accomplishes the management of data in memory and database. Users are classified as local management users and non-management users. Users cannot be granted directly.2. User group: User group is a set of a group of users. a root user and some other default users are created automatically. but cyclic nesting (self-contain) is not allowed.2 3. corresponding adjustments and settings should be done with user management. User: system user with certain rights. user group and role. Role: A set of executable management operations. If these users are not enough for actual application. User’s right is the sum of the rights of all user groups containing the user. User group setting: Create a user group. display column and command box. add or delete role in the user group. 3. added or deleted. or directly add or delete right of the user group.1. there are menu bar. Fig. tool bar. 3-1 User Management On the interface from the top down. Only local management user with user management right can perform user management operations. select “Security Management” -> “User Management” on OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the user management interface.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2. 3. modified. User setting: Create a user. Rights already set can be checked. 3-1. as shown in Fig. The menus on the menu-bar are: Page 49 of 516 .2.2 Entering the user management interface After successful logon. then add the user into one or more user groups. user groups and roles. The left list in Fig. It is necessary to point out that. Modify Role Attribute. except the compound command. Command Box. The user can directly input the MML command in the command box to complete an operation. User Group Grant. only the command related with the user management can be input in the user management application window. The procedure is as follows: select the menu item: View -> Refresh. The buttons on the toolbar correspond to the menus in the menu bar. 3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1. Modify User Attribute. Role Grant.1. Delete Role. About OMCR (V2). File: Create User Wizard and Exit. the display can be refreshed in order to display the current user management information in real time. Since there are other terminals operating user management. Role Grant. click “Role” in the left tree topology diagram to enter the “Role management” interface shown in Fig. User Group Role Grant. Grant Attached User Group. 3-1. 3-2. When the operation is performed at the interface. Operation: Create User. View: Toolbar. Operation. User Group Grant. Modify Group Attribute. Create User Group. Role Grant of User Group. Role Grant of Role and Role Grant. From left to right. Status Bar. Help and Exit. the relevant MML command will be displayed in the command box. The list on the right displays user group information of the user. Refresh. Help: OMCR (V2) Help Topic. the buttons on the toolbar in turn are: User Group Grant of the User. role information of the user group or role information of the role and right information of the operated object. Directory and Index. 3. Delete User Group. Operated Object. Refresh. Page 50 of 516 . Create Role. 2.2. Delete Use. 3-1 displays the tree view of all current users. 4.3 Role management In Fig. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Create a role In the main menu. Page 51 of 516 . Modify a role Select “Operation → Modify Role Attribute” in the main menu to enter the “Modify Role” dialog box shown in Fig. as shown in Fig. select “Operate → Create Role” to pop up the “Create Role” dialog box. 3-2 Role management The list on the right displays the names and descriptions of all current roles. Then you can view or modify the settings of the selected role in the dialog box. 3-4. 1. 3-3. 3-3 Create a role 2. select “Operation → Role Grant of the Role”. 3-5. select “Operation → Delete Role” to delete the role. as shown in Fig. 4.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. except that the role name cannot be changed. 3-4 Modify role The “Modify Role” dialog box is similar to the “Create Role” dialog box. Role grant of the role In the main menu. 3. Page 52 of 516 . Delete a role In the main menu. The following scenarios exist: 1) Special command grant. Role grant In the main menu. select “Operation →Role Grant”.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 53 of 516 . 3-6. as shown in Fig. 3-5 Role grant of the role 5. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 3-7. 3-7 Managed object grant Page 54 of 516 . 3-6 Special command grant 2) Managed object grant. as shown in Fig. as shown in Fig. Fig.4 User group management In Fig.1.2. 3-8. Page 55 of 516 . click “User Group” in the tree topology diagram on the left to enter the “User Group Management” interface shown in Fig. 3-1. 3-9.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3) Managed object type grant. 3-8 Managed object type grant 3. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 F Fig. 2. Create a user group In the main menu. select “Operation → Create User Group” to pop up the “Create User Group” dialog box shown in Fig. 3-10 Create user group In the “Create User Group” dialog box. its name cannot be changed unless it is deleted. Once a group is created. 1. 3-9 User group management The list on the right displays the names and descriptions of all current roles. you can set the name of the new group and give a brief description. 3-10. Modify a user group Page 56 of 516 . 3-12. select “Operation → Delete User Group” to delete a user group. Then you can view or modify the settings of the selected user group in the dialog box. Fig. 3. Page 57 of 516 . The role grant of the user group can be carried out. Role grant of the user group In the main menu. 3-11 Modify user group The “Modify User Group” dialog box is similar to the “Create User Group” dialog box.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Select “Operation → Modify Group Attribute” in the main menu to enter the “Modify User Group” dialog box shown in Fig. 4. 3-11. except that the group name cannot be changed. select “Operation → Role Grant of the User Group”. as shown in Fig. Delete a user group In the main menu. 1.2. click “User” in the tree topology diagram on the left to view the user list shown in Fig. In Fig. modify. and delete user information. User belongs to a user group. 3-1. and has the operation/maintenance rights of the user group.5 User management User refers to the legal operation/maintenance personnel that administrates and maintains the whole BSS LAN and OMCR (V2) system itself via OMCR (V2) system. 3-12 Role grant of the user group 3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. view. The display column displays the logon names and descriptions of all legal users in list form: User management involves operations such as create user. 3-13. Page 58 of 516 . One user may belong to one or more user groups. You can perform operations such as create user. 3-14. modify. 1. Fig. 3-14 Create user Page 59 of 516 . view. 3-13 User management The display column displays the names and descriptions of all current user groups.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. and delete user information. as shown in Fig. Create a user In the main menu. select “Operation → Create User”. password and description. as shown in Fig. digits and underlines. 3 characters at least. 3-13. and 10 characters at most. User name and password format: 1) User name should consist of upper-case or lowercase letters. Input the logon password of the user and repeat it. Then you can view or modify the settings of selected user in the dialog box. 3-15. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Input the user logon name. Fig. digits and punctuation marks. lowercase letters. 2) Password should consist of upper-case letters. Delete a user Select the user to be deleted on the user management interface shown in Fig. View and modify user information Double click the user to be modified in the display column shown in Fig. 3. and must start with letters. Modify attached user group of the user Page 60 of 516 . then click “Delete” button to delete it. and select whether the user is a local administrator or not in the dialog box. Yet the password and description of the user can be modified. 6 characters at least. Input a brief description for the user. 20 characters at most. 4. 3-13 or select the user to be modified and click “Modify” button to enter the “Modify User” dialog box. 3-15 Modify a user The logon name of the user cannot be modified. 1. 3-16 Attached user group grant 3. select “View → Operation” to enter all operation lists shown in Fig. Page 61 of 516 .2. View all operations In Fig. Fig. select “Operation → Attached Group Grant”. as shown in Fig. 3-17.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In the main menu.6 Viewing rights 1. 3-1. 3-16. 3-17 View all rights 2. as shown in Fig. Then all operations of the operation code will be displayed after selection. View all operated objects Select “View -> Operated Object” in the main menu shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 3-18: Page 62 of 516 . and a dialog box will pop up for you to select the operation code. 3-1. 7 Creating the user wizard In Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 3-1.2. 3-18 View operated objects 3. 3-19. select “File → Create User Wizard” to enter all operation lists shown in Fig. Page 63 of 516 .1. the commands of creating the user and granting can be input.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 3-20. 3-19 The wizard: select the operation function Select the user-required functions to be created and select or not select “Full Control”. Click “Next” to pop up the dialog box. 3-20 The wizard: select the operated object Then click “Cancel” to exit or select “Next” to pop up the dialog box of creating the user. Page 64 of 516 . including operator. tracing the modification of system parameters. and locating relevant responsible terminals and operators. 3. Click “Cancel” to exit the wizard. Only nodes in layer 1 and layer 2 of the topology tree can be selected. “Read”.2.2 3. operation time and operation content.1 Operation log Overview Operation log is used to record all operations initialized from the client and performed on the server. then select ranges of the operated objects required by the user to be created. After “Next” is selected in the dialog box of creating the user. Fig. as shown in Fig. The interface of operation log on the workstation client provides log view for observing fault in time. 3-21.2. users may use filter at startup to locate concerned records. the operation log main interface shown in Fig. select “Security Management” -> “Operation Log” on OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the operation log interface (as shown in Fig. Fig. 3-21 Operation log main interface – initial filter After “OK” is clicked in Fig.2 Operations of the operation log interface After successful logon. 3-22 will appear. 3-21). or click “OK” button to view the latest 1000 records in the last week. Page 65 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3. Due to the large data size in operation log. When Page 66 of 516 . the log information is shown in the list form. Refresh. OMCR (V2) Help Topic. About OMCR (V2). Help and Exit. Exit. Save As…. Operation class. Log: Open…. Command Box and Refresh. Operation status. Status Bar. display column and command box. Save As…. Operator and terminal number. 3-22 Operation log main interface On the interface from the top down. End time. The menus on the menu-bar are: 1. Printer Setup…. Print…. 3. Detailed Information. It includes: Start time. In the display column. Clear All Events. View: All Events. Detailed Information. the buttons on the toolbar in turn are: Open File. there are menu bar. Command box is the character input interface. Command code. Toolbar. Cancel Log Query Operation. From left to right. Directory and Index. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Clear All Events. Filter Events. The user can directly input the MML command in the command box to complete an operation. tool bar. the relevant MML command will be displayed in the command box. 3-23 to filter events.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the interface operation is performed. as shown in Fig.1 Viewing log Multiple modes are provided in the menu for convenient viewing of log information. then enter the operation log main interface shown in Fig. 3. View all events Select menu “View -> All Events” to view all log information in the current database. 1. Filter Events Filter events is to set log query condition. 2. If filter event is selected.2. 3-22 to display the log events that match the filter condition. 3-23.2. Select menu “View -> Filter Events”. User may filter log information displayed on the interface to display the records that match the condition. while not matched records are not displayed on the interface. Page 67 of 516 . the system will first enter the dialog box shown in Fig. and the “Filter” dialog box will pop up. and the detailed information in text form can also be displayed. operation terminal and operation class. operator. the display column on Fig. Begin time and end time can be set to display only the records between them. 3-22 operation log interface.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. double click it or select menu “View Page 68 of 516 . 3-23 Filter events Events can be filtered by the combination of time. View detailed information The command code of log item is represented by code. 3-22 operation log interface will display the log information that matches the filter condition. Select the desired log item in the display column shown in Fig. After the filter is confirmed. operation status. the last event of end time refers to the last event in the current database. 3. The first event of begin time refers to the earliest event in the current database. 4. The procedure is as follows: select menu “View -> Refresh”. as shown in Fig. and the “Detailed Information” dialog box will pop up. Page 69 of 516 . so the display can be refreshed in order to display the current log information in real time.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 -> Detailed Information”. including specific content of the MML command of the operation. Refresh New operation records will be produced along with the running of the system. 3-24. 3-24 Detailed Information Information description in text form is given on the lower part of the dialog box. Fig. This means that you can save all log information in the current database. or save log information in the specific period of specific class after filtering events. Page 70 of 516 .2. Fig. 3-25. 3-25 Save As Select the directory to save the log file and input the file name. Select menu “Log -> Save As…”. as shown in Fig. only the “Save as type” is different. Save log All records displayed on the current interface can be saved into log files manually. or save an opened log file as another log file with different file name.2 Log operation 1.zlg file. and the dialog box shown in Fig. The “Save As” dialog box adopts WIN WORD style.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3. 2. Open log Opening log is used to open a log file. Select menu “Log -> Open” or click “Open File” button on the tool bar. so it is not described in detail here. 3-26 will pop up. same as all that in OMCR (V2) system. with “save as type” being *. the “Save As” dialog box will pop up.2. click “Yes” button. same as that in OMCR (V2) system. The “Open” dialog box adopts WIN WORD style. 3-27 Log deletion confirmation To save the current contents. Select menu “Log → Clear All Events” to delete the log. Delete the log Clearing all events is used to delete all operation log items from the database. Fig. For opened log file. so it is not described in detail here. the “Save Log” dialog box will pop up to save the log fie. 3-27 will pop up and ask whether to save the contents currently displayed. and auto close the log file. display the current log. the dialog box shown in Fig. Before the deletion. Detailed information of the log item displayed in the opened log file can be viewed. 3-26 Open a log file Select the desired log file and click “Open”. Page 71 of 516 . select menu “View -> All Events” to reread the log database. 3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. enable and disable according to various alarm rules (filter rule. and modify. for the sake of the normal operation and maintenance of the system. 2) Alarm processing knowledge base management: It provides the ability to query the alarm processing methods. without any alarm unreported or any false alarm. In ZXG10-BSS system. according to the alarm code or alarm reason code. addition. providing operations of query. modification. such as automatic fault isolation. delete or suspend the routine test task. for example. alarm monitoring module. 3) Diagnosis test management: This module provides a diagnosis test management interface. And the user can also query. And the functions of fault management are realized by means of fault alarm and alarm diagnosis. alarm rack diagram management. reports and processes the abnormality of a telecom network and its environment. Besides the mode in which an operator gives the fault processing command. Main features of fault management 1) Real-time: monitoring the states and changes of NEs in the whole system and reporting any abnormality in time. etc. 2. This module is combined with other modules to provide services.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 4 Fault Management Fault management is one of the main management functions of a Telecom Management Network (TMN). Main functions of fault management 1) Alarm management: Alarm display and query. unconfirmed alarm display in the audible and visual forms. 3) Automatic: the system has the function of processing faults in somewhat intelligent and automatic mode. 1. correlation processing rule). re-classification rule. deletion. And this function enables users to update and enrich this database. 2) Accurate: reporting abnormalities accurately. fault management detects. by means of which a user can make an instant test task and scheduled test task. prevention of faults from Page 72 of 516 . print test results. the system has partial capabilities of automatic control. capable of updating Page 73 of 516 . Alarm query: The history recovered alarm.1. each BSC should be capable of keeping an alarm event for at least 3 days.1 Overview Alarm management implements alarm display. As long as there is enough authority. isolate and eliminate faults accurately based on observation and analysis of the status information reported by various NEs. current alarm or common notification can be queried as required. an alarm can be confirmed or cleared. environment alarm. query and man-machine command sending for BSS (including BSC and BTS). consistently and in real time. 3. etc. Alarm management can implement the following main functions: 1. starting of backup resource and automatic recovery. processing error alarm. 4. Alarm types include: equipment alarm. locate. Alarm display: displaying the current alarm in real time in the alarm main interface and unconfirmed alarms in audible/visible form. communication alarm. synchronization. 4) Network-like: query. 5) The system supports the operations of users in two modes: GUI and character terminal.1 Alarm management Alarm management is to find any abnormality in network operation in time and accurately. Rack diagram management: displaying the alarm status of a rack diagram and board dynamically and visually. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 diffusing. 4. quality of service alarm. setting and command operations of multiple terminals are made possible. Alarm management provides users with a friendly operation interface on the client side and presents any information before them accurately. For the sake of preventing alarm reports being lost when broken link occurs to a network unit and OMCR (V2). Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the rack diagram based on event reporting and conducting man-machine command operations. the not-so-frequent notification may be caused by haphazard environmental factors. 5. trunk node alarm and environment alarm. Management of alarm processing knowledge base: providing the capability of querying alarm processing methods based on an alarm code or alarm reason code and enabling users to update and enrich this database. 2. Page 74 of 516 . the complete interruption of an MO service. and usually. for example. Alarm setting: providing the settings of various alarm rules (filtering rule. according to the severities. however. 1. 4.2 Classification of alarm information From the angle of real-timeness. showing that normal services are affected and need recovering immediately. 4. if the notification is frequent and lasts long. the alarm can be divided into four classes. 1) Class 1 alarm: Critical alarm. 2) Class 2 alarm: major alarm. the maintenance personnel must track down the cause and solve it in time. affect the system’s normal services. Alarm The alarm may last for a period of time. Notification Notification refers to the unrepeatable or instant fault in the running process of BSS. reclassification rule and correlation processing rule). showing that there is sign of normal services being affected and emergent recovery is needed. Usually. maintainability and running reliability to different degrees.1. and the maintenance personnel do not need to conduct any processing. making alarm display meet users’ needs and display fault causes more visually and providing correlated alarm query. for example. serious deterioration in the quality of service of a certain piece of equipment. the alarm includes notification and alarm. certain levels of alarms.. and some measures should be taken to solve them lest that they become more serious faults that will affect normal services.1. showing that there exist some factors not affecting normal services and corrective measures should be taken lest that more serious faults should occur. alarm cause.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3) Class 3 alarm: minor alarm. but the alarm time and recovery time still exist in the alarm database. certain specified types of alarms. he only wants to view certain MO alarms. Some alarms. alarm class. Some alarms should be recovered manually if they cannot be recovered after a long time or need processing manually. 4) Class 4 alarm: warning alarm. the ended (recovered) alarm is called the history alarm. This list can be sorted by alarm time or alarm class and will be refreshed automatically by the system once a new alarm occurs or an existing alarm is recovered. alarms meeting specific conditions can be reclassified into a new alarm level by setting the alarm Page 75 of 516 .3 4. thus facilitating the equipment maintenance. The setting of the alarm filter rule enables the user to select alarms that he wants to view in the alarm list. For example.1.3.1 Operations of the alarm management interface Brief introduction to operations Real-time monitoring of alarms means displaying the current network alarm status in the form of an alarm list in the alarm main interface. etc. see Online Help. The maintenance personnel can query alarms by querying history alarms. can be recovered in a certain period of time. such as timeout no report of boards and broken communication links. For the alarm type. The ongoing alarm is called the current alarm. A recovered alarm will be cleared in background display. 4. Users can set alarm rules to make the alarm list display more flexible and more conformable to users’ needs. showing that there exist potential problems or normal services will be affected. notification type and notification cause. 4-1). alarms can be confirmed.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 reclassification rule. correlation query can be used to view the detailed information about this correlated alarm. For a correlated alarm occurring in an alarm list. printed or manually cleared.1. alarms can be processed.3. users may select “Fault Management” —> “Alarm Management” in the OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the “Alarm Management” main interface (as shown in Fig. Query operations can be made to view a history alarm recovered. 4. alarms not recovered currently or common notifications as required. Besides real-time monitoring of alarms. so as to enhance or weaken alarms of this kind. These rules can be saved for future use. so as to find out the real fault source and reduce the alarm numbers shown to the user. The correlation rule between alarms can be found out by setting the alarm correlation rule. Knowledge base management can be used to obtain the causes and corresponding processing methods of various alarms. And a rack diagram alarm interface can be used to view the alarm status of various boards on the rack and conduct man-machine command operations of various boards on the BSC rack. Page 76 of 516 . As long as there is corresponding authority.2 Entry to the alarm management interface After successful login. Alarm Frequency Analysis. Physical View/Logical View. and Alarm Forwarding Rule. Physical View/Logical View. File: OK. Query History. Recover Manually. Knowledge Base Management. Collapse All. Expand. and Refresh. Database Management. About… The tool bar includes most of the functions provided by the above mentioned menu items. View: Detailed Information. Correlation Query. Database Management. Alarm Rule has the following submenus: Alarm Filter Rule. The buttons from left to right in turn are: OK. 3. Environment Alarm. Setting: Alarm Rule. Help: Alarm Management Help. Command Box. Trunk Node Alarm. Set Alarm Filter Rule. Alarm Correlation Rule. 4. Knowledge Base Management.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Select Detailed Information of Alarm or Notification. 2. Collapse. Recover Manually. 4-1 The main interface of Alarm Management The menus on the menu-bar are: 1. Alarm Reclassification Rule. Status bar. Statistical Analysis. Directory and Index. Query Historical Alarm or Notification. Set Alarm Page 77 of 516 . Correlation Query. and Alarm Display Mode. Toolbar. Print and Exit. Expand All. ** means class 2 alarm. Click the “OK” button in the toolbar to confirm the setting. current number of alarms within the last hour and current number of alarms within the last day. instead of the filtered alarms and the correlated alarms generated by source alarms. which indicates that the operator has seen the faults. alarms are displayed in the order of the time when they are generated and the display of users by class is supported. You may click the corresponding table heading to achieve sorting display. Note that the current number of alarms displayed in an alarm counter is not that displayed in the alarm list.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Reclassification Rule. The alarm list displays all the current alarms under the designated node in the browse tree. Expand All. alarm location. Display/Hide Command Box. Refresh. alarm class. Confirmed alarms will record the confirming operator and confirmation Page 78 of 516 .BSS--. In the default case. Collapse. Expand. Set Environment Alarm. there are 3 counter displays.BSC. Under the tool bar. serial number. On the upper right of the main window is a current alarm list and real-time monitoring of alarms means displaying the current network alarm status in the form of an alarm list. Set Alarm Correlation Rule. On the left of the main window is a browse tree displaying system configuration. Once a new alarm occurs or an existing alarm is recovered. The hierarchy is as follows: ZTE --. The format is: total numbers [Class 1 alarm/Class 2 alarm/Class 3 alarm/Class 4 alarm]. BTS---Rack. but the number of alarms not recovered before correlation processing. alarm cause and additional information. including common alarms and source alarm generating correlated alarms. by means of which users can select nodes conveniently to view current alarms. The confirmed alarms are shown in the non-flashing mode. * means class 3 alarm. including alarm generation time. Help and Exit. The unconfirmed alarms in the alarm list are shown in the flashing mode. Asterisks are put before each alarm to indicate the alarm level and the quantity of the asterisks shows the alarm level: *** means class 1 alarm. Set Trunk Node Alarm. Collapse All. displaying respectively the current number of all alarms. alarm source. alarm content. the system will automatically refresh the list and counter display. no asterisk means class 4 alarm. A correlated alarm will be identified with “+” displayed before it. Note that besides compound commands. Click the “OK” button on the toolbar to confirm it. An alarm. only the commands related to alarm management can be input in the application window of alarm management. notification location. the corresponding MML command will be displayed in the command column. The confirmed notification will be cleared from the list automatically. but still will be saved in the alarm database for future query and view. Press the “Previous” or “Next” button to display the detailed information about the previous or next of the selected alarm option or notification option given in the list. 4-2) will pop up. A command column is a character input interface. including the notification source. notification content. A dialog box (as shown in Fig. Users can open a correlated alarm explanation dialog box to view all source alarms and correlation rules by querying correlation. For a selected alarm option. On the lower right of the main window is a notification list. recover manually) a source alarm in this dialog box. Click the “Display/Hide Command Box” button on the toolbar to close the command window. All notifications will be displayed based on the time when they are given. users can confirm or clear (namely. when cleared. During an interface operation. Page 79 of 516 . will no longer be seen in an alarm list. click the “Recover Manually” tool on the toolbar to clear it. Users can directly input an MML command in the command column to perform an operation. providing the detailed information about the selected alarm option or notification option. displaying all announcement messages under the designated node in the browse tree. but still saved in the alarm database for query and viewing. The unconfirmed notification is shown in the flashing mode. time of notification and additional information related to this notification.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 time. With enough authority. Users can adjust as required the size of a notification list display window and that of an alarm list display window. Select one alarm option or notification option in an alarm list or notification list and click the “Details” button on the toolbar or double click the selected alarm option or notification option. 4-2 Details 4. Rack diagram display.3. Users can observe the status of a board in the rack diagram and confirm or clear unconfirmed alarms and alarms not cleared. 1. microcell MB. The color of the status indicator corresponds to the highest class of the alarm occurring to the board. The system can provide such racks as BSC (V2). is responsible for real-time display and update of a rack diagram. BTS (V2) and outdoor BTS and different racks are provided with different slot numbers to identify their types and board display modes. When the status indicator on a board is in flashing status. BTS (V1A). The alarm status of a board will be displayed by means of each status indicator on each board. And they can perform such man-machine command operations as active/standby changeover of a board on the BSC rack. Select the rack to be viewed in the browse tree or click the Page 80 of 516 . and various classes of alarms and normal status correspond to status indicators in different colors. it shows that currently an alarm occurs to the board and has not yet been recovered.1. in combination with alarm status. A rack diagram displays the actual configuration of the boards in a system.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig.3 Rack diagram management Alarm rack diagram management. Man-machine command operations Page 81 of 516 . 4-3). 2. The status indicator will not flash any more only when all the alarms of the board are confirmed. Warning: 1) When an alarm occurs currently to a board.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “Physical View” button on the toolbar in the case of BSC or BTS in the selected browse tree to enter the display interface of the alarm management rack diagram (as shown in Fig. but the color of the round status indicator on the board in the rack diagram also shows the status of the board: alarm or normal. the color of the alarm status indicator is that of the alarm in the highest class. 4-3 BSC alarm management rack diagram display Shown in Fig. 4-3 is the rack diagram display of BSC alarm management. 2) When an unconfirmed alarm occurs to a board. its status indicator flashes. please refer to the legend on the right of the rack diagram. Fig. The rack diagram on the right side of the interface not only displays the rack running in the foreground in real time. For the implications of various colors. Offline and cancellation of offline (MP) E. F. active/standby changeover. changeover disable. TIC (GPRS): query board status. DRT. set clock mode. G. B. D. GIPP. Page 82 of 516 . Set clock reference (SYCK) G. Changeover of the active/standby C. FRP. DTI: query board status. PUC. 1) The man-machine commands of alarm management part are roughly categorized based on functions as follows: A. query board status. Set periodic changeover and cancel periodic changeover (MP) 2) The boards that allow man-machine command operations and the corresponding man-machine commands Only the boards on the BSC rack allow man-machine command operations. COMI. MP: (active MP) active/standby changeover. DSNI: board active/standby changeover E. query board status. Query of board status B. resetting. The boards that allow man-machine command operations and the corresponding man-machine commands are as follows: A. (standby MP) offline. BOSN: active/standby changeover. BRP. AIPP. Resetting D. SMB. TCPP: query board status. resetting. cancel periodic changeover and query board status. TIC: reset.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Users with corresponding authority can perform man-machine command operations on some BSC boards. PUG. (active MP) set periodic changeover. resetting. C. HMS: active/standby changeover. HMS. GIPP. (standby MP) cancellation of offline. resetting. SYCK: active/standby changeover. changeover enable. reset. I. H. set clock reference. Changeover enable and changeover disable (SYCK) F. Set clock mode (SYCK) H. BIPP. as shown in Fig. Right click the MP board on the BSC rack diagram and click “Set Periodic Page 83 of 516 . PUC. Right click the board on the BSC rack diagram and select the “Query Board Status” option on the shortcut menu to pop up the “Board Status” dialog box. DRT.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3) Man-machine command operations A. COMI. HMS and TIC (GPRS). SYCK. Right click the active MP board on the BSC rack diagram and select the “Active/Standby Changeover” option on the shortcut menu to implement active/standby changeover of the active MP. Take MP for example. BIPP. DTI. B. power-on time. Set periodic changeover This man-machine command is only fit for the active MP. BOSN. FRP. C. BRP. TIC. GIPP. PUC. AIPP. TCPP. Query board status This command is applicable to MP. Switchover of the active/standby This man-machine command is applicable to active MP. COMI. AIPP. TCPP. 4-4: Fig. SYCK. 4-4 “Board Status” dialog box Shown in the dialog box are board location. changeover times. BIPP. Take MP for example. GIPP and HMS. DSNI. SMB. and whether periodic changeover can be performed. Set the clock reference This command is only applicable to SYCK boards. as shown in Fig. 4-5 MP periodic changeover D. 4-6. Page 84 of 516 . 4-5. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Changeover” in the pop-up shortcut menu to pop up the dialog box of setting board command parameters. Select one reference from the existing clock references as that of the SYCK board. Right click the SYCK board in the rack diagram and click “Set SYCK Clock Mode” in the pop-up shortcut menu to pop up the dialog box of setting board command parameters. as shown in Fig. Select one mode from the existing clock modes as that of SYCK. 4-7. Set clock mode Setting a clock mode is applicable only to an SYCK board. Page 85 of 516 . as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 4-6 Set the clock reference of SYCK E. Right click the SYCK board in the rack diagram and click “Set Clock Mode” in the pop-up shortcut menu to pop up the dialog box of setting board command parameters. The confirmation dialog box is shown in Fig. 4-8: Page 86 of 516 . Right click the standby MP board in the BSC rack diagram. After the standby MP is offline. 4-7 Set the clock mode of SYCK F. That is. the offline mode of the standby MP will be cancelled automatically and change to the online status. If the “offline” mode is not cancelled after 6 minutes. select “Offline” in the pop-up shortcut menu and send the offline command of the standby MP to the foreground after confirmation. the standby MP will not monitor the active MP within 6 minutes. MP offline and cancellation of offline Offline and cancellation of offline are only fit for the standby MP. An offline operation is generally used for maintenance. the power-off of the active MP will not lead to the standby MP being an active one.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. reclassification and correlation of the alarm is: First the filtering. alarm filtering enables users to filter them and confirm them automatically. This section introduces the settings of various alarm rules and the correlated alarm query operation. that of alarm reclassification rules and alarm correlation rules.3. enabling and disabling of various alarm rules (filtering rules. changeover enable. or press “Cancel” button to cancel the offline operation. The setting of alarm rules is responsible for providing such operations as the query. reclassification rules and correlation processing rules).1. 1. Alarm filtering enables users to set an alarm as not being Page 87 of 516 . modification. 4-8 Standby MP offline Press “Yes” button to confirm offline. perform the same operations as an offline operation. deletion. Reset.4 Alarm rule setting Alarm rule settings include the setting of alarm filtering rules. 4. When offline is to be cancelled in offline status.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. then reclassification and finally correlation. changeover disable and cancellation of periodic changeover need similar shortcut menus and confirmation operations before they are sent to the foreground. Following will not reiterate this. The processing sequence of filtering. Setting of alarm filtering rules For the sake of preventing some unimportant or uninteresting alarms from affecting a user’ line of sight and making really important alarms found in time. addition. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 displayed in the alarm real-time observation interface (this will not result in the color change of any NE icon in the high layer interface) or not being written to an alarm database. all current alarm filtering rules are listed in the form of a list. Delete Alarm Filtering Rule. Below the toolbar. Besides. neither writer into the database nor display it. Print Alarm Filtering Rule. There are two forms of filtering: wirte into the database but not display it. a confirmation mode can be set and the confirmation dealt with here means to confirm that this alarm information has been read. 4-9 “Alarm Filtering Rule Editor” dialog box The buttons on the toolbar of the “Alarm Filtering Rule Editor” dialog box in turn are: Create Alarm Filtering Rule. Fig. All rules in the active status are in application. 4-9). Rules Page 88 of 516 . The filtering conditions may be the filtering of a specific MO (a logic entity or physical entity). Three confirmation modes can be set in the alarm filtering: unconfirmed. Refresh Rule. Modify Alarm Filtering Rule. automatically confirmed upon receiving the alarm. that of some alarm classes and that of some type of alarms. About and Exit. automatically confirmed when the alarm is recovered Click the “Set Alarm Filtering Rule” button on the toolbar to enter the “Alarm Filtering Rule Editor” dialog box (as shown in Fig. E.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 not in the active status do not work. All alarms or designated alarms of a specific object. 4-10). B. but are only listed. Specific alarm classes. Press “Rule Object…” button to enter the “Select Object” dialog box (as shown in Fig. C. 1) Create alarm filtering rule Click the “Create Alarm Filtering Rule” button to enter the dialog box of creating the filtering rule (as shown in Fig. Page 89 of 516 . Specific alarm codes. The object of alarm filtering and confirmation may be the following: A. All alarms or designated alarms of a type of objects. 4-10 Create alarm filtering rule First select the object on which a filtering rule is to act. 4-11). Fig. For display filtering. The confirmation modes include no confirmation. The in-database filtering indicates the alarm is completely discarded. A confirmation mode can be selected based on the importance of display-filtering alarm. If “Object + Alarm class” is selected. confirmation of receiving and Clear confirmation. select a filtering mode. The alarm filtering is divided into in-database filtering and display filtering. The display filtering only makes the alarm invisible in the alarm list but the user can view the alarm information by querying when necessary. The confirmation dealt with here means to indicate that this alarm information has been read. the alarm does not go into the database and is not processed in other forms. the alarm code shall be selected in the alarm code box. the selection of a confirmation mode is also necessary. 4-10. An alarm Page 90 of 516 . the alarm class shall be selected.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 4-11 “Select Object” dialog box Select from all the following object browse trees to display the selected objects in the above single-line box. Press the “OK” button to confirm object selection and return to the dialog box as shown in Fig. Object + Alarm code. Then. that is. If “Object + Alarm code” is selected. There are four modes: Object. Object + Alarm class. select a filtering rule mode. Object + Inform code. Then. In this case. which can be used for important filtering alarm. confirmation mode and rule status. The rule status includes active and inactive. and only those rules in active status can be applied. Select one filtering rule from the alarm filtering list and click the “Modify Alarm Filtering Rule” button to enter the dialog box of editing the filtering rule. Therefore. 4-12. which can be used in unimportant filtering alarm. but the modification is restricted to its filtering mode. Clear confirmation means that the system confirms the clearance automatically after the alarm is recovered. the created filtering rule will be listed in the alarm filtering rule list. Finally select a rule status. Unconfirmed filtering alarm is in the unconfirmed status in query. Page 91 of 516 . 4-9. which can be used in rather important filtering alarm.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 after display filtering still can be queried and viewed. 2) Modify the alarm filtering rule The alarm filtering rule already established can be modified. Confirmation of receiving means that the system confirms the receipt after receiving the alarm. It can be manually confirmed by the users. users can easily detect the occurrence of the alarm in query. Press the “OK” button to confirm a newly-created filtering rule and return to the dialog box shown in Fig. as shown in Fig. 4-12 Edit the filtering rule 3) Delete a filtering rule Select the rule to be deleted in the alarm filtering list and press the “Delete Filtering Rule” button to delete the selected rule. A new alarm. can filter the alarm message of a database and other messages are all sent to the alarm reclassification process for processing. 4) Refresh rule Because OMCR (V2) system supports multi-terminal operations. these messages need distinguishing. the “Refresh Rule” button can be used to conduct a Refresh operation and enable a list to display the current latest filtering rule in real time. Setting of alarm reclassification rules The alarm reclassification process is used to reclassify the alarms Page 92 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. when filtered. Because some of these alarms are not displayed. 2. Refresh Rule. The buttons on the toolbar of the “Alarm Reclassification Rule Editor” dialog box in turn are: Create Alarm Reclassification Rule. Click the “Set Alarm Reclassification Rule” button on the toolbar to enter the “Alarm Reclassification Rule Editor” dialog box (as shown in Fig. About and Exit. but only the new alarm class after reclassification will be displayed in the alarm interface. designated alarm for specified objects and alarm of specified alarm code. both the new alarm class and the original one will be stored in the alarm database. Delete Alarm Reclassification Rule. 4-13). The conditions mentioned above can be: Designated alarm for a class of objects. An alarm will be reclassified after the alarm is filtered. 4-13 “Alarm Reclassification Rule Editor” dialog box The “Alarm Reclassification Rule Editor” dialog box is similar to the “Alarm Filtering Rule Editor” dialog box. After an alarm is reclassified.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 satisfying specific conditions to a new alarm class. This can be used to enhance or weaken this type of alarm. Modify Alarm Reclassification Rule. Fig. Print Alarm Reclassification Rule. Page 93 of 516 . but either an object or alarm code can be set when a reclassification rule is established. If the “Rule Object” check box is selected. 4-11) to select an object. The specific operation is the same as the object selection of filtering rule. 4-14 Create reclassification rule A reclassification rule alarm must satisfy the requirements of both an object and alarm code.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In the dialog box. An alarm class box displays the original class. The states of the rules can be divided into two types: Activate and inactive. but only are listed. Click the “Create Alarm Reclassification Rule” button to enter the dialog box of creating reclassification rule (as shown in Fig. 4-14). Rules in the inactive status do not work. and the Page 94 of 516 . press the Rule Object…” button to enter the object selection dialog box (as shown in Fig. all current alarm reclassification rules are listed in the form of a list. Fig. All alarm codes are listed in the selection box of the alarm code box and an alarm code can be selected as required. Rules in the active status are in the application. Press the “OK” button to confirm the created reclassification rule and return to the dialog box as shown in Fig. which will greatly relieve the labor Page 95 of 516 . In addition. Only one of correlated alarms will be presented to users in the end. Generally. In this case. and enters the correlation process. The dialog box of editing the reclassification rule is similar to that of creating the reclassification rule. And alarm correlation processing aims to find the correlation between alarms. A new alarm passes the filtering process and reclassification process. locate the real fault source and decrease the number of alarms presented to users. 3. when a link is broken. Setting of alarm correlation rules Alarm management is of vital importance to fault locating and processing. For its operation. Select one reclassification rule from the alarm reclassification rule list and click the “Modify Alarm Reclassification Rule” button to enter the dialog box of editing the reclassification rule. please refer to that of creating the reclassification rule. can be used to effectively decrease the number of alarms presented to users and find out the fundamental cause of a fault conveniently. there are quite a lot of alarms in the whole network and in practice. For example. a fault will always result in multiple alarms in terms of time and space. but the modification is limited to only the reclassification class and rule status. Alarm correlation processing. in combination with alarm filtering. the alarm reclassification rule list will display the new reclassification rule. The alarm reclassification rule already established can be modified. the operations of deleting an alarm reclassification rule and refreshing a rule are the same as corresponding ones in the alarm filtering rule. Please refer to corresponding operations in the above alarm filtering rule.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 reclassification class is set by a user. Rule status can be a new active status or inactive status but only the rule in active status can be applied. 4-14. a communication fault alarm will occur to the equipment on both ends of the link. will be displayed in the alarm list of the alarm main interface. Fig. namely. Users can query correlated alarms to view all source alarms: 1) The main principles of alarm correlation processing are as follows: A. 2) The user can ultimately see the following information: A. C. Hide minor alarms when a major alarm is activated. C. 4-15 “Alarm Correlation Rule Editor” dialog box The “Alarm Correlation Rule Editor” dialog box of is similar to the Page 96 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 intensity of an operator. Alarm after correlation processing. Process multiple correlated alarms as an alarm. B. B. A new alarm. Source alarm. Click the “Set Alarm Correlation Rule” button on the toolbar to enter the “Alarm Correlation Rule Editor” dialog box (as shown in Fig. 4-15). Explanations of correlation merging. after correlation processing. Decrease the alarms presented to users. the implementation cause of correlation rules. Click the “Create Alarm Correlation Rule” button to enter the dialog box of correlation rule creation (as shown in Fig. The dialog box lists all current alarm correlation rules in the form of a list. rules in the inactive status do not function but are only listed in the table. Select the type of a correlation rule. 4-16). The buttons on the toolbar of the “Alarm Correlation Rule Editor” dialog box in turn are: Create Alarm Correlation Rule. Refresh Rule. Modify Alarm Correlation Rule. when two different alarms caused by the same cause Page 97 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “Alarm Filtering Rule Editor” dialog box. The type of a correlation rule includes: Suppress rule: that is. About and Exit. Fig. Delete Alarm Correlation Rule. Rules in the active status are in the application. Print Alarm Correlation Rule. 4-16 Create correlation rule 3) A correlation rule is established as follows: A. the managed object and alarm code of the main/secondary alarm must be set and the selection of whether the secondary alarm will be displayed after the primary alarm is cleared should be made. When the primary alarms reach the set count within the set count interval. the primary alarm will substitute the secondary alarm for display. If the count rule is selected. all of which can be defined by users themselves. the time of the last alarm. C. Input the comment of this created rule in the rule comment text box. Press the “OK” button to confirm the created correlation rule and return to the dialog box as shown in Fig. Merging rule: multiple alarms caused by the same cause have different alarm objects. only the alarm code of the primary alarm needs to be selected. The new alarm has its alarm code. The alarm with the same alarm code after the merging will be merged in the alarm list of the main interface into an alarm. etc. a new alarm will occur. The alarm class. B. Such alarms can be merged into one alarm. if there are so many alarms occurring frequently within a short period of time and are automatically recovered rapidly. alarm class and alarm information. 4-15.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 occur simultaneously. when occurring once or twice. Page 98 of 516 . do not count. it shows that there is a serious fault and a new alarm will occur. Set other options based on the selection of a correlation rule: If the suppress rule is selected. alarm code and alarm content of the new alarm are set by the operator. In this case. Count rule: some unimportant alarms. users can select whether to display the latter. the setting of the primary alarm and a new alarm is necessary. That is. The operation of the managed object setting is the same as the operation of object selection in the filter rule and reclassification rule. only the first primary alarm not recovered will be displayed. the alarm correlation rule list will list the created correlation rule. If the merging rule is selected. D. but have the same alarm code. but the alarm after being merged displays some additional information to show the times of occurring. When the primary alarm instead of the secondary alarm is cleared. Only those rules in active status will be applied. However. Select whether the rule status is active or inactive. whether the secondary alarm is displayed after the primary alarm is cleared.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The alarm correlation rule already established can be modified and different types of correlation rules need modifying differently. count rule and merging rules are respectively shown in Fig. and the rule comment. The edit dialog boxes of the suppress rule. new alarm class. the count. count interval. Fig. alarm content. A suppress rule can be modified in terms of its rule status. Fig. Select one correlation rule from the alarm correlation rule list and click the “Modify Alarm Correlation Rule” button to enter the dialog box of editing the correlation rule. Page 99 of 516 . 4-17. 4-17 Edit the correlation rule (1)---suppress rule A count rule can be modified in terms of its rule status. 4-19. 4-18 and Fig. new alarm code. and rule comment. 4-18 Edit the correlation rule (2)---count rule A merging rule can only be modified in terms of its rule status and rule comment.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 100 of 516 . Then the interface will pop up the dialog box of “Correlated Alarm Detail Information” (as shown in Fig. Page 101 of 516 . 4-19 Edit the correlation rule (3)---merging rule 4. Query of a correlated alarm A correlated alarm is identified with “+” in the alarm list.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 4-20). original alarm information and applied correlation rule. Given in the “Correlated Alarm Detail Information” dialog box are the correlated alarm information. Select the correlated alarm to be queried and click the “Correlation Query” button. At different sites.3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Different sites can have different trunk node alarm settings. 4-21: Page 102 of 516 . 4-20 “Correlated Alarm Detail Information” dialog box 4.1. 2.5 Trunk node alarm At most 12 trunk node alarms can be defined for each site. The advantages for adopting template mode for the trunk nodes are as follows: 1. Click the “Set Trunk Node Alarm” button on the toolbar to enter the dialog box of trunk node alarm setting shown in Fig. The definition of the trunk node alarm includes the classes and contents of alarms. Some sites can have the same trunk node alarm settings as others. the same or different templates of trunk node alarm can be applied. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. then the dialog box will automatically display its template No. as shown in Fig. 4-22. the list in the dialog box will display the classes and contents of various trunk nodes under this template. 4-21 Setting of trunk node alarm (1) First select the base station subsystem. 4-22 Setting of trunk node alarm (2) Press the “Set” button to apply the contents of the selected template to the selected rack of the selected site of the selected base station subsystem. Page 103 of 516 . If the selected rack of the selected site of the selected base station subsystem has been applied to the template of trunk node alarm. Fig. site and rack where a trunk node alarm is to be set and then the template number to be set from the template number pull-down list. and the classes and contents of various trunk node alarms of this template. A new template No. Then.. Modify the template Click the “Modify Template” button in the dialog box of trunk node Page 104 of 516 . After the trunk node template is created. At the time. 4-23: Fig. as shown in Fig. Then set the trunk nodes of this template. press the “OK” button to save it and return to the trunk node alarm setting interface. 4-23 Create trunk node alarm template First input the number of this created template. Set the alarm classes and alarm contents of various trunk nodes. 1. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 can be selected to enable other templates to be applied to this site. Click the “New Template” button in the dialog box of trunk node alarm setting (Fig. Create the template Users can create a template themselves and suite it to actual use. which should be a different number from the set one. Not every node must be set in terms of the above. the new template has been listed in the pull-down list of the new template selection box. 4-21) to enter the “Create trunk node template” dialog box. and it is not necessarily the true cause of the system alarms. Note: the alarm content is input by the user. Then. 4-24: Fig. 4-24 “Delete Template” dialog box In the "Delete Template” dialog box.1. therefore the template in use is not listed in the “Please Select the Template Number you want to delete” pull-down box. During the operation.3.6 Environment alarm Environment alarm is the alarm generated when the external environment of the system exceeds the designated scope. 3. Click the “Delete Template” button in the dialog box of trunk node alarm setting to enter the “Delete Template” dialog box. as shown in Fig. 4. press the “Delete” button to delete it. as shown in Fig. the templates being used are displayed in the form of a list. It includes Page 105 of 516 . first select the template number to be modified and then modify the classes and contents of various node alarms of this template.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 alarm setting to enter the “Modify trunk node template” dialog box. Click the pull-down button at the lower left of the dialog box and select the template number to be deleted from the pull-down list. The deleted template cannot be the one in use. This dialog box is similar to the “Create trunk node template” dialog box. 4-23. Delete a template A useless template can be deleted. Temperature values lower than the lower limit or higher than the upper limit are both abnormal. and alarms will Page 106 of 516 . Click the “Set Environment Alarm” button of the toolbar in the alarm management main interface to enter the dialog box of environment parameter setting. Input the upper and lower limits of temperature and humidity respectively. 1. The setting of environment alarm is directed toward a base station controller only and is required in both the SCM rack and RRM rack of BSC. 4-25. etc. 4-25: Fig. infrared alarm. The dialog box is shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 temperature-humidity alarm. as shown in Fig. Setting of temperature/humidity parameters Select one SCM/RRM of BSC in the browse tree on the left and click the temperature/humidity page to set temperature/humidity parameters. the corresponding correlated alarm must be cleared manually by users to ensure security. The system applies the correlation rule to environment alarm. 4-25 that environment parameter setting involves two tabs: temperature/humidity and infrared. 4-25 Environment Parameter setting----temperature humidity It can be seen from the dialog box shown in Fig. When an environment alarm is recovered. When the infrared alarm is enabled. 4-26 Environment Parameter setting---infrared First select the “Enable Infrared Alarm” check box to set whether to enable infrared alarm. 4-26. The maximum scope of temperature setting: 20~80%. Fig. Setting of infrared parameters Select one SCM/RRM of BSC in the browse tree on the left and click the infrared page to set infrared parameters. If the time segment of Infrared Alarm Disable is set in the Disable time segment box. If infrared alarm is not enabled. The maximum scope of temperature setting: 0~450C. If the “Periodic Setting” is selected. The dialog box is shown in Fig. then no infrared alarm will be generated in this time segment.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 occur. the infrared alarm is prohibited to be Page 107 of 516 . no infrared alarm will occur in the system. minute and second of the start time and that of end time can be set. There are two modes: periodical setting and specific interval setting. 2. then only the hour. Then you need to set the start date and time.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 carried out in the interval between the start time and the end time of each day. Click the “Query Alarm” button on the toolbar of the main interface of alarm management to enter the “Wizard to Alarm Query” dialog box. an alarm filtered by means of the alarm display filtering rule and a source alarm not displayed in the alarm main interface list as a result of the reclassification rule and correlation rule. and that of the source alarm and new alarm of a reclassification alarm and correlated alarm.1. If the “Periodic Setting” check box is not selected. alarms currently not recovered or common notification as required by users. Alarm query can be used to view a cleared or recovered alarm. the infrared alarm is forbidden during the set interval. A current alarm can be confirmed or cleared as long as there is enough authority. When the infrared alarm is enabled. it means that the interval shall be specified. 4-27: Page 108 of 516 .7 Alarm query Alarm query is used to display the history alarms recovered. Therefore. 4. alarm query can provide the most detailed alarm information.3. as shown in Fig. including the display of a display filtering alarm. alarm currently not recovered alarm and common notification. 4-27 Wizard to Alarm Query 1 First select a query type from the history alarm recovered. Press the “Next” button to enter the “Wizard to Alarm Query 3” interface (as shown in Fig. the start time and end time of a query must be set. Fig. If the history alarm recovered or common notification is selected. Press the “Next” button to enter the “Wizard to Alarm Query 2” interface. as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. It is a multiple choice. 4-28 Wizard to Alarm Query 2 Select alarm source in the dialog box. 4-28. 4-29). Page 109 of 516 . Click the "Finish" button to display the query results shown in Fig. 4-29 Wizard to Alarm Query 3 Select whether to query by Alarm Class or by Alarm Code in this dialog box. which is on the right of the dialog box .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Click the “All” button to select all classes. you can select any. you need to select the alarm codes you want to query in the alarm code list in the “Select alarm code” box. To select alarm class. 4-30. Page 110 of 516 . To select the alarm class. This is also a multiple choice. and then list them on the right list. Fig. 4-31. and offers users a troubleshooting suggestion.1. You may select an alarm and right click to confirm or clear it by means of the shortcut menu.8 Alarm knowledge base management Alarm processing knowledge base provides fault processing help. 4. typesetting and printing of the report can be made in Excel. the dialog box displays all those alarms or notifications satisfying the query conditions in the form of a list. 4-31 Alarm query result report Further modification. finds the alarm knowledge base based on an alarm code or reason code input by users. The alarm query result report in Excel format is shown in Fig. 4-30. Click the “Report” button to output the query results in the Microsoft Excel format through a series of report wizard settings. 4-30 Query result display As shown in Fig.3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Alarm processing knowledge base can be used as an auxiliary tool in troubleshooting or a Page 111 of 516 . users can add some of their own ideas about this fault or update the solution to share experience with other users. 4-32: Fig. Click the “Knowledge Base Management” button in the main interface of alarm management to enter the “Alarm Knowledge Setting” dialog box shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 teaching material for users to learn troubleshooting. The general processing method of this alarm will be given in the “System Content” box. In the course of troubleshooting. Page 112 of 516 . 4-32 Alarm Knowledge Setting First select the Alarm Code or Alarm Reason Code and then one alarm option from the list of the upper dialog box. Users can input the processing method of the selected alarm in the “Users’ Methods” box at the bottommost of the interface for future reference when they or other users process this alarm. 4-33 80W power amplification alarm interface Page 113 of 516 .9 80W power amplification support In BTS (V1A). 3 alarms (For details. 4-33: Fig. see online help) about 80W power amplification are newly added to the foreground and reported to the PEU panel. Then the powers of the two PAs are combined into 80W and output. That is.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 4.1. first divide the power of TRU into two parts and then add them to the input of the two PAs. PEU implements the function of splitting one power into two parts.3. In actual design. Two-into-one function can be implemented by the combiner on HYC or by PEU. a combiner/divider module PEU (Power Extension Unit) is added and installed where TRU is located. two PAs are connected in parallel to achieve 80W PA transmitting power. The interface display is shown in Fig. first the related links are tested and then the next object to be tested is decided on the basis of the returned test results to locate the fault at the board level. there are scheduled test and instant test in a system and in terms of test content. link test and E1 line test. Test management as a tool can also be used when a fault occurs to the system. Therefore. there are board test. Therefore. tests on physical equipment and communication links can be achieved through scheduled tests by test management. Page 114 of 516 . further tests are needed until a fault point resulting in board abnormality is located. tests BSS.2 4. the physical equipment and the system can be tested to see whether they have returned to normal work. and between MP and the control units of various multiple units. Test management provides users with a man-machine interface (including GUI and MMI) at the client. In routine maintenance. you are recommended to perform them only in debugging or the faulty system. During the testing. Besides.2. including the testing of various multiple units of BSC. Test management. various boards in each multiple unit and the communication links between central module MP and peripheral module MP. more emphasis is put on various boards to see whether they work normally. you’d better not perform test management operations.1. the instant test can accurately locate the fault and remove it as soon as possible. When the system functions stably.2. It should be noted that certain test operations may influence the normal function of the system. adopting the client/server structure. In this case. any test will not affect the system running and normal conversation services. When fault occurs. therefore to ensure the normal and stable operation of the system. If they cannot work normally.1 Test mode In terms of test modes.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 4. After the fault is removed. 4. faults and hidden troubles can be timely detected and avoided.1 Test management Overview OMCR (V2) test management is responsible for the testing of BSS and ensures that the whole system runs normally and stably. 2 Test items Test items depend on the system configuration of BSS. Instant test is mainly used for fault locating when a fault occurs and the detection of both the system and fault points after the troubleshooting. Testing of FSPP control unit and its TIC boards 8. 4. Then. Users may select the test items at the client for instant test. analyses test results and stores them in the database. test results will be sent to the client and displayed. is mainly used for routine monitoring of various units and link status in a system. namely. he can query or delete all scheduled test results and instant test results. periodic test task. Testing of the loop (E1 line) between BSC and BTS Page 115 of 516 . Testing of BOSN boards 9. A user with related authority can set. Testing of NSPP control unit and its TIC boards 7. Testing of the links between MP and various control units 11. suspend. After the testing begins. Testing of TCPP control unit and its DRT boards 2.2. Testing of BIPP control unit and its TIC boards.1. Testing of the link between central module MP and peripheral module MP 10. Users can set as required the items. Besides. instant test can be used to make a further detection of it when a hidden risk is found in a scheduled test. The test items on BSC side are as follows: 1. Testing of GIPP control unit and its TIC boards 5. and create or make an instant test in the client MML interface. Test of PCU control unit and its BRP and FRP boards 6. interval and test time of a scheduled test at the client and the system will begin to test BSS once setting conditions are satisfied. Besides.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Scheduled test. start and delete a scheduled test item. Testing of AIPP control unit and its TIC boards 3. the system tests them item by item. ComI boards and SMB boards 4. SMT2 boards and links in V1A) Page 116 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 12. DTI. SMT1. Compatible downward with the test items in V1A (including the testing of DRT. 2 4. 4-34 The main interface for test management The menus on the menu-bar are: 1. 4. the scheduled test result within a certain period of time after the task creating can be queried and viewed. then begin to test and finally display the results of the instant test. For a scheduled test. first create the tasks of the instant test.2. Fig. Page 117 of 516 .2.2. Test Mode:Instant Test. The instant test result can be queried and viewed in future. Subsequently.1 Operations of the test management interface Brief introduction to operation steps For an instant test. when there is a small amount of traffic). Scheduled Test and Exit.2 Entry to the test management interface After login.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 4. 4-34). first create the task of the scheduled test (it is recommended that this should be done at midnight.2.2. users can select “Fault Management” —> “Test Management in OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the main interface of Test Management (as shown in Fig. Test Result: Query Test Results. Instant Test: Create Test Task. During an interface operation. Directory and Index.3 Instant test Expand the browse tree shown in Fig. Collapse All. only the command related to test management can be input in the application window of test management. Command Box. The left side of the main window shows the browse tree. operator and the status of the link between the client and server. 6. Status Bar. Refresh.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2. Start Test. Expand. Expand All. Collapse. Start Test.2. Collapse All. 3. Delete Test Results. the buttons on the toolbar in turn are: Instant Test. Users can directly input an MML man-machine command in the command column to perform an operation. 4-34. Note that besides a compound command. It displays the instant test results or the queried test results. as shown in Fig.2. which can be Expanded to display all BSCs in the BBS system. Restart Scheduled Test. the corresponding MML command will be displayed in the command column. View: Toolbar. Expand. 5. Help: Test Management Help. 4. Collapse. The test task column is on the top right of the main window. Suspend Scheduled Test. Scheduled Test. All the buttons on the toolbar have the corresponding options in the menu. The test result column is on the bottom right of the main window. Refresh. It displays the instant test task and the scheduled test task in the instant test status and the scheduled test status respectively. The status bar shows the terminal number. Page 118 of 516 . Help and Exit. 4-35. 4. A command column is a character input interface. select the BSC to be tested and click the “Instant Test” button on the toolbar to enter the “Instant Test” interface. From left to right. Expand All. About. Delete Scheduled Test. Scheduled Test: Set Scheduled Test. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Fig. 4-36. 4-36 is the M Unit/Unit Test Items tab. as shown in Fig. 4-35 Instant Test Select the menu “Instant Test —>Create Test Task” to pop up the “Test Items” dialog box. 4-36 Create an instant test task Two pages will appear in the dialog box of creating an instant test task: “MUnit/Unit Test Items” and “PCM Test Items”. Fig. Page 119 of 516 . in which the selection can be made of unit/multiple unit test items. The status of a test task varies with the test progress and the test result column displays the test result of the test task already tested. Click the “Begin to Test” button on the toolbar to begin an instant test. further description is not provided here. 4-37. which is on the right of the dialog box. all its subordinate multiple units and their multiple unit numbers will be correspondingly displayed in the display box. The selection of test items on PCM Test Items page is similar to that on M Unit/Unit Test Items tab. Page 120 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The left side of the page is various multiple units. Once a certain multiple unit is selected. After a multiple unit in the middle display box is selected. which are generated based on the configuration of this BSC. One multiple unit or several multiple units can be selected. Click “OK” to confirm the creation of the instant test task and return to the interface shown in Fig. The test column will display the newly-created instant test task. After a multiple unit is selected. units under the multiple unit and their multiple unit numbers as well as unit numbers will be displayed in the display box. Therefore. which is in the middle of the dialog box. its subordinate units are all selected. as shown in Fig. 4-35. Right click the selected test result and select the pop-up shortcut menu “View Detail Information” to pop up the “Detail Information” dialog box. 4-39.4 Scheduled test Select the BSC to be tested and click the “Scheduled Test” button on the toolbar shown in Fig.2. 4-38. but its details can be viewed. Fig. Page 121 of 516 . as shown in Fig. The test results will be saved in the test database. 4-38 Detail Information 4. 4-34 to enter the “Scheduled Test” interface shown in Fig. The information of some test results cannot be fully displayed in a test result column.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 4-37 Make an instant test PCM test items/test results and unit/multiple unit/link test items (results) are displayed on respective pages.2. The “Scheduled Test—>Delete Scheduled Test” menu can be selected to delete a current scheduled test task. if a scheduled test task has been created in the selected BSC. After suspension. then the test task column will display the created scheduled test task. all scheduled test tasks will not be tested until the set time comes. but the test results before the suspension still will be saved in the test database. The scheduled test result will be saved in the test database and can be viewed by means of query of test results. If the “Scheduled Test —> Suspend Scheduled Test” menu is selected. 4-39 Scheduled Test In the “Scheduled Test” interface. Page 122 of 516 . A scheduled test can also be suspended. the scheduled test task will restore to the “Active” status and will be tested again at the set time. but the existing test result still is saved. The suspended scheduled test can be resumed to active running status.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. If the “Scheduled Test —> Restart Scheduled Test” menu is selected. then all current scheduled test tasks will be suspended and the states of all test tasks in the test task column are “Suspend”. 4-40. After a new scheduled test task is created. etc. Fig. the original scheduled test task will be deleted automatically. scheduled test initiation time. 4-41 Scheduled test setting .GPRS Page 123 of 516 . The test result generated after the execution of a new scheduled test task. 4-41. test interval.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The setting of a scheduled test means creating a new scheduled test task. 4-40 Scheduled test setting . together with the original one. Select the “Scheduled Test→Set Scheduled Test” menu to enter the “Test Items” dialog box in the GSM environment shown in Fig. Settings in the GPRS environment are shown in Fig. It is used for this scheduled testing of the local client and includes the scheduled test item.GSM Fig. will be saved in the test database. Fig.2. which can be set as required. For example: If the test cycle is set to two days. 4-34. delete test results. In Fig. 4. the only difference being the former having the settings of test cycle and test time.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Scheduled Test Setting is similar to Create Instant Test Task. then in each morning of every two days at 6:30: 00. select “Test Result → Query Test Result” to pop up the “Query condition” dialog box in the GSM environment shown in Fig. the test time is set to 6:30: 00. 1. Query the test results Both an instant test result and scheduled test result can be queried and viewed.5 Test result operation If not deleted manually. all test results will be kept in the database for up to 3 months. 4-43.2. The range for test cycle is 1 ~ 31 days and that for test time is within 24 hours. 4-42 or that in the GPRS environment shown in Fig. Operations on the test results include: Query test results. 4-42 Query condition (1)---GSM Page 124 of 516 . test on the scheduled test items will be carried out. the test items can be designated by ticking the check boxes above it. select a test item. 4-44. 4-45. Test Type. If “Not Specify Test Items” is selected. Test Result and Test Time. Page 125 of 516 . 4-43 Query condition (1)---GPRS Query conditions are made up of BSC. Settings in the GSM environment are shown in Fig. 2) Then.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Select the query conditions after "Specify Test Items” is selected. all test items will be selected. 1) First select the BSC to query a test result. Test Items. If "Specify Test Items” is selected. Settings in the GPRS environment are shown in Fig. Test Mode. the test type can be selected from three forms of MUnit/Unit test. MUnit/Unit Test.The third test type of MUnit/Unit and Link Test includes the first Munit/Unit Test and the second Link Test. Link Test. the test types can be selected from six forms of Munit/Unit Test. 4-45 Query condition (2)---GPRS 3) Select test type: When test items are designated. MUnit/Unit and Link Test. E1 Line Test. and Link Test.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. MPMP Lnk Test. Link Test. If the test items are not designated. All Tests. 4-44 Query condition (2)---GSM Fig. While if the Page 126 of 516 . If “Not Specify Test Time” is selected. Delete a test result A test result will be automatically saved in the test database. The query result will be displayed in a test result column. Select the “Test Result—>Delete Test Result” menu to pop up the dialog box of deletion conditions. there is no need to select the test items. 5) The test results include: Normal. And any test result in the test database can be deleted. 4-46 Test result query/display 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 MPMP Link Test or E1 Line Test is selected for the test type. 6) Select the test time. The dialog box of deletion condition is the same as that of test result query and the specific operation is also Page 127 of 516 . Abnormal and All. 4-46. all test results satisfying the above mentioned items of 1~5 and saved in current test database will be queried. Fig. as shown in Fig. Abnormal results include all abnormal test results (including the case when a test fails) and can help locate a fault or find an incipient fault. Instant and All. If "Specify Test Time” is selected. Press “OK” to confirm the query condition setting and begin to query. 4) The test modes include: Scheduled. the begin time and end time of the test interval for query and deletion can be set. Page 128 of 516 . once deleted. cannot be recovered. Because the test result. the test results satisfying all the deletion conditions will be deleted completely. After the deletion conditions are set. any useful test results in the test database should be saved in a disk in the form of backup.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the same. it is recommended that before the deletion. practical network running can be used to obtain the technical data to optimize a network. 2. excessively high or low load existing in a system. the current value of a certain counter of a certain measurement object can be observed on demand. Thus. monitors the quality of service of a network and supports network planning and network analysis. By analyzing this information. Create a measurement job to collect the system running data and store them in the measurement database. reports the status of the telecom equipment. Such basic data information is provided by performance management. 3. Observe some specified events happening in a cell. the network maintenance personnel should be well familiar with various performance indexes of BSC and the wireless network. such as traffics of respective cells. to improve network performance and efficiency and to provide data bases and reasonable suggestions for the allocation and planning of network resources. In this case. network unit or equipment.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5 Performance Management To make the network run more efficiently and provide users with the best QoS at the lowest cost. evaluates the effectiveness of a network and network unit. Handover observation includes inner handover observation in a Page 129 of 516 . Users can analyze these data by means of a performance analysis console or export these data for other analysis platforms or network optimization software to use. collects related statistical data of performance. Performance management implements the following functions: 1. etc. successful or unsuccessful handover. congestion of SDCCH and TCH. the maintenance personnel can take corresponding measures to balance the network load so as to improve network performance. For a measurement job collecting data. the maintenance personnel can find such problems as network load allocation. Performance management aims to monitor the performance of a network. including handover observation and channel assignment observation. 5.1. A task is the unit of performance data measurement. event observation job. performance analysis console. in-handover/out-handover observation of BSS inner handover. in-handover/out-handover observation between BSSs. ZXG10 BSC (V2) also supports the function of synchronizing one module only. all of which will be introduced respectively. When the QoS index in a system exceeds the given value. the user can process two kinds of jobs: They are measurement job and observation job. in this chapter. In the performance management. 5. The alarm monitoring and the synchronization control can be carried out by setting the performance alarm threshold Page 130 of 516 . Set the measurement interval and indices of BSS Quality of Service (QoS) alarm.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 cell. When some abnormal factors lead to the inconsistency of the measurement job and observation job information in a BSS with corresponding information in OMCR (V2).1 Performance management Performance management is mainly embodies in its four functions: measurement job. the task information stored in OMCR (V2) can be synchronized to the BSS.1 Performance management items NE performance data are not collected all the time. call tracing and signaling tracing. QoS control and performance management synchronization control. an alarm will occur. The previously collected data in BSS system will not be lost as a result of synchronization. The user can work out and manage various tasks through the performance management client interface. 4. together with their operations. 5. A performance management system includes 4 modules: performance management. QoS alarm measurement is independent of performance data collecting and still can collect or calculated related data when no measurement job is assigned. the collection is driven by the task. instead. assignment and use related to SDCCH. The resource allocation. assignment CELL and use related to TCH. queuing and Range description Measurement generating basic performance 05 06 07 Page 131 of 516 . occupation. The foreground scans a measurement job regularly and views a task time dispatching table and measurement time table to enable a task to collect data. The measurement types supported by a measurement job are shown in Table 5-1: Table 5-1 Measurement job list SN 00 01 Measurement type Basic measurement BTS measurement Cell wireless CELL TRX Measurement item reports Measure the transceiver powers.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1. Measure the wireless parameters of various 02 measurement Wireless access measurement SDCCH measurement TCH measurement SAPI3 measurement RMM assignment CELL cells. TA and interference band measurement 03 04 CELL CELL Measure the wireless random access process of a mobile station Measure the resource allocation. Measure the assignment process of an RMM to see how the forced release. which can be reported periodically or instantly and the reporting granularity is larger than or equal to the measurement granularity. occupation. including the channel quality. channel transmitting strength. Measurement job A measurement job object represents a specific measurement job and users can inform the system to collect data by creating a measurement job object. power change and signal quality of various TRXs. A measurement job collects data based on certain task dispatching rules and specific measurement granularity to generate a measurement report. including TCH/F and TCH/H CELL CELL Measure the link set-up and load of point-to-point short messages. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 SN Measurement type measurement RMM call drop measurement Handover cause measurement Common 10 handover measurement Measurement of 11 handover synchronization mode 12 Paging count Abis 13 interface CELL CELL Measure the number of transmitted paging messages. 08 09 CELL CELL Measure various call drop cases. 16 call drop of and A BSC handover interface Measurement of SCCP 17 connections and resource availability land circuits. Measure the times of out-handover resulting from various causes in this cell. call drop and handover of A interface. Measure the utilization ratio of TCH and SDCCH. the merging is implemented by the agent on an 19 SITE Page 132 of 516 . Measure the number of various transmitted signaling messages. Measure the number of signaling messages BSC generated or forwarded by this BSC according to the signaling type and signaling name. CELL Measurement item Range description directed retry contribute to assignment success rate and also measure the related queuing data. Measure the times of out-handover/in-handover in this cell. Measure the SCCP connection times of A interface and resource availability of land circuits. and completion rate of TRX in this cell. 18 TRX LAPD link measurement O&M LAPD link measurement TRX of BSC Measure the times of assignment. CELL Measure the times of various handover synchronization forms happening in this cell. signaling measurement Measurement of 14 radio A resource interface CELL availability 15 signaling measurement Measurement of the assignment. Measure the signaling exchange of LAPD signaling links connecting each TRX Measure the signaling exchange of the LAPD signaling link connecting the O&M module of each SITE. In the case of 3 CMMs on a BTS2. memory consumption and BHCA of various SMM and RMM modules Collect data in the FR and NS processes on the FRP board Measure the BSSGP layer in the pn module. And they can be filtered and displayed as required or stored at the client terminal for future redisplay. For the names of various job types and the counters (namely. Measure the CPU load. which is on the BRP board Measure messages in the BSSGP layer. Page 133 of 516 . 20 21 SCCP measurement Processor NS 22 load measurement sublayer NSVC performance measurement BSSGP 23 performance measurement Paging 24 performance measurement Traffic 25 statistics CELL performance measurement Resource 26 management performance measurement CELL Measure the packet resource data on the p0 module NSE CELL link SCCP LINK MODULE Measure the signaling exchange on each SCCP signaling link. each of which can be of one type only. measurement variable) they belong to. once an observation event is triggered. Measure the RLC/MAC layer data in the BRP board Range description A performance management terminal program supports up to 30 jobs. see Appendix A. an observation report will be generated and reported instantly. all events currently happening can be observed. which is in the lower part of NSE in p0 module. That is.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 SN Measurement type Measurement item MP. Data collection of an observation object is triggered mainly by an event. If an event observation window is opened at the management terminal. 2. Observation job An observation job is established to reflect some performance indices during current running in real time. timeout no response. cell identification number) Cell frequency band Channel type Whether a source channel is internal or external Whether a destination channel is internal or external 2) In-handover observation. in-handover observation. other failures) Handover time Handover duration Cell identification number of a source cell (location area. timeout no response and other failures) Handover time Handover duration Cell identification number of a source cell (location area. cell identification number) Cell identification number of a destination cell (location area. out-handover observation and assignment failure observation. cell identification number) Cell identification number of a destination cell (location area. return to the original channel. Handover cause Handover result (success.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Currently the performance management deals with four types of observation jobs: Inner handover observation. cell identification number) Frequency band of a source cell Frequency band of a destination cell Page 134 of 516 . They can be used to obtain the following information: 1) Inner handover observation Handover cause Handover results (success. queuing and directed retry). LOWER. undefined) Channel type 4) Assignment failure observation Cell identification number (location area. cell identification number) Cell identification number of a destination cell (location area. undefined) Channel type 3) Out-handover observation. assignment timeout no reply. returning to the original channel. assignment returning to the original channel) RR cause 3. UPPER. failure of occupation.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Hierarchical relation between a source cell and a destination cell (SAME. cell identification number) Frequency band of a source cell Frequency band of a destination cell Hierarchical relation between a source cell and a destination cell (SAME. LOWER. Handover cause Handover results (success. timeout no response and other failures) Handover time Handover duration Cell identification number of a source cell (location area. cell identification number) Channel type Channel number Time of assignment failure Causes of assignment failure (allocation failure (no channel can be allocated after forced release. UPPER. Alarm watch Page 135 of 516 . an alarm at a corresponding level will occur. the alarm will be recovered automatically and in time based on performance alarm cancellation rules. Therefore. with the objects being all the cells. Alarm threshold management mainly includes such operations as setting a threshold. etc. even if there is no setting of a measurement job. Threshold management corresponds to the measurement object of a specific measurement job. The measurement items of QoS are shown in Table 5-2 below: Table 5-2 Table of QoS measurement items Full Name Meaning Correspond ing measureme nt object Module Module Module Module Default value/unit RMMCPMeanLoad RMMCPPeakLoad SMMCPMeanLoad SMMCPPeakLoad Mean load of peripheral module processors Peak load of peripheral module processors Mean load of central module processors Peak load of central module processors >80% >90% >80% >90% Page 136 of 516 . modifying a threshold. processing units or No. QoS threshold calculation and alarm are available.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Alarm watch means performance alarm threshold management. and no single object can be set in terms of its threshold and duration. 2) The measurement and threshold setting of QoS alarms are directed toward the whole BSS. These types are worked out mainly based on 99’ Local Operation & Maintenance Center Requirements by Mobile Bureau and do not provide any user-defined QoS alarm. which automatically compares the value of a current performance counter or the average of counters within a certain period of time with the set threshold rules. 3) The data collection of QoS alarms is independent of that of a universal measurement job.7 links in a BSS. If conditions are satisfied. Once conditions are no longer satisfied. The implementation of alarm watch features the following: 1) There are fixed types of BSS QoS alarms. 7 trunk availability Mean traffic of a cell TCH/F Mean traffic of a cell TCH/H Mean traffic of a trunk route SDCCH call drop rate FACCH/F call drop rate FACCH/H call drop rate TCH/F voice drop rate TCH/F data drop rate TCH/H voice drop rate TCH/H data drop rate In-handover success rate Out-handover success rate Handover success rate between the cells controlled by BSS Intra-cell rate handover success <10% <10% <10% <10% <10% <10% 0.5 Erl >90% >90% >90% >90% >90% >90% >90% <10% <10% <10% IntraCELLHOSuccRate BSC <10% The major differences between measurement job and observation job are result output mode and data collection mode. While the observation job outputs the result when trigged by event and reports it immediately.5 Erl 0. The performance data obtained from a measurement job can be displayed at the performance analysis console in the form of a report. The measurement job timely outputs the measurement report or immediately submits the measurement report and the data collection has a certain granularity. Page 137 of 516 .5 Erl 0.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Full Name Meaning Correspond ing measureme nt object Cell BSC Cell Cell Cell BSC Cell Cell N7 LINK Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell BSC BSC BSC Default value/unit CallEstablishSuccRate No7TrunkAssignmentSuccR ate TFAvailableRate THAvailableRate SdAvailableRate No7TrunkAvailableRate TFMeanTrafficLoad THMeanTrafficLoad No7TrunkMeanTrafficLoad SdDropRate FaFDropRate FaHDropRate TFVoiceDropRate TFDataDropRate THVoiceDropRate THDataDropRate InHOSuccRate OutHOSuccRate IntraBSSHOSuccRate Call completion ratio of a cell Answering attempt ratio of a trunk route TCH/F availability TCH/H availability SDCCH availability No. such as the generation of the handover. users can select “Performance Management”—> “Performance Management” in the OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the main interface of performance management (as shown in Fig. etc. displayed. Alarm watch is used for the generation and modification of an alarm threshold rule.1.2 Entry into the performance management interface After login. observation job name and alarm watch. deleted. displayed. modified.2.1 Operations of the performance management interface Brief introduction to operations A measurement job can be created.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. and the lower part of the interface are the command column and status bar. deleted. 5-1). Page 138 of 516 .1. Fig. and counter query can be used to obtain counter instant data. suspended/recovered. the left window in the middle of the interface is a browse tree displaying the measurement job. 5.2. 5-1 Main interface of performance management The upper part of the interface are the menu bar and toolbar. modified. An event observation job can be created.2 5.1. Directory and Index. Collapse All. Expand All. Users can directly input an MML man-machine command in the command column to perform an operation. Observation Job: Event Observation. Suspend. the right window will display the corresponding threshold value in this BSS when you click the alarm threshold in a certain BSS in the browse tree on the left. Recover. observation job name and alarm watch of various BSS systems currently existing. Event Observation. Refresh. Collapse. Status Bar. the corresponding MML command will be displayed in the command column. Collapse All on the tool bar to Expand or Collapse a browse tree and display the measurement job name. Expand. 5. Expand All. Suspend. If you click a specific measurement job. Collapse All. Modify. Listed under the measurement job and observation job are respectively the job names currently created. Help and Exit. Modify. About. the right-hand window will display all current measurement job lists and their simple attributes in this BSS. Help: Performance Management Help. Because there is only one QoS alarm MO in each BSC. 4. During an interface operation. The right window of the interface corresponds to the selected content and operation on the left. Collapse. In the left-hand browse tree. if you click a measurement job in a certain BSC. Refresh. 3. Command Box. Measurement job: Counter Query. Recover. Performance Management: Create. Exit. Synchronize. View: Toolbar. Expand. the right-hand window will display its parameter attribute details. 2. A command column is a character input interface. The display for an observation job is similar to that for a measurement job. Collapse. Counter Query. The buttons from left to right in the toolbar in turn are: Create.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The items on the menu bar in turn are: 1. Note that besides a Page 139 of 516 . Click “ ” or “ ” in the browse tree or select Expand. Expand All. Delete. Delete. Listed in the browse tree are the names of the whole mobile communication system. Synchronize. History Data Query. You may select/cancel the “View—>Command Box” menu to open/close a command window. observation jobs and threshold management jobs so as to further implement other management functions. users can make the selection of handover between different measurement jobs. only those commands related to performance management can be input in the application window of performance management. With this interface.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 multiple command. Page 140 of 516 . The jobs with their type being basic measurement are automatically created after the system is initialized. 5-2 Display of measurement jobs The measurement job list on the right side of the interface lists the names. The items in a measurement job list correspond to various jobs in the measurement jobs in the browse tree. select the measurement job list item and click the “Delete” button to delete this measurement job or click the “Modify” button to pop up a dialog box for modifying this measurement job.2.1. Click the “Create” button on the toolbar to create a measurement job. 5-2). Select the “Suspend” or “Recover” button after the selection of measurement job list item to suspend/recover this measurement job. Click the “Counter Query” button to view the performance data measured by this measurement job according to conditions.3 Measurement job Expand a browse tree fully in the performance management main interface shown in Fig. Then. 5-1 and select a measurement job node in the BSS. Page 141 of 516 . Then. Fig. types. the right side of the interface will display all current measurement job lists in this BSS (as shown in Fig. states.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. start date and stop date of all established measurement jobs. Create a measurement job A new measurement job must include the description of all required job features. measurement stop date and measurement time segment in a day). 5-3. Fig. cycle of granularity and measurement object.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1. measurement time interval. measurement start time. 5-3 Display of a single measurement job 2. That is. displaying respectively the list display. therefore a measurement job to be created must be set in terms of the measurement type. measurement stop time (including the measurement start date. Specific display of a measurement job Select a specific measurement job in the browse tree. A measurement job to be created cannot have the same measurement time with an existing one of the same measurement type that contains the same measurement object in this BSS. and the right side of the interface is divided into 3 boxes. measurement schedule and measurement job of this job. as shown in Fig. multiple measurement jobs of the same measurement type that contain the same measurement object can be created as long as Page 142 of 516 . 30 N and 60 N. display all measurable objects of this measurement job. Users can specify up to 255 measurement objects in a measurement job. There are different kinds of measurement objects for different measurement types. Click the pull-down list box on the right of GP to select the required measurement granularity. The time interval for measurement data collection depends on the measurement granularity. 2) Input a measurement job name. In the optional measurement object box.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 they do not overlay in terms of measurement time. 5-4 MJ Create Wizard 1 1) Select a measurement type. 15 N. For optional measurement types. 5) Select a measurement object. 5-4). Click the “Create” button to enter “MJ CreateWizard 1” interface (as shown in Fig. The optional measurement granularities are: 5 N. 4) Select a measurement granularity. 3) Select the BSS. Page 143 of 516 . select a measurement object and press the “>” button to add the selected object to the “Selected Objects” box. see Table 5-1 Measurement Job List. Fig. If no time interval is set. The time between various time intervals cannot be the same. 5-5 MJ Create Wizard 2 Select and set a measurement interval in this dialog box. Page 144 of 516 . Warning: A. Click the clock icon on the top and select a start time from the generated time flag. The measurement job will collect data within the set measurement interval. The default interval range is 00:00 ~00:00 (24:00). B.e. At the same time. C. 1) There are two clock icons in this dialog box. 3) Repeat Steps 1) and 2) to set other measurement intervals. Fig. press the “Next” button to enter the next MJ CreateWizard 2 (as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 After the setting. The minimum cycle of collection is 5 minutes and a measurement time interval must be the integer multiple of 5 minutes. 2) Press the “Input” button to add the set interval to the “Selected Interval” box. click the clock icon at the bottom and select the end time from the generated time flag. the system will use the default one. 5-5). i. it will be executed in all intervals. Only on the set days. 5-6): Fig. A PR should be more than or equal to the measurement granularity. There are 7 kinds of PRs: 0. and PR. which is used as the default start date. 5-6 MJ Create Wizard 3 1) Set the start and stop date of the measurement job. 12 hours and 24 hours. The start date for a job should be more than or equal to the current date. The start/stop date should be set as follows: A. 1 hour. If the “Execute until be deleted” check box is selected. when set as FR. The stop date for a job should be more than or equal to the start date for a job. Set the FR Date and FR Time of the data measured by this measurement job. Report Information. B. the job will never stop until users delete it in forced mode. The setting of Report Information can be used to report data at a fixed point of time so as to avoid traffic peak. 30 minutes. 2) Select one or multiple measurement days. Page 145 of 516 . 6 hours.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Press the “Next” button to enter the next MJ Create Wizard 3 (as shown in Fig. 3) Input the Report Information. 0 representing instant report of measured data. can measurement data be collected. cannot be modified. 15 minutes. 5-7): Fig. Take Fig. 5-7 as an example to explain the creation of a measurement job: The measurement job is named “basic” and the measurement type is basic measurement. 2000 and the PR is 30 minutes. Monday. 3 cells of No. If the creation is unsuccessful.1. Tuesday. 5-7 MJ Create Wizard 4 This dialog box lists all information of this measurement job set in the previous 3 MJ Create Wizards.m. The FR Time is 10:35 a. Friday.5th. 1 SITE in BSC-18 (BSC1). The measurement granularity is 5N. Page 146 of 516 . Wednesday. the system will show the successful prompt and the job will be added in the browse tree and the measurement job list. Every Sunday. 04:00 ~06:20. measurements are carried out in the three intervals. 2 and No.5th. No. 09:25 ~12:35. 2000 and will not end until users delete it in forced mode.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Press the “Next” button to enter the next MJ Create Wizard (as shown in Fig. the system will prompt the failure cause. of Sept. The measurement object is No. Press the “Finish” button to finish creating the new measurement job. The job starts with Sept. If the creation is successful. Saturday. at 00: 45 ~01:40. And the base station controller a measurement job belongs to. Page 147 of 516 . 5-8 MJ Modify Wizard –Time Option There are two pages in the interface: Time Option and Other Option. 5-8: Fig. and click the “Modify” button to enter the modification dialog box shown in Fig. The FR Date and Time cannot be modified after the first report of data. The "Main Option” dialog box of MJ Create Wizard is shown in Fig. measurement granularity and measurement type cannot be modified once a measurement job is created. 5-9. In Time Option. In Main Option. 5-1. Modify a measurement job A created measurement job can be modified in terms of partial settings. as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3. 5-8 is the Time Option tab. the measurement start time cannot be modified once the foreground begins to measure data. Shown in the above Fig. only the measurement job name can be changed. Select the measurement job to be modified. this job will no longer collect any data. Thus. The deletion operation will delete all records this job has collected as it deletes this job.4 Counter query Counter Query can be used to instantly view the current value of a certain counter of a certain measurement object of a certain measurement job in data collecting. 5-10). 5. Select the measurement job to be queried and click the “Counter Query” button on the toolbar to enter the dialog box of PM .2. Delete a measurement job Select the measurement job to be deleted and click the “Delete” button to delete it. 5-9 MJ Create Wizard ---Main Option 4.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 148 of 516 .1.Counter Query (as shown in Fig. including the selection of a counter type and that of a measurement object. you will automatically enter this query result page. 5-11 Counter Query---Result Page 149 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. which will display a counter satisfying query conditions (as shown in Fig. Fig. Press the “Query” button. and a query result page will appear in this dialog box. 5-10 Counter Query---Condition First set query conditions. 5-11). Then. Fig.5 History data query History data query can be used to obtain the history data that a corresponding type of measurement job collects.1. 5. 5-12). 5-12 History data query – selection of measurement type and object Select the type of the measurement job and measurement object and press “Next” to enter the interface of selecting a measurement counter (as shown in Fig. Page 150 of 516 .2. Press the “Return” to finish Counter Query. Click the “History Data Query” button on the toolbar to enter the interface of selecting the measurement type and measurement object for history data query (as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Press the “Continue” button to return to the query condition page to continue querying other counters. 5-13). 5-15. 5-14 History data query – set query start time Input a legal start time and end time for the date to be queried and press the “Finish” button to query the data. 5-13 History data query – select a measurement counter Select the measurement counter and press “Next” to enter the interface of setting query start time (as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Fig. The returned result is shown in Fig. 5-14). Page 151 of 516 . 5-1. all current observation job lists of the BSS system will be displayed on the right of the interface.2.6 Observation job In the browse tree in the performance management main interface shown in Fig. select an observation job node of one BSS system. 5-15 History data query – query result display 5. 5-16 Observation job display Page 152 of 516 .1. 5-16. as shown in Fig. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. That is. select it and click the “Delete” button. 5-17. and the right side of this interface will be divided into two boxes. The items in the observation job list correspond to various jobs in the browse tree. To modify this observation job. displaying the lists and other pieces of information of this job. Fig. states and stop time of all established observation jobs. select it and click the “Modify” button to pop up a dialog box and modify it. multiple measurement jobs of Page 153 of 516 . 5-17 Display of a single observation job 2. To create an observation job. To suspend/recover an observation job. select it and click the “Suspend” or ”Recover” button. click the “Create” button on the toolbar. 1. To delete this observation job. Create an observation job A newly created observation job cannot overlay in terms of time with an existing one of the same observation type that contains the same measurement object.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The observation job list on the right side of the interface lists the names. types. Display of a specific observation job Select an observation job in the browse tree. as shown in Fig. If the stop date is set to the default. 5) Input the observation stop time. the job will be executed until it is deleted forcefully. An observation job can only have an observation object. 2) Select the BSS. Page 154 of 516 . When the StopTime comes. the job will be stopped at 0'clock that day. inter-cell in-handover observation in a BSS. 3) Input an observation job name. 5-18 OJ CreateWizard 1) Select the observation type. If only the stop date is input. Fig. The observation type includes cell inner handover observation in a BSS. 5-18). this observation job will be deleted automatically.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the same measurement type that contain the same measurement job can be created as long as they do not overlay in the time Click the “Create” button on the toolbar to enter the dialog box of OJ Create Wizard (as shown in Fig. inter-cell out-handover observation in a BSS and assignment failure observation. 4) Select an observation object. Page 155 of 516 . Modify an observation job Select the observation job to be modified and click the “Modify” button to enter the modification dialog box shown in Fig. 5-19 OJ Modify Wizard An observation job can be modified in terms of its job name and stop time only. If creation succeeds. 5-19: Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Press the “OK” button to finish creating a new observation job. 3. the system will give the prompt of success and the newly created job will be added to both the browse tree and the observation job list. 7 Event observation An observation event. Delete. Click the “Event Observe” button to enter the dialog box of PM . Page 156 of 516 . Event filter A filter operation is used to make sure that only an event generated by the selected observation job can be received.2. Clear. Event observation information is made up of two parts: the upper window informs users in time of the general information of all current observation events in a BSS in the form of a list and the lower text box displays the detailed information of the observation event selected by a user from the list.Event Observe (as shown in Fig. Continue Observation and Exit. 5-20). Save.1. You may open an event observation window to receive any event information. Event Filter. will be reported.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. 5-20 Event Observe The buttons on the toolbar in turn are: Open. 1. once triggered. Fig. 5-21). The file from which an observation event is saved can be opened. Then. 5-21 Event Filter Select the observation type to be filtered and press the “OK” button to confirm this filter operation. Event Save An observation event can be saved as a file for future view or for other client terminals to view. Click the “Open” button in the “Event Observe” dialog box and select the file to be opened. Event information is stored beforehand in a temporal file and users can use “File → Save” menu to save it. users should also be reminded of whether to save it. Click the “Save” button on the “Event Observe” dialog box. In the case of exit from this window.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Click the “Event Filter” button on the toolbar of the “Event Filter” dialog box to enter the dialog of Event Filter (as shown in Fig. Then. all events whose observation types are filtered will not be displayed when generating. users can select “File → Open” to open a saved observation time file. 2. Page 157 of 516 . the observation event saved in this file will be displayed in the dialog box. Fig. In addition. and all observation events displayed in the current “Event Observe” dialog box will be saved as files. cycle of collection and active status. If the average of any QoS item in active status within the cycle of collection exceeds the alarm threshold value. 5-1) to enter the display interface of Alarm watch (as shown in Fig. Fig. Traffic Load.1. Altogether there are six tabs: CPU Load.2. HO Success Rate Displayed on each page are the set QoS alarm threshold value.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. Select one alarm watch item in a BSS and click the “Suspend” or Page 158 of 516 . Drop Rate. 5-22 Alarm watch—CPU load The upper right of the alarm watch display interface is the BSS number and the alarm status list. a corresponding alarm will occur. Call Establishment Rate. and the lower right is the alarm watch threshold display. Available Rate.8 Alarm watch Select the observation alarm watch in the browse tree of the performance management main interface (as shown in Fig. The alarm watch threshold displays the classification of different thresholds. Only the activated QoS alarm threshold functions. 5-22). Cycle of collection: 5N. SMMCPMeanLoad and SMMCPPeakLoad Various units are represented as follows: The threshold of the percentage type: XX%. This page displays the threshold values. the value range is from 0 to 100%. RMMCPMeanLoad. 5-22 is the CPU Load page of alarm watch. 5-23 Alarm watch---CallEstablishSuccRate Page 159 of 516 . The threshold of the Irish type: XX. Fig. (N representing minute) Fig. cycles of collection and active states of the following few performance alarms: Call completion ratio of a cell Answering attempt ratio of a trunk route Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “Recover” button to suspend/recover all performance alarm watch in this BSS. 30N. 15N. 5-23 is the Call Establishment Rate page of alarm watch. cycles of collection and active states of the following performance alarms. RMMCPPeakLoad. This page displays the threshold values. the value range is from 0 to 100%. 60N. TCH/H average traffic load.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. trunk circuit available rate. TCH/H available rate. SDCCH available rate. Fig. This page displays the threshold values. 5-24 Alarm watch----availability rate Fig. This page displays the threshold values. cycles of collection and active states of several performance alarms: TCH/F average traffic load. trunk circuit average traffic load. 5-24 is the AvailRate page of alarm watch. cycles of collection and active states of the following few performance alarms: TCH/F available rate. Page 160 of 516 . 5-25 is the Traffic Load page of alarm watch. cycles of collection and active states of the following performance alarms: SDCCH channel drop rate. TCH/H voice channel drop rate. TCH/F data channel drop rate. This page displays the threshold values. Page 161 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. FACCH/H channel drop rate. TCH/H data channel drop rate. FACCH/F channel drop rate. TCH/F voice channel drop rate. 5-25 Alarm watch---TrafficLoad Fig. 5-26 is the DropRate page of alarm watch. in-handover success rate. Page 162 of 516 . 5-26 Alarm watch--DropRate Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. inter-cell HO success rate controlled by BSC and intra-cell HO success rate. cycles of collection and active states of the following performance alarms. 5-27 is the HOSuccRate page of Alarm watch. out-handover success rate. This page displays the threshold values. cycle of collection and active status. Traffic Load. Page 163 of 516 . AvailRate. the system will prompt the error and requires a second input.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. CallEstabSuc Rate. 5-28: Likewise. Drop Rate and HO SucRate. If an input value exceeds the range for the threshold value. alarm watch modification is set in terms of CPU load. 5-27 Alarm watch--HOSuccRate The modification operation can be used to establish or modify the threshold value. Click the “Modify” button on the toolbar to enter the “Revise QoS Value” interface as shown in Fig. Refreshing Because the OMCR (V2) system supports multi-terminal operations.9 Synchronize and refresh 1. 5-1.1. The specific operation is as follows: click the “Refresh” button on the toolbar shown in Fig. such as the synchronization in restarting OMCR (V2) together with BSS. synchronization failure at CPU changeover. 5-28 Alarm watch---modification 5. the operator needs to carry out the synchronization operation. observation job and QoS managed object and those in OMCR (V2) are accidentally made inconsistent.2. so as Page 164 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Most of the predictable inconsistencies can be automatically processed by the system in a synchronous mode. The inconsistencies include failures in restarting the module. 2. Synchronization In actual equipment running. a synchronization operation is needed if the data in the measurement job. When some undetectable a synchronization cases happen. Refresh operation can be made to display a task in real time. Fig. the system will give the prompt showing what module is successfully synchronized and what module is not (as shown in Fig. 5-30).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 to ensure the smooth running of the system.Synchronize MP (as shown in Fig. Fig. 5-29). 5-30 Synchronization prompt Page 165 of 516 . Press the “OK” button to synchronize the data in the background to the foreground. After the synchronization is completed. 5-29 Synchronize MP Select first a base station controller and then a module number to be synchronized. Click the ”Synchronize” button on the toolbar to enter the dialog box of PM . Besides. 5.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. and present the analysis results to users in the form of a list so that users can find and solve problems in time. A performance analysis console implements the following main functions: 1. C Report and BSC service report in the format of EXCEL. Page 166 of 516 . a performance analysis console is required to be capable of processing a performance report. when users present analysis requests. the performance data collected by a measurement job must be further processed.2 Performance analysis console For the sake of making clear the performance level of an entity. Analyze and display the performance data Calculate and analyze the recorded performance data according to the calculation formulas of performance indices specified by users. making a statistical analysis of the specified performance indices as required by customers and presenting the statistical results to client users in the form of a list.1 Overview A performance analysis console mainly implements the function of querying the performance data reported to a database by a measurement job. 2. so as to carry out further analysis calculations. 3. Process performance reports This means to convert the electronic data collected and analyzed by performance data into electronic reports or paper reports in other report formats. Report output supports work B Report. Thus. A performance analysis console aims to implement the above-mentioned functions. Query the performance data It mainly completes the query of the performance data reported in the measurement job.2. the system can report the analysis & processing result. 2. 5. Make a required analysis of the performance indices of a measurement object by means of the analysis task creation wizard with the analysis result displayed in the form of a list. Three kinds of reports can be output: System performance report (B report).2.2 Entry into the interface of performance analysis console After login. Output work report.2. select “Performance Management”—> “Performance Analysis Console” in the OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the main interface of Performance Analysis (as shown in Fig. 5-31).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5.2.2 5.1 Operations of the performance analysis console interface Brief introduction to operations A performance analysis console mainly has two kinds of operations: 1. Query and analysis of performance indices.2. 5-31 Main interface of Performance Analysis Page 167 of 516 . C report and BSC service report. Fig. 2. the left window in the middle of the interface displays the browse tree of the whole configuration. Help: Performance Analysis Console Help. Create Graphic Analysis. Define Report Option. Collapse. Collapse. Expand. Help and Exit. Click “ ” or “ ” in the browse tree or select Expand. Performance Analysis has no command column. 5-32. Expand. Create Performance Report. Define Report Option. Status bar. 2. Performance Analysis: Create Graphic Analysis. The buttons on the toolbar from left to right in turn are: Create Configuration Information Report. The configuration information report can be created on the performance analysis console. Create Performance Report.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The upper part of the interface is the menu bar and toolbar. 4. The interface is as shown in Fig. About. Graphic Switching. Refresh. Toolbar. the right window is the display of current processing result (performance analysis or report) and the lower part of the interface is a status bar. Collapse All. Refresh. Expand All or Collapse All to Expand or Collapse the browse tree and display the configurations of various existing BSSs. A browse tree displays the configurations of the whole mobile communication system. Output EXCEL. Collapse. Directory and Index. Expand All. The operations are as follows: Click the “Create Configuration Information Report” button. The items on the menu bar in turn are: 1. Page 168 of 516 . Collapse All. Expand All. Create GPRS Report. Output EXCEL. Exit. Graphic Switching. Performance Report: Create Configuration Information Report. 3. click the “Create Performance Report” button to enter the work report parameter input wizard shown in Fig. monthly report and self-defined report. Page 169 of 516 . 5-32 Display of Performance Analysis 5. C1 report. C2 report and 24-hour traffic report. The output of the report supports multiple formats. such as system performance report.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. a month or a selected date. and can be output as required according to a day. In Fig.2. 5-33. 5-31.2. A work report includes three kinds: daily report.3 Performance report A performance report means selecting some counters for the counter values collected by those created tasks and making a summary of them within a specified time range to form a report. for which the EXCEL format is used as the basic report format. click the “Next” button to enter the next wizard dialog box shown in Fig. 5-34. 5-34 Work report parameter input wizard 2 Select a work report analysis object. Press the “Next” button to enter the next wizard interface (as shown in Fig. 5-35). 5-33 Work report parameter input wizard 1 Select the type of the report in this dialog box. Page 170 of 516 . Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. If it is a monthly report. a certain date shall be selected. 5-37 to set the report output format. Otherwise. Page 171 of 516 . monthly report and self-defined report. a certain month shall be selected. you will enter the report wizard interface shown in Fig. The busy hour time segment can only be set as one hour. If the monthly report is selected. select a busy hour time segment for a statistical report and set the StartTime and StopTime of the busy hour. 5-36. If it is a self-defined report.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. the start and stop dates shall be selected. you can enter the next wizard interface to set the StartDate and StopDate shown in Fig. If it is a daily report. Press the “Finish” button to finish parameter input. Then. 5-35 Work report parameter input wizard 3 The statistical report has three types: Daily report. Click the “Back” button to return to the previous wizard interface for modification setting (except report style wizard 1). Click the “Cancel” button to cancel the display of the performance report.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Click the “Next” button to enter the Page 172 of 516 . “Finish” can be directly clicked in each of the interface of the report wizard to end the report wizard and display reports with existed settings. 5-36 Work report parameter input wizard 4 Fig. 5-37 Report style wizard 1 A report wizard is used to create report styles meeting different requirements. 5-38. Click the “Next” button in Fig. 5-37 to pop up the page setting interface shown in Fig. 5-38 Report style wizard 2---page setting In Fig. 5-38. select the “Font Setting” page shown in Fig. 5-39 Report style wizard 2----font setting Page 173 of 516 . 5-39 to set the fonts in the selected parts of the report and the alignment mode of the page header and data items in the report. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 next wizard interface for other settings. Fig. 5-40 Font setting Press the “Next” button to enter report style wizard 3 (as shown Fig. Then select a heading to be printed on the report page header. Fig. Fig. 5-40). First input a report name. 5-41).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Press the “Font” button to enter the dialog box of font setting (as shown in Fig. 5-41 Report style wizard 3 Page 174 of 516 . Wizard 4 (as shown in Fig. 5-43 Report style wizard 5 Page 175 of 516 . To print a page header heading. 5-42 Report style wizard 4 Click “Next” button to enter the interface shown in Fig. Fig. select Horizontally or Vertically. Fig. 5-43 to select the heading printed at the page footing of the report. To add. input other headings in the text box of the upper interface and press the “Add” button to add them to a lower page header heading list. you may select it in the list and press the “Delete” button at the lower part of the list to delete it or press the “Upward” or “Downward” button to adjust the order of headings.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Based on the selection of Wizard 3. For an existing page header heading. 5-42) lists the heading included in the report page header. input other headings in the text box of the upper interface and press the “Add” button to add them to a lower page footing heading list. you may select it in the list and press the “Delete” button at the lower part of the list to delete it or press the “Upward” or “Downward” button to adjust the order of headings. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Based on the selection of Wizard 5. To add. To print a page footing heading. Page 176 of 516 . select Horizontally or Vertically. 5-45) is the last report format wizard interface used to prompt that the settings of a report format are completed. Wizard 6 (as shown in Fig. 5-44) displays the heading included in the report page footing. 5-44 Report style wizard 6 Report style wizard 7 (as shown in Fig. For an existing page header heading. 5-47 C1 report display Page 177 of 516 . as shown in Fig. A work report is displayed in an EXCEL. 5-45 Report style wizard 7 Press the “Finish” button to enter the work report display. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 5-47 respectively. Given below are the examples of B report and C report. 5-46 and Fig. 5-46 System performance report display Fig. A tracing entity is specified by MSC. An operator manages call tracing via a call tracing interface at the BSC terminal. The tracing type can support the following tracing types stipulated in GSM12. The descriptive features of call tracing include: 1. etc. The service flow of a traced entity after a call is established is the unit of a tracing record. 1. but different calls of the same entity can have different tracing types. Call tracing records put more emphasis on process tracing instead of user behavior. handover tracing. which provides user administrators or network administrators with an effective and practical tool to observe users. It is the time in each message of a traced entity a call tracing program receives.3 Call tracing The tracing of users in a public land mobile network system is implemented by call tracing. The system operating personnel implements the tracing function of a mobile user or a piece of mobile equipment by collecting various tracing messages from a BSC. The data in call tracing records are also used for auxiliary analysis of network management. 3.3. such Page 178 of 516 . 2. Tracing type: basic tracing. Tracing object: Specified user designated by MSC. each of which in a call can only be assigned a tracing type by MSC. but are activated by MSC. Tracing receipt time: Year/month/date/hour/minute/second. A call tracing program supports the tracing of up to 16 entities. Call tracing supports multiple examples and a series of standardization operations.1 Overview Call tracing enables mobile user administrators to trace the activated entities in a public land mobile network.08. 5. wireless tracing. Basic tracing: basic information related to a call service flow.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. The tracing records of the activated entities are not collected at every moment. 3. establishment cause. 3. BTS identification. When necessary. radio channel description. 5. timing advance. 5. TRX identification. base station power. 2. RR message. it includes the mobile station power.2.2 5. select “Performance Management” —> “Call Tracing” in the OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the main interface of call tracing (as shown in Fig. Page 179 of 516 . circuit identity code. which also initiates the tracing of one or multiple entities. base station color code. end indication. Tracing messages can be saved as files for future view.2 Entry into the call tracing interface After login.3. SCCP message. Handover tracing: besides the information of basic tracing. handover result. BSSMAP message. Wireless tracing: It is almost the same as the information of the handover tracing. After MSC activates the BSC for call tracing by means of messages.3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 as call tracing messages. power control and Abis message. handover cause.2. 5-48). etc. handover destination cell list. mobile station classmark. it also includes the measurement report before/after handover. TRAU identification. you may press the “Begin Tracing” button in the call tracing interface to view the tracing records of the object being currently traced.1 Operations of the call tracing interface Brief introduction to operations An entity to be traced is selected by MSC. synchronization information. handover duration. can be represented by the information included in tracing messages. History Records. Suspend Tracing. Help and Exit. Status Bar. Recover Tracing. The buttons from left to right in the toolbar in turn are: Begin Tracing. Tracing: Begin Tracing. assignment of channel flow. Clear Screen. etc. Directory and Index. the middle of the window is tracing message display and the lower interface is the status bar. The contents of and the order between these messages represent various service flows. End Tracing. The items on the menu bar in turn are: 1. release of channel flow and cell handover flow. A call tracing interface can display all tracing messages generated during a cal. 2. For example. Help: Call Tracing Help. History Record. Suspend Tracing. Refresh. for one call of a traced entity. Save Records.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Clean Screen. One call of a tracing entity is made up of many tracing messages. Refresh. Save Record. the tracing messages generated during this call must be displayed on an integrated basis. 7-48 The main interface of call tracing The upper interface is the menu bar and toolbar. 3. Exit. Recover Tracing. View: Toolbar. About. Page 180 of 516 . End Tracing. Therefore. 3. communication) with BSC. radio channel. Page 181 of 516 . Call tracing has no command column.2.3 Begin tracing Click the “Begin Tracing” button. RR message and measurement report message can be obtained in the Abis interface message page.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The trace messages are displayed in the window according to types of the tracing messages. this handshake is considered as a failure and the system will prompt users to end tracing and reinitiate tracing. 5. If a handshake lasts for over 1 minute but does not succeed. BSC also initiates handshake to the workstation. If handshake succeeds. once there is any tracing information. altogether five pages are displayed. Handover process. the tracing program decodes. the program will decode the information and show it in the interface in real time (as shown in Fig. 5-49). After a successful handshake. A interface message and Abis interface message. and the workstation initiates call tracing handshake (namely. Basic information. If MSC has activated BSC by means of messages for call tracing. classifies and displays any tracing information received. Page 182 of 516 . tracing example number. 5-49 is the Abis interface message page of call tracing message display and various pages in the interface display various corresponding messages.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. tracing type. Click one tracing message in the Basic Message page. If this message has one or multiple index values listed at the upper part of this window. 5-50). Double click one tracing message to pop up a dialog box providing the detailed information of this tracing message (as shown in Fig. Fig. the index value box is null. message type and message generation time. 5-49 Tracing message display The above Fig. Otherwise. it will be displayed in the index value box. 5-51. including the message number. 5-50 Detailed message of call tracing The basic information and radio channel pages of the call tracing interface also display specific index values corresponding to some tracing messages. 5-51 Tracing message display---basic message 5. 2. the message of the original traced entity will no longer be added to tracing records and the tracing message of a new traced entity will not be included in tracing records. End tracing Click the “End Tracing” button to terminate all tracings and ignore all tracing messages. but will be when tracing is resumed. and all tracings will be suspended and none of the tracing messages will be processed. That is. In this case. Suspend/recover tracing Click the “Suspend Tracing” button. the original tracing records will not be deleted and new tracing messages will be added when Recover Tracing is selected.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. In this case. Click the “Recover Tracing” button on the tool bar. That is. the original tracing records will not be deleted.2. and all Page 183 of 516 .3. the message of the original traced entity will no longer be added to tracing records and the tracing message of a new traced entity will not be included in tracing records.4 Other operations 1. you may view any history tracing message in this history record. 5. Click the “History Records” button. The files saved at different times will not be overwritten. and you may view history records. 3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 suspended tracings will resume to the status of tracing. the tracing program will decode and classify any tracing information received in real time.21. any tracing message within the suspend time segment cannot be recovered. 2000 is saved as invoke2000921-923. Then this button is pressed down and this status is saved. and displays them in real time on the interface on the basis of the original tracing records. View history records So-called history records are those tracing records saved by means of Save Tracing. then the name of the file where the call tracing starting on at 9:23 on Sept. The original tracing records still will be retained. A saved file cannot be put to cyclic use. A tracing message saving file has the extension name “trc”. Page 184 of 516 . Open a call tracing file. The saved files are automatically included under the “itlog” directory with the same directory as call tracing running files. 4.trc. Thus. However. All tracing messages in the current interface and subsequent ones will be saved automatically as files until the “Save Tracing” button is clicked again to cancel the press-down status. and select and open a history record file. Clear screen Click the “Clear Screen” button to clear all tracing messages in the current call tracing interface from the screen. Once there is any tracing information. If the file name is invoke +year/month/day-hour/minute. Save records Click the “Save Tracing” button. the decoding that supports Gb interface signaling is correspondingly added in the signaling tracing module. At the same time. The size of a tracing file depends only on disk capacity and the viewing of a tracing file has no such restriction. messages in MTP. 5-52). a saved file will be generated for future view.4. messages related with PS service are added at the Abis interface and the signaling tracing also provides functions of related message tracing and decoding. select “Performance Management” —> “Signaling Tracing” in the OMCR (V2) main interface to enter the main interface of signaling tracing (as shown in Fig.4 5. A traced signaling can be stored for future opening and provides the filtering function.4. so as to facilitate the viewing of the signaling flow during debugging and commissioning and problem detection in the signaling cooperation process. MAC message on the Abis interface and BSSGP message on the Gb interface. After the GPRS service is added. The major involved protocols include A interface No. MAP and messages in Abis interface layer 3 and internal Abis interface management messages. For the GPRS service. SCCP.1 Signaling tracing Overview The major task of signaling tracing is to trace signals involved in BSC. Page 185 of 516 .2 Operations of the signaling tracing interface After login. which can convert the signaling code stream into words in the small traffic situation. The major operational environment is the tracing of one terminal to one BSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5. 5. Besides the tracing. so as to facilitate the observation. due to the newly added BSSGP message in the Gb interface. the signaling tracing mainly provides the tracing and decoding of the RLC (PS) message.7 signaling. 6. End. Find. Clean Up. Suspend. View: Toolbar. About… The buttons on the toolbar are in turn Begin Tracing. Next. Find Next. File: Open…. Tile Vertically. which includes the following: 1. 5-52 Main interface of Signaling Tracing The upper interface is the menu bar. Cascade. Background Filtering. Window: Tile Horizontally. Find. Save…. End Tracing. Signaling Tracing: Start. Tile Horizontally. Suspend Tracing. Tile Vertically. Directory and Index. Page 186 of 516 . ”Begin”: begin signaling tracing.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. ”Save”: save the tracing message of the current active window as a file. Status Bar. Cascade 4. Open. Tools: Clean Up. Previous 5. Background Filter 3. Exit 2. ”Open”: open an existing tracing file. Help and Exit. Find Previous. Save. Help: Signaling Tracing Help. 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 ”Suspend: stop signaling tracing.4. ”Background Filtering”: filter received signaling in terms of their types. 5. First enter the “Configuration of Signal Trace” interface in the GSM environment shown in Fig. “Find”. ”End”: end signaling tracing and close the tracing window. “Tile Vertically”.1 Begin tracing In Fig. 5-52. “Find Previous”: Search information required by the user in the active window. “Cascade”: Different arranging modes are displayed in the interface. “Find Next”. Configurations in the GPRS environment are shown in Fig. click the “Start Tracing” button or select the “Begin” in the “Signaling Tracing” menu to start a tracing. ”Clean Up”: clean up all tracing information in the current window. At the bottom of the interface is the status bar which shows the current interface. Page 187 of 516 . and the operator. 5-54. “Tile Horizontally”. ”Scroll”: display automatically the last signaling (excluding filtered signaling) when any signaling arrives. ”Details”: display the details of a tracing message. 5-53. the operation terminal No. Press the “OK” button to begin signaling tracing.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 5-53 Configuration of signal trace--GSM Fig. Page 188 of 516 . and the interface displays the tracing message in real time (as shown in Fig. 5-54 Configuration of signal trace--GPRS Select first the base station controller of the signaling to be traced in the pull-down menu and then a message type. 5-55). 5-55 Tracing message display In the dialog box of tracing setting. length and content. there is the same number of message types as tracing message windows. If there are over 5. The window displays up to 5.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Because the information traced in real time is displayed in real time. 5-55 displays the tracing message list of an RSL message. time of generation. BTS. After the operation of cleaning up messages. Page 189 of 516 . Press the “Suspend” button or select the “Suspend” option in the “Signaling Tracing” menu to stop signaling tracing. channel number.000 tracing messages displayed. the earliest one will be overwritten and only the latest 5. SITE. the active window will display any tracing messages generated after that moment. TRX.000 tracing messages.000 ones will be displayed. The window of the interface in the above Fig. the window automatically displays the last valid message in scroll mode as more and more information is generated. which includes the message name. Click the “Clean Up” button or select the “Clean Up” option in the menu “Tools” to clear all tracing messages in the current active window. Tile Vertically and Cascade.2. double click a tracing message to view detailed information of it.4. as shown in Fig. signaling messages can still be saved in the disk file even if they exceed 5000 pieces in this window. displaying the details of the selected tracing message. In this case.2. The following Page 190 of 516 . If save is started. 5-55 is arranged in Cascade. 5-55. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Click the “End” button to stop this signaling tracing. there is the same number of message types as tracing message windows. In the tracing message display window shown in Fig.3 Tracing window operations In the dialog box of tracing setting. And the window displays all tracing messages (except for the earliest one deleted as a result of more than 5.2 Tracing message operations Contents of the message are displayed in the code form. 5-56 Display of detailed information 5. There are three arranging modes of the tracing message window: Tile Horizontally. 5-56.000) of this tracing. a small window will appear in the lower part of the interface. 5.4. The window shown in Fig. 5-55.4 Tracing filtering Because some messages unrelated to tracing objective are frequently generated during the tracing. click the “Background Filter” button in the toolbar to carry out the background filter operation and pop up the “Message Filter” dialog box in the GSM environment shown in Fig. Page 191 of 516 .4. 5-57 Window tiled horizontally 5. 5-57: Fig. In Fig. as shown in Fig.2. 5-59. 5-58. The “Message Filter” dialog box in the GPRS environment is shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 example is one window arranged in Tile Horizontally mode. background filtering can be used to filter some tracing messages. 5-59 Background filter---GPRS Background filtering adopts a two-level filtering mode. 5-58 Background filter---GSM Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. The left-hand window lists the measurement types the background is Page 192 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 capable of filtering in the three-level tree structure. 5-60: Fig. Find is implemented in the current active window and the first found objective containing this field will be located and highlighted. Then. the tracing information in the current active window can be saved as a tracing file. Click the “Find” button or select the “Find” option in the “Tools” menu to pop up a dialog box of Find. Find can be used to locate a specific type of or a tracing message.2. you can select from the message types included in the selected types of messages in the right-hand window. Then. Then. 5. 5. Page 193 of 516 . the previous or next objective containing the character of the objective to be found will be located and highlighted. Click to select the first two levels of nodes in the tree structure. the same background filtering can be implemented in each signaling tracing before background filtering is set again.4.6 Save a tracing file During the tracing.2. as shown in Fig. press the “Find Next” button to find. Press the “OK” button to confirm the selection of filtered options. 5-60 Find Input any field of the message to be found in “Find what” box and select the Find direction as required. Select the first two levels of nodes of the tree structure and press the “All” or “None” button to select all or none of message types. Click the “Previous” or “Next” button on the toolbar.4. Then.5 Find Because there are too many tracing messages. the tracing message in the active window can be saved as a tracing file. 5. select a “Save as type” (the default value being a tracing file *. 5-61 “Save As” dialog box Select the path of a tracing file. 5-62: Page 194 of 516 .4. 5-61: Fig. as shown in Fig. After Save is set.tra) and click “Save”. Click the “Open” button or select the “Open” option in the menu “File” to pop up a dialog box of opening a tracing file.7 Open a tracing file A tracing file can be opened and viewed. Thus. All current tracing messages and those ones being generated will be saved as a tracing file until the “Save” button on the toolbar is clicked again to cancel the press-down status.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Select the “Save” button or select the “Save” option in the menu “File” to pop up the “Save As” dialog box shown in Fig. input a file name. the “Save” button on the toolbar will be in the press-down status.2. 5-62 Open a tracing file Select the tracing file to be opened and click the “Open” button to open the selected tracing file. Then. Page 195 of 516 . any tracing message saved in this file will be displayed in the interface.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. . It also provides brief introductions to the concepts involved. transceiver and transmission equipment.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6 Configuration Management This chapter mainly describes how to configure and operate the ZXG10-OMCR (V2) system during deployment and how to do related maintenance after the system is put into operation. the background configures the data into DBS and BTS via an agent to enable the parameters. 6. The configuration management involves the configuration of the radio resources data as well as the software loading for the base station. that is.1. Page 197 of 516 . the communication links between the BSC. while MS gets the latest configuration via the RMS broadcasting information. the cell configuration and coverage conditions of the system. which are generated according to the system configuration data and vary with the specific application status during the system operations. It also synchronizes the configuration information provided by the maintenance personnel to the background database table of the radio resources so as to support the foreground database. transceiver and transmission equipment inside the equipment.1 6. communication links. The foreground part mainly executes the configuration results of the background. for instance. BS. The configured data are stored in the database subsystem. 6-1. Meanwhile the related configuration commands are afforded to modify the configured conditions and generate the statistic data. etc. the configuration conditions of the base station. channel configuration and application status. cells.. ZXG10 radio resource configuration management (RRC in short) mainly enables the configuration and management on the BSS radio resources of GSM. channels.1 Radio resources management Overview The position and range of the management system of ZXG10 radio resources is shown in Fig. It provides the maintenance personnel with the man-machine interface for radio resource configuration and management. transceiver. Adjacent handover & reselection cell (AHO&RESELECTCELL). Site. 6-1 System location and range The objects of radio resources in the BSC system include: Base Station Controller (BSC). cell parameters and configuration cells. external cell (ECELL). The configuration management includes the following three parts: BSS. Page 198 of 516 . Radio Carrier. Adjacent reselection cell (ARESELECTCELL).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 UNIX/ Window NT Server Radio Resource Management Database MP Radio Resource Management Database RRC Agent Manager RRC MMI Server MP SITE(OMU) MS Fig. Adjacent handover cell (AHANDOVERCELL). logic traffic channel (CHAN). 6-2. as shown in Fig. After login to the system. Handover Control parameter (HOC). interference cell (ICELL). Base Transceiver Station (BTS). select “Configuration ManagementÆ Radio Resources Management” in the OMCR (V2) main interface (Fig. 2-10) for the system to enter the “ZXG10 Radio Resources Management” interface. Power Control parameter (POC). logic LAPD link (LAPDLINK) and frequency hopping system (FHS). Transceiver (TRX). logic PCM (PCMCIRCUIT). Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Create External Cells. PCM circuits. Create Logical Site. On the main interface. and external cells. 6-2 The main interface The main interface shows three windows: the tree in the left window shows the objects to be created and maintained. 6. Create LAPD links.1. logical sites. the right window describes the relationship between BSC and SITE with a logic illustration. Then right click to pop up Page 199 of 516 .2 BSS The configuration of the BSS includes configuration of the base station controller.1. and right click to display the pull-down short-cut menu.2. and each option will be described below in detail.1 Creating BSC Select “BSS” node in the browse tree of Fig. and the window below shows the man-machine command – MMI command created by the operations. LAPD links. 6. Create PCM Circuits. etc. 6-2. The short-cut menu includes: Create BSC.. select the “BSS” node. The status bar at the bottom of the interface shows the linking status with the server and the machine number of the client terminal. 6-3 Configuring BSC (1) GSM Fig. select “Create BSC”. 6-3 and that in GPRS is shown in Fig. The interface shown in Fig. 6-3 for configuring the BSC will pop up.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the floating menu. Fig. 6-4. Basic property The basic property setting of the BSC in GSM is shown in Fig. 6-4 Configuring BSC (1) GPRS Page 200 of 516 . 1. where you can configure the basic property and timer of the BSC. which uniquely identifies a specific GSM PLMN network in a country (decided by MCC). which is used to uniquely identify the home country of a mobile subscriber (or system). Value range: 1 ~ 255 2) Alias: Description: BSC alias. These parameters are used to indicate the valid time length of the load information. MSC will notify the neighboring BSC of these information in the “BSSAP LOAD INDICATION” message. 3) Mobile Country Code (MCC) Description: MCC consists of three decimal digits. and the message contents include time indication information. Valid in 10s … Meaning Valid in 2540s Valid permanently Default: 5 Page 201 of 516 . and notifies MSC of the load status. And then. BSC periodically sends “BSSAP LOAD INDICATION” message to MSC. indicating the valid time length of the service load information. Value range: 0 ~ 99 Default: 0 5) LoadValidTime Description: During load indication. Value range: See Table 6-1. Value range: 0 ~ 999 Default: 460 4) Mobile network code (MNC) Description: MNC consists of two decimal numbers. Table 6-1 The value range of “LoadValidTime” Value 0 1 … 254 255 Reserved.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1) BSC ID Description: uniquely identifies the BSC. Table 6-2 The value range of “Load Ind Period” Value 1 2 … 65535 other values 0. When the load indication message is sent periodically. and the message contents include time indication information. and notifies MSC of the load status.2s … Time length 6553. Default: 600 7) Flow Control Description: “OverLevel” defines the flow control policy for the specific cell. Table 6-3 Overloa d Level 0 1 2 3 4 5 Barred Class Number 0 0 0 1 2 3 Rxlev_ Access _Min 0 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 The value range of “ Flow Control” Penalt y Time Cell select Offset 0 0 0 -2 (254) -3 (253) -4 (252) 0 1 2 3 4 4 0 -1 (255) -2 (254) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) Txinteger Max.1s 0. MSC will notify the neighboring BSC of these information in the “BSSAP LOAD INDICATION” message.Retrans Page 202 of 516 . Value range: See Table 6-2.5s Reserved. And then. this parameter determines the period for BSC sending the load indication message. indicating the valid time length of the service load information. Value range: See Table 6-3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6) Load Ind Period Description: During load indication. BSC periodically sends “BSSAP LOAD INDICATION” message to MSC. This parameter is used for the threshold of automatic indication mode. During the resource indication by BSC. 10) ResourceIndTs Description: This is the threshold value that BSC automatically indicates MSC. the percentage of the present available channels over the total channels. Value range: True / False Default: True 9) Resource Position Info Description: The geographic name of the position where BSC is located. the percentage of the current available channels over the total channels. This can be set via OMS.Retrans 8) Allow Inter-Cell Handover Description: Whether to allow the handover between cells inside a BSC. Internal handover between different cells of a BSS can reduce the messages between BSS and MSC because no message will be sent to MSC before the execution of handover. When the available resources of the cell is less than the parameter. there are four modes as such: Page 203 of 516 . that is. notifying the cell condition. BSS should support the internal handover inside the cell (handover between different channels in the same cell) and the handover between cells controlled by MSC. that is.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Overloa d Level 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Barred Class Number 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Rxlev_ Access _Min 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 11111 11111 11111 11111 11111 11111 Penalt y Time Cell select Offset -4 (252) -3 (253) -2 (254) -1 (255) 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) -3 (253) Txinteger Max. It can also support the handover between different cells inside BSS. will BSS send the “HANDOVER EXECUTION” message to MSC. the resource indication that is configured by the O&M should be given to MSC. Only after the handover is completed. Stop mode: After the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is received. If it does. After that. One-off mode: After the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is received. then mode 1 or 3 is adopted. If the Periodicity IE in the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is not 0. If Periodicity IE is 0. then the message is wrong and the whole “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is regarded as wrong. once the auto condition (service threshold or the interval between any two messages) set by O&M of BSC is satisfied. And then. BSC instantly returns a “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION” message as an acknowledgement without containing any resource information. BSC automatically sends the “BSSAP RESUORCE INDICATION” message to MSC. Value range: The auto indication thresholds are shown in Table 6-4. B. otherwise mode 4 applies. same as mode 4.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 A. it will immediately return a “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION” message that contains the resource information. If the previous mode is 1 or 3. And then. D. the cell resource information will no longer be sent to MSC. BSC will follow the rules of “Subsequent Mode” element in the message. BSC will ignore 0). BSC instantly returns a “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION” message as an acknowledgement without any resource information. If the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message does not contain the “Extended Resource Indication IE”. BSC periodically sends the “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION” message. C. BSC will stop sending and wait for the next “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST”. Period mode: After BSC receives the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message. then the period to send the message is the value of Periodicity IE times 100ms. BSC instantly returns a “BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION” message with resource information. Page 204 of 516 . and uses the “Periodicity IE” in the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” to determine the interval of the indication messages (unless the “Periodicity IE” is 0. Auto mode: After the “BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST” message is received. Default: 3 12) Cict Max Reset Num Description: The maximum number of resets during BSC circuit resetting. the whole circuit resetting process should be repeated. the confusion message will be sent. N is decided by the “BscMaxResetNum” parameter.N is determined by CircMaxResetNum. If no reply is obtains after N times. indicating that the received message cannot be correctly processed due to some reasons while there are no other suitable fault messages to return. The “BSSAP RESET CIRCUIT” message can be repeated up to N times. MSC will end the resetting process and inform OMS. This message is bi-directional. Page 205 of 516 . The “BSSAP RESET” message can be repeated up to N times. When BSC sends the “BSSAP RESET CIRCUIT” message to MSC and if the “BSSAP RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDG” message has not been received in the GSM-specified T19 time. Value range: True: BSC is allowed to send “BSSAP CONFUSION” message.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-4 The value range of “ResourceIndTs” Value 0 1 … 100 0% 1% … 100% Meaning Default: 30 11) BSC Max Reset Num Description: The maximum number of resets during BSC resetting. the whole resetting process should be repeated. Default: 3 13) Can Send Confusion Message Description: This parameter determines whether BSC is allowed to send the “BSSAP CONFUSION” message. When BSC sends the “BSSAP RESET” message to MSC and if the “BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE” message sent by MSC has not been received in the specified T4 time. If no reply is obtains after N times. MSC will end the resetting process and inform OMS. True: Load indication can be used. The load indication process is an optional item of BSC. Value range: False: Load indication cannot be used. railway GSM900 frequency band R-GSM (ARFCN =0~124. that is. so that even more information can be consulted during the common handover and the intra-BSC traffic handover. Page 206 of 516 . This parameter decides whether the load indication process can be used. GSM1800 frequency band GSM1800 (ARFCN =512 ~ 885). which enables the neighboring BSCs to know their cell load conditions outside the boundary. otherwise. Value range: True/False Default: False 15) Load Indication Description: Whether the load indication process can be used. 975~1023). Default: False 14) Customize retry can send failure Description: Whether the external customized directed retry is allowed to send the indication failure. when the parameter is 0 (the load indication process cannot be used). 955~1023). the expanded GSM900 frequency band E-GSM (ARFCN = 0~124. they will be valid. Default: False 16) Broad Area Description: Broadcast scope Value range: Basic GSM900 frequency band P-GSM (ARFCN = 1 ~ 124). meanwhile the validity of parameters “LoadValidTime” and “LoadIndPrd” are determined.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 False: BSC is not allowed to send “BSSAP CONFUSION” message. the two parameters followed be invalid. GSM Fig. 6-6. Timer The setting of the BSC timer in GSM environment is illustrated in Fig. 6-6 Configuring BSC (2) -. Fig. 6-5 Configuring BSC (2) -. equipment Page 207 of 516 . 6-5 and that in GPRS environment is illustrated in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2.GPRS Parameters of each timer are described as follows: 1) T1: Blocking/unblocking period Description: Due to some reasons (O&M intervention. 1s 10.1s 0.2s … The value range of the global resetting period Duration represented 120s Reserved.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 failure/recovery. See Table 6-6. Stop conditions of the timer: When the “BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE” message is received from MSC. Default: 80 2) T4: Global resetting period Description: T4 is used to monitor the “BSSAP RESET” message sent by BSC to MSC. Default: 100 Page 208 of 516 . Table 6-5 The value range of blocking/unblocking period Code 1 2 … 1200 other values 0. Value range: 1 ~ 1200. Value range: 100 ~ 1200. “BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE” message to BSS. Start conditions of the timer: When there is a global reset for BSC. T4 starts. C. A. Timeout: If T4 expires. BSC will repeat the whole process. receives message. Table 6-6 T4 100 101 102 … 1200 other values 10s 10. This period of time is defined by T1. See Table 6-5. B. it sends BSS will block/unblock a land circuit and send “BLOCK/UNBLOCK” message to MSC. After MSC radio resources the unavailable/available).2s … Duration represented 120s Reserved. Default: 100 4) T8: Source BSC handover executing period Description: T8 supervises the external handover process of the source BSC A. In case of failure. BSC will stop the T7 timer. When the “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT” message is received. BSC can send other “BSSAP HANDOVER REQIURED” messages to MSC. T7 starts. B. Similarly.1s 5. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED” message to MSC.2s … Duration represented 30s Reserved. Stop conditions of the timer: When the “BSSAP CLEAR COMMAND” Page 209 of 516 . See Table 6-7.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3) T7: The protective period for handover request Description: T7 monitors the “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED” message. Table 6-7 The value range of the protective period for handover request T7 50 51 52 … 300 other values 5s 5. MSC can send the “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT” message to BSC. A. BSC will instantly repeat the “HANDOVER REQUIRED” process. Timeout: If T7 expires but the external handover conditions are still satisfied. B. Stop conditions of the timer: MSC receives “BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND” or “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT” message. Start conditions of the timer: T8 starts when the “BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND” message is received from MSC. C. The maximum time taken from the “BSSAP HANDOVER REQIURED” message sent by BSC to the “BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND” message returned by MSC. Value range: 50 ~ 300. C. B. A. BSC will send the “BSSAP CLEAR REQUEST” message to MSC. Stop conditions of the timer: When MS receives “ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE” and “ASSIGNMENT FAILURE” messages. T10 stops. See 6-9. Table 6-8 The value range of the source BSC handover executing period T8 80 81 82 … 150 other values 8s 8. Timeout: When T10 timer expires. Value range: 80 ~ 150. Timeout: When the T8 timer expires. BSC sends a “BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE” message to MSC. Page 210 of 516 . T8 will stop. Default: 120 5) T10: Assignment period Description: T10 supervises the assignment process.1s 8. Value range: 40 ~ 140.2s … Duration represented 15s Reserved. See Table 6-8.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 message is received from MSC or if the “RIL3_RR HANDOVER FAILURE” message is received from MSC. C. Start conditions of the timer: T10 starts when the “ASSIGNMENT COMMAND” message is sent to MS. Page 211 of 516 .1s 5. Default: 80 6) T13: Protective period for global resetting Description: T13 is a protection time for a local call clearing process. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC receives the “BSSAP RESET” message from MSC. Timeout: When T13 expires. Table 6-10 The value range of the protective period for the global resetting T13 50 51 52 … 300 other values 5s 5. BSS sends the “BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGEMENT” message to MSC. B. See Table 6-10.2s … Duration represented 14s Reserved. T13 starts. Value range: 50 ~ 300. C.2s … Duration represented 30s Reserved. Default: 150 7) T17: The first overload period of flow control Description: T17 supervises the flow control process of MSC overload. Stop conditions of the timer: When SCCP receives a SSP/SPI (“subsystem prohibited/signaling point inhibited”) message.1s 4. A.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-9 The value range of the assignment period T10 40 41 42 … 140 other values 4s 4. services will be increased by one level. See Table 6-12. BSC observes whether there is a “BSSAP OVERLOAD” message received from MSC. Timeout: When T18 timer expires. Timeout: When T17 timer expires. C. Value range: 10 ~ 100. See Table 6-11. Value range: 30 ~ 200. T17 starts. Stop conditions of the timer: No.1s … Duration represented 20s Reserved. T18 starts and the service degrades by one level. Default: 150 Page 212 of 516 . A. B. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC receives the “BSSAP OVERLOAD” message from MSC. Default: 80 8) T18: The second overload period of flow control Description: T18 supervises the flow control process of MSC overload. Stop conditions of the timer: No. B. .2s … Duration represented 10s Reserved. Table 6-11 The value range of the first overload period of flow control T17 10 11 12 … 100 other values 1s 1. C. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC receives the “BSSAP OVERLOAD” message from MSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 A.1s 1. Table 6-12 The value range of the second overload period of flow control T18 30 31 … 200 other values 3s 3. 2s … Duration represented 120s Reserved. the timer will stop. Description: If because of exceptional BSC SCCP connection. See Table 6-13. After the message is received. Table 6-13 The value range of the circuit resetting period at the BSS side Code 1 2 … 1200 other values 0. the circuits must be released to idle state. notifying BSS that the blocking/unblocking message has been received. then send “BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK” message to MSC. equipment fault/recovery. radio resources unavailable/available). When the BSC receives the “RESET CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE” message. the MSC will send the “BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWKEDGE” message to BSS. Default: 80 10)T20: Circuit group blocking/unblocking period Description: If because of some reasons (O&M intervention.1s 0. and BSS will send “BSSAP CIRCUIT RESET” message to MSC to start T19. After MSC receives that message. it releases the corresponding services and the circuits to the idle state and send “BSSAP CIRCUIT RESET ACKNOWLEDGE” message to BSC. BSS will block/unblock a group of land circuits. Table 6-14 The value range of the circuit group blocking/unblocking period Page 213 of 516 . Value range: 1 ~ 1200. See Table 6-14.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 9) T19: The circuit resetting period at the BSS side. Value range: 1 ~ 1200. T9101 stops. See Table 6-15. Table 6-15 The value range of the timer T9101 T9101 100 other values 10s Reserved.2s … Duration represented 120s Reserved. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “BSSAP CLEAR COMPLETE” message to MSC. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives RLSD message from MSC. A. Description: Timer T9103 is used to supervise the channel activation process. C. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends CHANNEL ACTIVATION to BTS. BSC sends RF CHANNEL RELEASE to BTS. T9103 starts. Duration represented Setting: not subject to change. BSC will send the RLSD message to release the SCCP connection.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Code 1 2 … 1200 other values 0. B. 12)T9103: Supervises the channel activation process.1s 0. T9101 starts. Default: 80 11)T9101: Supervises the RLSD message receiving. C. B. Value range: 100. A. Description: T9101 timer supervises the RLSD message receiving. Timeout: When T9103 expires. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives “CHANNEL ACTIVATION ACK” or “CHANNEL ACTIVATION NACK” message from BTS. Timeout: When the T9101 timer expires. Page 214 of 516 . T9103 stops. Timeout: When the T9104 expires. Table 6-17 The value range of T9104 T9104 50 … 200 other values 5s … Duration represented 20s Reserved. C. Value range: 50 ~ 200. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives Page 215 of 516 . Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “CLEAR REQUEST” message to MSC. T9104 starts. the “CLEAR REQUEST” message is resent (four times at most). See Table 6-17. Default: 150 14)T9105: Supervises the SCCP connection process. B. T9105 starts. 13)T9104: Supervises the “CLEAR COMMAND” sent from MSC. T9101 stops. A. Duration represented Setting: not subject to change. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “SCCP_CONNECTION_REQ” message to MSC. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives “CLEAR COMMAND” message from MSC. See Table 6-16.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: 20. Description: The T9104 timer supervises the “CLEAR COMMAND” sent from MSC. B. Table 6-16 The value range of T9103 RmsT9103 20 other values 2s Reserved. Description: The timer T9105 is used to supervise the SCCP connection process. A. See Table 6-18. Default: 100 15)T9108: Supervises the physical context request process Description: The T9108 timer is used to supervise the physical context request process. C. 16)T9113: Supervises the external handover in the destination cell. T9108 stops. BSC will send the “CHANNEL RELEASE” message to MS. BSC will send the “ASSIGNMENT FAILURE” message to MSC. A. Duration represented Setting: not subject to change.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “SCCP_CONNECTION_CONFIRM” or “SCCP_CONNECTION_REFUSED” message from MSC. Table 6-19 The value range of T9108 T9108 20 other values 2s Reserved. Timeout: When the T9108 timer expires. C. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives “PHYSICAL CONTEXT CONFIRM” message from BTS. T9105 stops. Value range: 20. Description: The T9113 timer is used to supervise the external handover in Page 216 of 516 . Table 6-18 The value range of T9105 T9105 20 … 2400 other values 2s … Duration represented 240s Reserved. See Table 6-19. Timeout: When the T9105 timer expires. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “PHYSICAL CONTEXT REQUEST” message to BTS. B. T9108 starts. Value range: 20 ~ 2400. Default: 130 17)zxgT1: The protection time for channel activation Description: The protection time to wait for MS access during assignment or handover after the channel is activated. Table 6-21 The value range of zxgT1 Value Time length Page 217 of 516 . Stop conditions of the timer: MS accesses and the destination channel receives ASSIGNMENT COM or HANDOVER COM. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “HANDOVER REQUEST ACK” message to MSC. Start conditions of the timer: The destination channel receives CHLACTIVATION ACK and sends RADIO AVAILABLE to the source channel. C. See Table 6-21. Value range: 80 ~ 150.1s … Duration represented 15s Reserved. Value range: 50 ~ 120. When BSC receives the “HANDOVER COMPLETE” message from MS or the “CLEAR COMMAND” message from MSC. A. B. T9113 starts.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the destination cell. Timeout: When the T9113 timer expires. BSC will send the “CLEAR REQUEST” message to MSC. Table 6-20 The value range of T9113 T9113 80 81 … 150 other values 8s 8. A. B. the T9113 timer stops. See Table 6-20. 1s 5.0s 1. Stop conditions of the timer: Pn sample receives the “CONNECT CONF” sent by P0 instance. or the channel request fails and the new channel receives RADIO UNAVAILABLE. B. or the “CONNECT FAIL” when P0 failed to establish link. Start conditions of the timer: The new channel sends RADIO APPLY. the new channel receives RAIO PROCEEDING. Value range: 10 ~50. B. Start conditions of the timer: The Pn instance sends ESTABLISHING to the P0 instance.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 50 51 … 120 5.0s Default: 70 18)zxgT2: The protection time for applying a channel Description: The protection time for applying a channel A. Page 218 of 516 . Stop conditions of the timer: Channel request succeeds and the new channel receives RADIO AVAILABLE. the protection time to wait for the central module’s link establishment response.1s … Time length 5.0s Setting: T2 > T3103 Default: 30 19) zxgT3: The protection time for link establishment response Description: In case of instant assignment. See Table 6-22. Table 6-22 The value range of zxgT2 Value 10 11 … 50 1. or in case of queuing. See Table 6-23.1s … 12. Value range: 50 ~ 650. A. See Table 6-24.0s Setting: T3 > T9105 Default: 120 20) zxgT4 Description: The protection time to wait for the confirmation by P0 to the “HO COM” or “ASS COM” message.0s 5. Timeout: When zxgT5 expires. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives CIPHER MODE COMPLETE from MS. A. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC receives CIPHER MODE COMMAND from MSC. Description: The T5 timer supervises the ciphering mode modify process. Table 6-24 The value range of zxgT5 Value 50 5.1s … Time length 65. Value range: 50 ~ 120. A. zxgT5 stops. zxgT5 starts. B.0s Time length Page 219 of 516 . Stop conditions of the timer: Pn receives the HO COM or ASS COM acknowledgement from P0. Start conditions of the timer: After Pn receives the “HO COM” or “ASS COM” message of MS and forwards it to P0.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-23 The value range of zxgT3 Value 50 51 … 650 5. Value range: 50 ~ 650 Default: 30 21) zxgT5: Supervises the ciphering mode modify process. C. BSSAP CIPHER MODE REJECT is sent to MSC. B. 1s … Time length 30. Table 6-26 The value range of zxgT7 Page 220 of 516 . Description: The protection time to wait for P0 to respond to the assignment or handover complete message. Value range: 1 ~ 200.0s 1. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives “ESTABLISH CONFIRM” message from BTS. Value range: 10 ~ 300.0s Default: 100 23) zxgT7: The protection time to wait for P0 to respond to the assignment or handover complete message.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 51 … 120 5.1s … 12. the “BSSMAP SAPI”n” REJECT” message will be sent to MSC.0s Default: 100 22) zxgT6: Supervises the SAPI3 link establishment. Table 6-25 The value range of zxgT6 Value 10 11 … 300 1. See Table 6-25. A. zxgT6 stops. Timeout: When the zxgT6 timer expires. A. See Table 6-26. Stop conditions of the timer: Pn receives HO CMD from P0. C. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC receives the “DTAP (SAPI=3)” message from MSC but no SAPI3 link. B. zxgT7 starts. Description: The zxgT6 timer supervises the SAPI3 link establishment. B. the zxgT6 timer starts. Start conditions of the timer: After the Pn instance sends HO ROD to the P0 instance. A. See Table 6-27. Table 6-28 Value The value range of zxgT10 Time length Page 221 of 516 .1s 0.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 1 2 … 200 0. Table 6-27 The value range of zxgT9 Value 10 11 … 50 1.2s … Time length 20. See Table 6-28. Description: The protection time for channel request queuing.0s Default: 20 26) zxgT10: The protection time for channel request queuing. Value range: 50 ~ 200. Time length 5. Value range: 10 ~ 50. Value range: 1 ~ 650 Default: 100 25) zxgT9 Description: The protection time for the RF channel release.0s 1. Stop conditions of the timer: Pn instance receives the response from BTS.0s Default: 100 24) zxgT8 Description: External handover protection time.1s …. B. Start conditions of the timer: Pn instance sends RF CHL REL to BTS when it is released. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 50 51 … 200 5. Default: 130 27) zxgT11: Assignment queue period Description: The maximum allowed queuing time for assignment attempts. it will be periodically started.1s … 20. A. Description: The interval for periodical status confirmation. And then.0s 5. Table 6-29 Value 1 2 … 150 other values 0. the timer is started for the first time. B. calculated from the assignment request. Value range: 100 ~ 18000 Default: 200 29) zxgT13: Supervises the mode modify procedure of BTS and MS. Page 222 of 516 . Value range: 1 ~ 150.1s 0. See Table 6-29. Default: 60 28) zxgT12: The interval for periodical status confirmation.2s … The value range of zxgT11 Time length 15s Reserved. Description: The zxgT13 timer supervises the mode modification process of BTS and MS.0s Setting: T10 > T3109 + T3111 + T9103 or T10 > T11 /Tqho should be ensured in case queuing is allowed. Start conditions of the timer: After Pn receives the “CONNECT CONF” from P0 and decides to perform the peer activity checking. Stop conditions of the timer: Pn instance receives the release message. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 A. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives “MODE MODIFY ACK/NACK” message from BTS and the “CHANNEL MODE MODIFY” message from MS.0s Default: 100 30) zxgT14 Description: The time from the “Ass/Ho Com” sent to the “Ass/Ho Com Ack” received by the target instance. C.0s 5. Description: The available time to wait for resources by the target instance in the case of forced release. A. Page 223 of 516 . Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends the “MODE MODIFY” message to BTS and sends the “CHANNEL MODE MODIFY” message to MS. See Table 6-30. Start conditions of the timer: The target instance decides forced release and sends PREEMPT APPLY to the object to be disconnected.. Value range: 50 ~ 120 Default: 60 31) zxgT15: The available time to wait for resources by the target instance in the case of forced release. Timeout: When zxgT3 timer expires. Value range: 1 ~ 200. B. B. indicating that the resources are available. See Table 6-31. Value range: 60 ~ 120.1s … The value range of zxgT13 Time length 12. Table 6-30 Value 50 51 … 120 5. a “BSSMAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE” message is sent to MSC.Stop conditions of the timer: The target instance receives RESOURCE AVAILABLE from the disconnected object. 1) Default: 60 32) zxgT16: The waiting time for directed retry.0s Setting: T15 > T3109 (10) + T3111 (0.0s 6. Value range: 1 ~ 150. Value range: 20 ~ 60. Table 6-32 Value 20 21 … 60 other values 2s 2. See Table 6-33.1s … The value range of zxgT16 Duration represented 6s Reserved. Table 6-33 The value range of msTqho Value 1 2 … 150 15s 0.2s Time length Page 224 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-31 Value 60 61 … 120 6. Description: The waiting time for directed retry. See Table 6-32.1s 0.1s … The value range of zxgT15 Time length 12. calculated from the handover request. Default: 20 33) rmsTaho: The handover queuing period Description: The maximum allowed queuing time for handover attempt. it will receive the “HO REJECT” message from MSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 other values Reserved. and notify this in the system information to MS. This clock is used together with zxgmT11 to modify the “ACCESS CONTROL” parameter configured in the cell. Value range: 1 ~ 65535. therefore to achieve flow control. Description: The external handover protection time. Default: 60 34) zxgmT7: The external handover protection time.zxgmT7 < T7.1s 0. The set value of the clock must be less than zxgmT12. and notify this in the system information to MS. Table 6-34 The value range of zxgmT7 Value 1 2 … 65535 6553. therefore to realize flow control. After BSS requests for external handover. This clock is used together with zxgmT12 to modify the “ACCESS CONTROL” parameter configured in the cell.2s Duration represented Setting: 100 by default. See Table 6-34.5s 0. 35) zxgmT11 Description: A clock that is adopted when flow control is applied due to the cell overload. The procedure for the two clocks to control the cell traffic is as follows: When the network side receives the overload message for the first time. BSS must wait for some time (zxgmT7) before it can receive other commands related to handover. The set value of the clock must be greater than zxgmT11. Value range: 50 ~ 200 Default: 100 36) zxgmT12 Description: A clock that is adopted when flow control is performed due to the cell overload. the system lowers the traffic by one Page 225 of 516 . If the “OVERLOAD” message is received between zxgmT11 and zxgmT12. the micro cell in the same layer of the neighboring cell can be used as the candidate cell. the flow will be decreased by another level and the zxgmT11 and zxgmT12 will be restarted. and then. See Table 6-35. the related timer will be started. Only when the timer expires. Table 6-35 The value range of Tmirco Value Time length Page 226 of 516 . one level of flow will be increased. 6-7: BTS BSC overload zxgmT11 overload zxgmT12 overload Fig. the fast moving mobiles staying in the micro cell layer can be avoided. Value range: 0 ~ 65535. it is not allowed to hand over to the neighboring cells in the same layer (any algorithm). In this way. and before the timer expires. a delay time length value is required (the timer value). When a call enters a micro cell. The “OVERLOAD” message occurring during zxgmT11 will be ignored.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 level and starts zxgmT11 and zxgmT12. zxgmT12 will be restarted. The illustration for the two clocks that control cell flow is as shown in Fig. If zxgmT12 still does not receive the “OVERLOAD” message after expiry of zxgmT12. 6-7 The illustration for the two clocks to control the cell flow Value range: 100 ~ 300 Default: 150 37) Tmicro: The delay timer for micro-micro handover Description: In the micro-micro handover control. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “HANDOVER COMMAND” Page 227 of 516 .1s 1. BSC will send the “CHANNEL RELEASE” message to BTS. C. Stop conditions of the timer: When “ESTABLISH INDICATION” message is received from MS.2s … Duration represented 5s Reserved. T3101 stops. 38) T6101: The immediate assignment period. A. Default: 30 39) T3103: Source cell handover period Description: The T3101 timer supervises the internal handover process of BSC. T3101 starts. Timeout: When the T3101 timer expires. Table 6-36 The value range of T3101 Value 10 11 12 … 50 other values 1s 1.5s 0s 0. See Table 6-36. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 0 1 … 65535 6553. B. A. Description: T3101 supervises the immediate assignment process. Value range: 10 ~ 50.1s Default: 100 Setting: The setting of this parameter is related to the standard that is used to measure the average size of the micro cell and the moving speed of the mobile. 7s … Duration represented 10s Reserved.5s 3. When BSC receives the “RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE” message or “RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT FAILURE” message. B. T3103 shall be less than T10. Setting: When setting this timer. a “CLEAR REQUEST” message will be sent to MSC. B. See Table 6-37. T3107 starts. the timer T3107 stops. a “CLEAR REQUEST” message will be sent to MSC. for the assignment procedure. See Table 6-38. Table 6-37 The value range of T3103 Value 35 36 37 … 100 other values 3. Page 228 of 516 .6s 3. the old and new channels will be released. Value range: 35 ~ 100.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 message to MSC. the timer T3103 stops. for intra-cell handover procedure. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT COMMAND” message to MS. Timeout: When the timer T3103 expires. C. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives the “HANDOVER COMPLETE” message on a new channel or the “HANDOVER FAILURE” message on the old channel from MS. Timeout: When T3107 expires. Default: 60 40) T3107: Assignment period Description: T3107 is used to supervise the assignment process and the internal handover of a cell (< T10). T3103 starts. and the new channel will be released. the corresponding MS connection will be cleared. C. Value range: 35 ~ 100. and a “BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE” message will be sent to MSC. A. C. A.7s Duration represented Setting: When setting this timer.1s 8.2s Duration represented Default: 120 Page 229 of 516 . Description: T3109 supervises the channel release process. T3107 shall be less than T10. Value range: 80 ~ 150. T3109 starts. B.5s 3. Default: 60 41) T3109: Channel release period. 3. Stop conditions of the timer: When BSC receives the “RELEASE INDICATION” message from BTS (when BTS receives DISC frame from MS). Table 6-39 The value range of T3109 Value 80 81 82 … 150 other values 15s Reserved. See Table 6-39. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC sends “RIL3_RR CHANNEL RELEASE” message to MS. the timer T3109 stops.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-38 The value range of T3107 Value 35 36 37 … 100 other values 10s Reserved.6s 3. 8s 8. Timeout: When the T3109 timer expires. BSC will send the “RF CHANNEL RELEASE” message to BTS. 2 Duration represented Default: 1 43) Tbsic: Tbsic: BSIC decode period Description: The “Tbsic” parameter defines a period. The radio channel will be released and deactivated after the T3111 timer expires. thus. T3111 starts. Timeout: When T3111 expires. the “RF CHANNEL RELEASE” message is sent to BTS. a protection time T3111 is set to ensure the radio link layer is disconnected. A.5s Reserved. Start conditions of the timer: When BSC receives “RELEASE INDICATION” message.1 0. See Table 6-40. During this period. Table 6-40 The value range of T3111 Value 1 2 … 5 other values 0. which is calculated from the call establishment or handover complete (inter-cell or intra-cell). MS can decode BSICs that interfere with (neighboring) cells before the handover decision takes place. Value range: 1 ~ 5. Table 6-41 The value range of Tbsic Value 5 10 … 0. 0. See Table 6-41.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 42) T3111: Channel deactivation delay Description: After the Um interface radio link layer is released. it is not allowed to handover to a special TRX. Value range: 5 ~ 640.0s Time length Page 230 of 516 .5s 1. TC/I evaluation is considered as incredible during this period. B. it is in the “OutGoHoing” status. It is in Serving status after CR is sent and CC is received and before any further message is received. it is in the “RadioApplying” status. Value range: 1 ~ 600 Default: 80 Page 231 of 516 . Value range: 50 ~ 1200 Default: 200 47) AisT8 Description: AisT8 is the “OutGoHoing” status protection timer when the HoCmd (sending the “AppHOCmd” to Rms). Value range: 1 ~ 600 Default: 100 45) AisT4 Description: AppRadioApp-AppRadioAvail” (handover from the external). the “RadioApplying” status protection timer. or after the “App Ho Com” message is received at the handover from the external and before the call is cleared. Value range: 1 ~ 600 Default: 100 46) AisT12 Description: Timer for protecting the Serving status. Before sending “App_Ass_Req” and receiving the “App_Ass_Com”.0s Default: 50 44) AisT1 Description: AppAssignReq-AppAssignCom”.ClearCmd is received.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 640 64. After receiving the “A_Ho_Cmd” to start the external handover and before the “A_Clear_Cmd” is received once the handover is successful. After receiving the message “A_Ho_Req” and before receiving the “APP_RADIO_AVAIL”. or after the “App Ass Com” message is received and before the call is cleared. the “Assigning” status protection timer. it is in the “Assigning” status. if it fails to receive the “BVC BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE” message from SGSN in BSSGPT1. “BVC blocking” can be repeated for a maximum of N times. Fig. BSS will first set the BVC status to “Blocked” and discard the uplink service data. 6-8 Configuring BSC (3) 1) BVCBlkMax Description: BSSGP layer parameter. If for N times there is no answer. If the PTP BVC needs to be blocked due to OAM intervention or device faults (disable the blocking and unblocking of signaling BVC). it will repeat the “BVC blocking” procedure. 6-8 for the setting of the GPRS maximum reattempts. BSS will also initiate the “BVC blocking” procedure. then BSC will stop “BVC blocking” and notify OMS of such. If the PTP BVC needs to be Page 232 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 3 2) BVCUBlkMax Description: BSSGP layer parameter. GPRS Max See Fig. N is determined by the maximum reattempts of BVC BLOCK. After sending the “BVC block” message to SGSN. To notify SGSN to stop sending the downlink data. For faults that affect NSE. it will repeat the “BVC reset” procedure. To notify SGSN to start sending the downlink data.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 unblocked due to the OAM intervention or recovery of the device faults (disable the blocking and unblocking of signaling BVC). the “Signaling BVC reset” procedure is initiated. all the “PTP BVC reset” under that NSE must be initiated. After a “signaling BVC reset” is initiated. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 3 4) NSBlkMax Description: NS link layer parameter. 2) lower layer network service entity failure (such as frame relay fault). After sending the “BVC UNBLOCK” message to SGSN. N is determined by the maximum reattempts of BVC UNBLOCK. 4) change of the corresponding relationship between BVC and cell.. if it fails to receive the “BVC UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE” message from SGSN in BSSGPT1. frame relay capability changes from 0kbps to greater than 0kbps). “BVC reset” can be repeated for a maximum of N times. For faults that affect a single BVC. Page 233 of 516 . BSS will first set the BVC status to “Unblocked”. 3) lower layer network service entity capability update (e. If for N times there is no answer. After sending the “BVC RESET” message to SGSN.g. to keep the initial status consistent between the two BVC sides. BSS will also initiate the “BVC unblocking” procedure. The maximum number of repetitions during BSC blocking. if it fails to receive the “BVC RESET ACKNOWLEDGE” message from SGSN in BSSGPT2. the “PTP BVC reset” procedure is initiated. it will repeat the “BVC unblocking” procedure. N is determined by the maximum reattempts of BVC Reset. then BSC will stop “BVC unblocking” and notify OMS of such. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 3 3) BVCResetMax Description: BSSGP layer parameter. the “Reset BVC” procedure must be initiated. In case of 1} system faults that affect the BVC function in BSS or SGSN (such as restart upon power-on). then BSC will stop “BVC reset” and notify OMS of such. If for N times there is no answer. “BVC unblocking” can be repeated for a maximum of N times. When BSC sends the “NS BLOCK” message to SGSN. When the Class B GPRS MS is about to initiate the voice service. The “NS BLOCK” message can be repeated for a maximum of N times. After BSC sends the “NS Alive” message to SGSN. The “NS UNBLOCK” message can be repeated for a maximum of N times. Value range: 0 ~ 20 Setting: 7) SuspendMax Description: BSSGP layer parameter. If for N times there is still no answer. N is determined by the maximum reattempts of NS BLOCK. the whole blocking process shall be repeated. then BSC will stop the UNBLOCK procedure and notify OMS of such. After BSC sends the “NS UNBLOCK” message to SGSN. N is determined by the maximum reattempts of NS UNBLOCK. Value range: 0 ~ 10 Setting: 3 5) NSUnBlkMax Description: NS link layer parameter. If for N times there is still no answer. The “NS Alive” message can be repeated for a maximum of N times. If for N times there is still no answer.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 if the “NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE” message sent by SGNS has not been received in the specified NS_T1 time. Value range: 0 ~ 10 Setting: 3 6) NSAliveMax Description: Maximum number of repetitions of the BSC Alive procedure. if it fails to receive the “NS Alive ACKNOWLEDGE” message from SGSN in the time specified by the timer NS_T4. the whole UNBLOCK procedure shall be repeated. then BSC will stop the Alive procedure and notify OMS of such. if it fails to receive the “NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE” message from SGSN in the time specified by the timer NS_T1. the MS will first send a “SUSPEND” message to Page 234 of 516 . N is determined by the maximum reattempts of NS Alive. The maximum number of repetitions during BSC unblocking. then BSC will stop the BLOCK procedure and notify OMS of such. the whole Alive procedure shall be repeated. When MS is establishing the uplink/downlink TBF. BSS can adopt one of the following two policies: 1} Notify MS to perform “Routing Area Update”. if it fails to receive the “SUSPEND ACK/NACK” message from SGSN in BSSGPT3. Value range: 0~255 Setting: 3 9) UpdateMax Description: BSSGP layer parameter. In case of “Routing Area Update”. If for N times there is no answer. if it fails to receive the “RADIO ACCESS Page 235 of 516 . then BSC will stop “Resume” and notify OMS of such. In case of Resume (tailored to the MS in packet transmission status). it will repeat the “Resume” procedure. When the “GPRS-attached” MS is not in the dedicated mode. “Suspend” procedure can be repeated for a maximum of N times. If BSS does not have that information yet. then BSC will stop “Suspend” and notify OMS of such. “Resume” procedure can be repeated for a maximum of N times. then MS and SGSN will directly negotiate “GMM status” and BSS need not do any thing. After sending the “SUSPEND” message to SGSN.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the BSS over SDCCH. After sending the “RESUME” message to SGSN. N is determined by the maximum Resume reattempts. 2} Notify SGSN to “Resume” the GPRS service. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 3 8) ResumeMax Description: BSSGP layer parameter. N is determined by the maximum Suspend reattempts. it will repeat the “Suspend” procedure. If for N times there is no answer. it initiates the “Suspend” procedure to SGSN for the purpose of notifying SGSN to stop sending “PS paging” and “downlink packet data”. to assign the appropriate packet channel to the MSs that have different access capabilities. BSS will initiate the “Resume” procedure to SGSN for the purpose of notifying SGSN to start the normal packet downlink transmission action. BSS needs to know the radio access capability of that MS. after BSS receives it. then it can obtain that information from SGSN by the “Radio Access Capabilities Update” procedure. After sending the “RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES UPDATE” message to SGSN. if it fails to receive the “RESUME ACK/NACK” message from SGSN in BSSGPT4. 6-9 Configuring BSC (4) 1) BSSGP T1 “BVC block/unblock” reattempt time Description: Timer that monitors the BSSGP block/unblock procedure. The “Radio Access Capabilities Update” procedure can be repeated for a maximum of N times. For N times if there is still no answer. Page 236 of 516 . GPRS Timer See Fig. then the “BVC block/unblock” procedure shall be repeated. N is determined by the maximum Update reattempts. then BSC will stop the “Radio Access Capabilities Update” procedure and notify OMS of such. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 3 4. Fig. The interval between them is Bssgp T1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 CAPABILITIES UPDATE ACK/NACK” message from SGSN in BSSGP T5. Parameter used by the global process in the central module MP. 6-9 for the BSC GPRS Timer setting. If SGSN does not return “BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACK/NACK” message. BSS will initiate the “BVC block/unblock” procedure. then the procedure shall be repeated. If a point-to-point BVC block/unblock is required due to OAM intervention or device faults. Parameter used by the global process in the central module MP. After BSS receives the “SUSPEND” message from MS. it will notify the network to “Suspend” the packet service. If the BVC (including PTP BVC and signaling BVC) reset is required due to some reasons. If SGSN does not return “RESUME ACK/NACK” message. then the “Resume” procedure shall be repeated.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: 10 ~ 300 (100ms) Setting: 30 2) BSSGP T2 “BVC Reset” reattempt time Description: Timer that monitors the reset procedure of BSSGP. it will initiate the “Suspend SGSN” procedure. The interval between them is Bssgp T3. then the “BVC Reset” procedure shall be repeated. Parameter used by the service process in the peripheral module MP. The interval between them is Bssgp T4. Value range: 1 ~ 100 (100ms) Setting: 30 4) BSSGP T4 “Resume” reattempt time Description: Timer that monitors the Resume procedure of BSSGP. Value range: 10 ~ 1200 (100ms) Setting: 30 3) BSSGP T3 “Suspend” reattempt time Description: Timer that monitors the Suspend procedure of BSSGP. When the “GPRS-attached” MS is not in the dedicated mode and the BSS uses “Notify SGSN to resume GPRS service” policy. BSS will initiate the “Resume” procedure to SGSN. Value range: 1 ~ 100 (100ms) Setting: 30 Page 237 of 516 . Parameter used by the service process in the peripheral module MP. When the Class B MS is ready to perform the voice service. BSS will initiate “BVC Reset” procedure. then the “Suspend SGSN” procedure shall be repeated. If SGSN does not return “SUSPEND ACK/NACK” message. The interval between them is Bssgp T2. If SGSN does not return “BVC RESET ACK/NACK” message. 10) Description: The maximum attempt period of Reset. After BSS initiates “RA_CAPABILITY” procedure to SGSN. Value range: 1 ~ 120s Setting: 60 8) NS T3 Description: The test period of NS-VC. Parameter used by the service process in the peripheral module MP. The interval between them is Bssgp T5. then the “Radio Access Capability Update” procedure shall be repeated. Value range: 1 ~ 120s Setting: 60 7) NS T2 Description: Timer that monitors the reset procedure at the NS layer. Value range: 3s Setting: 3s by default. Value range: 10 ~ 300 (100ms) Setting: 30 6) NS T1 Description: Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure at the NS layer.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 5) BSSGP T5 “Radio Access Capabilities Update” reattempt time Description: Timer that monitors the RA_CAPABILITY procedure of BSSGP. Value range: 3 minutes Page 238 of 516 NS T5 (not use . Value range: 1 ~ 60s Setting: 30 9) NS T4 Description: Timer that monitors the alive procedure of the NSVC. if SGSN does not return the “RA_CAPABILITY UPDATE ACK/NACK” message. if the timer N3101 or N3103 expires. the network releases TBF. C. Timeout: USF and TFI resources are released. B. During the packet downlink transmission. the network will send a RLC data block whose Final Block Identifier (FBI) field is 1 and which includes effective RRBP field to initialize the release of the downlink TBF. i. 2) In unacknowledged mode. When T3169 expires. 1) In acknowledged mode. the network releases TBF also. 5 seconds. Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms) Setting: 500 by default. then T3191 is stopped and T3193 is started. the network releases TBF. Stop conditions of the timer: None. 12) T3191 Description: BRP’s timer at the RLC/MAC layer. Page 239 of 516 . if the BSN of the RLC data block to be transmitted is the maximum (i. When T3191 expires. If the network receives the “PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK” message before T3191 expires and is required to re-transmit it.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Setting: 3*60s by default.. For each RLC data block received whose FBI is 1 and which includes effective RRBP field. 11) T3169 Description: BRP’s timer at the RLC/MAC layer. Start conditions of the timer: When N3101 = N3101_MAX or N3103 = N3103_MAX. When T3191 expires. If re-transmission is not required.e. then T3191 is stopped and the required RLC data block is re-transmitted. the final downlink data block). When T3191 expires. then T3191 is stopped and T3193 is started. At this time the network starts the timer T3191. A. If the network receives the “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE” message before T3191 expires. the network releases TBF also. During the packet uplink transmission. the MS should send the “PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK” message whose FAI field is 1 in the uplink block specified by the RRBP field.e. BSS will start the timer T3169. the MS should send the “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE” message in the uplink block specified by the RRBP field.. the TFI and USF resources are released for use by the network. When T3193 expires. Other GPRS Property See Fig. 6-10 for other properties setting of BSC GPRS.. i. C. Page 240 of 516 . Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms) Setting: 51. Timeout: TFI is released. A. The value of this parameter needs to be greater than T3192 for ensuring the uniqueness of TFI of MS at one moment. see the description of the timer T3191. i. C. Stop conditions of the timer: None.e.. 5 seconds. B. 14) T3195 Description: BRP’s timer at the RLC/MAC layer.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms) Setting: 500 by default. the TFI resource is available again for use by the network. 13) T3193 Description: BRP’s timer at the RLC/MAC layer. For details. Used for protection at the release of TBF during the packet downlink transmission. A. Start conditions of the timer: When the final “PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK” or “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE” message is received. BSS will start the timer T3195. B. if the timer N3105 expires. Start conditions of the timer: N3105 = N3105_MAX. Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms) Setting: 500 by default. 5 seconds.e. Protection time of TBF when the radio link failure or the cell change leads to MS’s failure to respond. When T3195 expires. 5. Stop conditions of the timer: When the network has established a new downlink TBF. During the packet downlink transmission. Timeout: TFI is released. CELL Threshold of the Bssgp Flow Control Description: This parameter is the trigger threshold for “BVC flow control”. then the “BVC flow control” is initiated. Page 241 of 516 . BSS provides the control parameter and SGSN executes it to avoid the situation that part of the LLC data is discarded due to the timeout caused by packet channel busy in BVC (excess LLS frames buffered) and that the new downlink LLC data is discarded due to the limited memory resources (LLC frame buffer overflow). The BVC flow control is conducted in the Gb interface between SGSN and BSS in the downlink only. The BSSGP process on the BSS side periodically (long or short) counts the current leakage ratio of BVC. If the long count timer overflows. the SGSN confirmation is also required. Value range: 1 ~ 100 (%) Setting: 80 2) MS Threshold of the Bssgp Flow Control Description: This parameter is the trigger threshold for “MS flow control”. If the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than CellFcThs. 6-10 Configuring BSC (5) A. then the “BVC flow control” procedure is initiated unconditionally.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. If the short count timer overflows and the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than CellFcThs. which also needs the SGSN confirmation. In practice. then the “MS flow control” procedure is initiated unconditionally. it needs to be confirmed by SGSN. To provide reference to the BVC flow control at the SGSN side. which also needs the SGSN confirmation. if the short measurement timer overflows. i. If the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than MsFcThs. Value range: 1 ~ 100 (%) Setting: 80 3) CELL Trigger Period of the Bssgp Flow Control Description: This parameter is the BVC leakage ratio measurement period at the “BVC flow control” procedure.e. BSS provides the control parameter and SGSN executes it to avoid the situation that part of the LLC data is discarded due to the timeout caused by packet channel busy in MS (excessive LLS frames buffered) and that the new downlink LLC data is discarded due to the limited memory resources (LLC frame buffer overflow).. In practice. BVC long measurement period. In the OMCR (V2) system. and the difference of the leakage ratio between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. the BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically measures the current BVC leakage ratio. If the short count timer overflows and the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than MsFcThs. Page 242 of 516 . MS long duration measurement period. i.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The MS flow control is conducted in the Gb interface between SGSN and BSS in the downlink only. the “BVC flow control” procedure is initiated unconditionally.e. then the “BVC flow control” procedure is also initiated. Value range: 0 ~ 0xffff (10ms) Setting: 3000 4) MS Trigger Period of the Bssgp Flow Control Description: This parameter is the MS leakage ratio measurement period at the “MS flow control” procedure.. then the “MS flow control” is initiated. if the difference of the leakage ratios between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. BVC short measurement period is equal to BVC long measurement period divided by 3. When the long measurement timer overflows. the SGSN confirmation is also required. which also needs to be confirmed by SGSN. If the long count timer overflows. The BSSGP process on the BSS side periodically (long or short) counts the current leakage ratio of MS. the BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically measures the current leakage ratio of each MS. if the network receives the correct data from the specified uplink block. For a USF. and the difference of the leakage ratio between the two times exceeds MsFcThs. then it will send the “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE” message in the block specified by the RRBP and release TBF. the TFI and USF resources are available again for use by the network. it needs to be confirmed by SGSN. In the OMCR (V2) system. then the “MS flow control” procedure is initiated. which also needs to be confirmed by SGSN.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 To provide reference to the flow control at the SGSN side. then timer T3169 is started. if the difference of the leakage ratios between the two times exceeds MsFcThs. MS short measurement period is equal to MS long measurement period divided by 3. When the long measurement timer overflows. The header of the RLC/MAC control block contains a valid RRBP field. And the counter N3103 is cleared. if the network detects that the uplink TBF ends (CV=0 and V(Q)=V(R) ) and that all the RLC data blocks have been received. During the packet uplink transmission. When T3169 expires. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 10 6) N3103: Number of “Packet Uplink ACK/NACK” reattempts Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. the network will send a “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message and mark the Final Acknowledgement Identifier (FAI) as 1. then the timer N3101 is cleared for that TBF. During the packet uplink transmission. the “MS flow control” procedure is initiated unconditionally. If the network fails to receive the Page 243 of 516 . if the short measurement timer overflows. BSS will specify USF (corresponding to one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms) Setting: 3000 5) N3101: Maximum allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data blocks Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. If the MS receives the “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message whose FAI is 1 from the network side. if the number of losses in the specified uplink block exceeds N3101. 1 2 3 4 CS-1 CS-2 CS-3 CS-4 Setting: 1 Page 244 of 516 . If the value of N3103 exceeds the limiting N3103max. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 10 7) N3105: Allowed maximum number of continuous losses of the uplink “RLC/MAC CONTROL” message Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. When T3195 expires. the TFI and USF resources are available again for use by the network. if the number of consecutive losses of the “RLC/MAC CONTROL” message in the specified uplink block exceeds N3105max. Value range: See Table 6-42. but the coding mode may vary dynamically between CS-2 and CS-1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE” message in the radio block specified by the RRBP field. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 10 8) MS CSMode Description: This parameter refers to the channel coding mode. Table 6-42 The value range of “MS CSMode” Value 0 Coding mode CS-2 by default. During the packet downlink transmission. For a TBF. When T3169 expires. BSS will set RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block at a certain interval to notify MS to send the “RLC/MAC CONTROL” message in the corresponding uplink block. then the value of the counter N3103 is incremented and the “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message is retransmitted. the TFI resource is available for use by the network. the network will start T3169. then the timer T3195 is started. . to reach the maximum radio throughput. the GPRS data block may use the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes. the network will select the coding mode dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality. You can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each TBF.4kbps. 13. Good radio transmission quality means that the probability of retransmitting the errored radio blocks is small.e. You can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each TBF.4kbps. the number of consecutive losses of the data blocks in the coding mode CSn (2 n 4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n-2]%. At this time the coding mode that carries large data volume (i. 15. At the transmission of the GRPR data. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Page 245 of 516 . whose data rates are 9. the network will select the coding mode dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality.05kbps. and 21.4kbps. 13.6kbps. Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel. Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel.e. and 21.6kbps.05kbps. low level coding mode) should be used. At the transmission of the GRPR data.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 9) Cn Level: for determining the increase of the level of the coding mode Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. respectively. whose data rates are 9.. the coding level is increased by one level. When the number of data blocks transmitted consecutively and correctly in the coding mode CSn (1 n 3) for TBF (uplink and downlink) exceeds the predefined parameter Cn[n-1].4kbps respectively. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 10 10) Nn Level: for determining the decrease of the level of the coding mode Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. the coding mode with higher anti-interference capability (i. to reach the maximum radio throughput. the coding level is decreased by one. high level coding mode) can be used. the GPRS data block may use the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes. 15. The low level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput. The low level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput. If of the Nn[n-2] data blocks transmitted. When the radio transmission quality is poor. Value range: 1 ~ 20ms Setting: 10ms 13) Fail Report Period (52 Frames) Description: This parameter is the report period for the channel failure ratio (52 multiframes) Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 10 14) Description: This parameter is used by the database in the peripheral module MP. 15. You can choose different coding modes for each timeslot or even each TBF. the GPRS data block may use the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes. The allocation of the uplink and downlink PS radio resources of Page 246 of 516 PS Overload Th .e. The NSVC delay is the basis for flow control in frame relay.6kbps.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Setting: 20 11) Xn Level: threshold for determining the decrease of the level of the coding mode Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP. the network will select the coding mode dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality. NSVC is an end-to-end concept. It is configured in the background subject to the actual circumstances. When the radio transmission quality is poor. low level coding mode) should be used. The low level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data throughput. At the transmission of the GRPR data.4kbps. the coding mode with higher anti-interference capability (i. whose data rates are 9. and 21.4kbps. to reach the maximum radio throughput. Value range: 0 ~ 100 (%) Setting: 80 12) NSVC Delay Description: This is a NS link layer parameter. 13. respectively. Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel. the coding level is decreased by one. If of the Nn[n-2] data blocks transmitted. the number of consecutive losses of the data blocks in the coding mode CSn (2 n 4) for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn[n-2]%.05kbps.. If the bearing rate of that packet channel has exceeded that threshold. the second step allocates the RLC/MAC data block resources in each channel. the PDCH channel. the resource rate is less than DefRate. the database will not take the extra timeslot capability of the MS into account but allocate a single PS channel to it for utilizing the channel resources effectively. Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (100bps) Setting: 65535 15) Description: This parameter is used by the database in the peripheral module MP. it is set in “Channel busy” state. Also. The succeeding packet access will not take that channel into account. This is carried out by the database in the MP. At the initial access of the MS (especially the first step (channel request) of the two-stage access procedure). during the TBF establishment. hence avoiding the occurrence of congestion from the timeslot level. it may not have the resource request information. that is.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the GPRS takes two steps: The first step allocates the timeslot. This is implemented by the packet control module. The network side will allocate the PS channel at the default rate. In MP. Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (100bps) Setting: 10 Default Access Page 247 of 516 . to prevent one PS channel from being used infinitely. the system sets a “Maximum bearing rate” threshold for the packet channel. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. Description: Used to identify the connection management units. Fig. PCM Circuit No.1. Value range: 1 ~ 384.2 Creating PCM circuit Select “BSS” node in the browse tree of the main interface shown in Fig. 6-2 and right click to select “Configure PCM Circuits” in the pop-up menu. The configuration of standby equipment can point to the related standby equipment via the assignment of this attribute value. Relevant PCM Equipment Description: Used to indicate the relationship between the management functional entity and the physical equipment entity that implements the specific function. 6-11. Value range: Complex unit number –unit number –PCM number relationship between Page 248 of 516 . as illustrated in Fig.2. 2. 6-11 Configure PCM circuits 1. 1. The LAPD link object is associated with one PCM time slot via the AbisSigChannel attribute. Value range: 0 ~ 31 4. Description: Used to define the logic LAPD connection on the physical signaling link of the Abis interface. 6-12. 6-12 Configure the LAPD link 1. PCM No. Local Terminal Identity (Tei) Page 249 of 516 . (Pcm No. as illustrated in Fig. Fig.2. Value range: 1 ~ 2304 2.) Description: This parameter represents the PCM circuit number of the LAPD signaling link on the Abis interface.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. Value range: 1 ~ 384 3. LAPD Link No.3 Creating LAPD link Select “BSS” node in the browse tree of the main interface shown in Fig. Ts No. Description: This parameter represents the PCM time slot of the LAPD signaling link on the Abis interface. Here O&M and Telecom signaling are included. 6-2 and right click to select “Configure LAPD Link” in the pop-up menu. Value range: 0 ~ 4 6. Relation Physical Site DN: The DN of the physical site of the local BSS system: BssId-SiteId. Page 250 of 516 . One SITE can manage three cells at most. BTS Index: the SITE number in the BSC it belongs to. 6-13. BTS Username Alias: The name of the SITE in Chinese or symbols. 5. Resource Location Information: Description of the place where the BTS is located. 6-13 Configure the base station To create a logic site is to create a base station. 2. 3.1. Module No. 6-2 and right click to select “Create Logical Site” in the pop-up menu. Fig. as illustrated in Fig.4 Configuring the base station Select “BSS” in the browse tree of the main interface shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: Local terminal number. Where: 1.: The Pn module number (radio module number) corresponding to the cell. 4.2. The former is shown in Fig.2. 6-16.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. 6-14 Configure External Cell – Basic Property (GSM) Page 251 of 516 . 6-14 for GSM. Site Operation Preserve Channel: The logical Lapdlink corresponding to the site.1. For GPRS there are two tabs: Basic Property and GPRS Property.5 Creating an external cell Select “BSS” in the browse tree of the main interface shown in Fig. 6-15 and the later in Fig. 6. 6-2 and right click to select “Create External Cell” in the pop-up menu. as illustrated in Fig. Fig. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-15 Configure External Cell – Basic Property (GPRS) Page 252 of 516 . Mobile Network Code (MNC) Page 253 of 516 . BCCH ARFCN: Description: The ARFCN of BCCH carrier frequency of cells. Value range: 0 ~ 1023 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Value range: 0 ~ 999 Default: 460 (the MCC of China) 3. used to uniquely identify the home country of mobile subscribers (or systems). Mobile Country Code (MCC) Description: MCC consists of three decimal digits. 6-16 Configure External Cell – GPRS Property (GPRS) 1. cell ID (CI). One location area contains multiple cells. The parameter related to NCC is the “NccPermitted” parameter of the cell.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: MNC consists of two decimal digits. Page 254 of 516 . Normally. MS is disabled to measure the cell information of the related operators.e. At present. Generally. China has two GSM networks. BSIC = NCC + BCC. Value range: 0 ~ 99 Setting: If a country has more than one GSM public land mobile networks. MNC is uniformly allocated by the national telecom administration department. neighboring operators should have different NCCs. each network should have a different MNC. that is. and the same operator can have one or more MNCs (depending on the service scale offered). Network Color Code (NCC) Description: NCC is one of the parts to compose the base station ID code (BSIC). and the location code is used to identify each location area. but different operators cannot share the same MNC. China Mobile and China Unicom with the MNCs being 00 and 01 respectively. By prohibiting MS to report relative NCC in the cell. the coverage of each GSM PLMN can be divided into many location areas. i. network operators should allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area. Value range: 0x0000 ~ 0xFFFF 6. LAC is one of the parts to compose the LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). Value range: 0x0001 ~ 0xFFFE (0xFFFE cannot be used) 5. NCC is used to enable mobile stations to distinguish adjacent and different GSM PLMN cells. which uniquely identifies a specific GSM PLMN network in a country (decided by MCC). Location Area Code (LAC) Description: To determine the location of the mobile station. Default: 00 4. Cell ID (CI) Description: To uniquely indicate each cell in the GSM PLMN. BCC is one of the network identification parameters.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Actually. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: Normally. Table 6-43 The handover PBGT threshold and the value range Value represented -24dB -23dB Handover PBGT threshold 0 1 Page 255 of 516 . then handover should occur. 8. after a series of average values obtained. The handover reason is to find a more suitable cell. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: It should be ensured that neighboring or adjacent cells using the same BCCH carrier frequency have different BSICs. NCC occupies three bits. the GSM specifications stipulate that the TSC (Training Sequence Code) of broadcasting channel of the cell be equal to cell BCC. BCC is used to enable mobile stations to distinguish adjacent cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same GSM PLMN. the decision procedure is as follows: If the PBGT value of a neighboring cell is greater than the threshold value of that cell. neighboring GSM PLMN should select different NCCs. Value range: See Table 6-43. In addition. handover decision can be performed. BSIC = NCC + BCC. IF the PBGT value of a neighboring cell is also a factor for the handover. This parameter is the threshold that must be used at the handover decision when the adjacent cell wants to hand over to the cell via PBGT. Handover PBGT Threshold Description: According to GSM specifications. 7. Normally. NCC is one of the network identification parameters.e. i. BS Color Code (BCC) Description: BCC is one of the parts to compose the base station ID code (BSIC). BCC occupies three bits. Value range: See Table 6-45. handover decision can be made. Handover Quality Threshold Description: According to GSM specifications. adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced according to the following principle: This parameter is the threshold that must be used during the handover decision when the adjacent cell wants to hand over to the cell via signal intensity. Handover Level Threshold Description: According to GSM specifications. At the time of handover because of level. adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced according to the following principle: This parameter is the threshold that must be used during the handover decision when the adjacent cell wants to hand over to the cell via signal quality. Table 6-45 The handover quality threshold and value range Page 256 of 516 . handover decision can be performed. At the time of handover because of quality. after a series of average values obtained.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 … 47 48 23dB 24dB Default: 30 9. Value range: See Table 6-44. Table 6-44 The handover level threshold and value range Handover Level Threshold 0 1 … 47 48 23dB 24dB -24dB -23dB Value represented Default: 24 10. after a series of average values obtained. and PSI3 messages and in the PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. In case of MS cell reselection in attach state. the GPRS system further divides the location area to several routing areas that are identified by RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC). Setting: Determined by the network operator after the planning. SI6. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN. it pages the MS in that routing area. “Routing area update” procedure is initiated. RAC Description: Like the GSM system using the location area to manage a group of cells. if the RAIs of the old and new cells change. The MS and SGSN in Standby state know the routing area information. It is used by the network to prevent the MS from residing in the cell. thus when the network has the packet data or circuit data to transmit. 13. It specifies the LSA identifier of the cell.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Handover quality threshold 0 1 … 47 48 23dB 24dB -24dB -23dB Value represented Default: 22 11. and SI7 messages and in the PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the local and neighboring cells. SI7. SI6. MS Min RxLev to Access Page 257 of 516 . 1: The cell is used as the SoLSA exclusive access. Value range: 0: The cell is not used as the SoLSA exclusive access. Setting: 0 12. LSA Mark Description: This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the SI4. Support SoLSA MS Access Description: This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the SI4. Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: Uniformly planned by the network operator. 14. it is also one of the discrimination standards (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32) for MS to make the cell selection and the cell reselection. To prevent the MS from accessing the system in case of the low receiving signal level (usually. In addition. Value range: See Table 6-46. or. the “blind spot” will be caused at the cell boundaries. the recommended value should be approximate to the MS receiving sensitivity.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: Parameter used on the MS side.At the network’s preliminary running stage. and from unreasonably wasting the radio sources of network. the communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication after access). that is: MS Min RxLev to Access (the minimum receiving level for allowing the MS to access the network). the cell “RxLevAccessMin” may be increased appropriately. -101dBm~-100dBm) or lower.. This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message of the local cell and PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. the “RxLevAccessMin” value cannot be too large. it is prescribed in the GSM system that the receiving level must be larger than a threshold when the MS needs to access the network. this parameter can be set as 10 (i. which is higher than the MS’s receiving sensitivity -102dBm. This parameter specifies the minimum receiving level for the MS to access the GPRS. When the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage is not a Page 258 of 516 . Table 6-46 Value 0 1 2 … 61 62 63 < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 The value range of “MS Min RxLev to Access” Corresponding level value (dBm) Setting: Generally.e. so as to decrease the C1 and C2 values of the cell and the cell effective coverage range of the cell. and for some cells with traffic overload. it is recommended that the level value not exceed -90dBm. but. When the measure is adopted to balance the traffic. The network controls the MS power by the power command and the MS must use the transmitting power specified by the network as its output power. the power before the MS receives the network power control information is determined by GPRS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH. the parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB). This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message of the local cell and PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. Therefore. Value range: See Table 6-47. 15. If the MS cannot output that power value. Table 6-47 Value The Value range of “MS Max TxPwr Before Network POC” Value MS output power (dBm) GSM1800 29 30 31 0 1 … 36 34 32 30 28 … This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by MS. involving in calculation MS output power (dBm) GSM900 0~2 3 4 5 … 16 17 18 19~31 39 37 35 33 … 11 9 7 5 13 14 15~28 4 2 0 Setting: If this parameter is set too large. When the MS is receiving PBCCH. The transmitting power of MS is controlled by the network during its communication with BTS.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 problem. the default value of this parameter can be set as 12 (-99dBm~-98dBm). the MSs near BTS will interfere the neighboring channels. MS Max TxPwr Before Network POC Description: Parameter used on the MS side. The principle of setting this parameter is as follows: Under the precondition that the MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with a certain access Page 259 of 516 . of C1 and C2 values. then it uses the power that is closest to the specified value as its transmitting power. the MSs at the cell boundary will have low access success rate. If it is too small. you can test it in the experiment mode. The value of this parameter is 5 (for GSM900MS) and 2 (for GSM1800MS). that is. 16. 17. Offset (dB) Description: a parameter used on the MS side.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 success rate. the packet system message may or may not contain it. the cell reselection shall adopt C32 as the standard. In practical applications. Table 6-49 The Value range of “Temporary Offset” Value The related level value represented (dB) Page 260 of 516 . the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. Similar to the C2 standard in GSM. Value range: See Table 6-49. The effective time is determined by the “Penalty Time” parameter. In the GPRS system. the cell reselection adopts C32. It is broadcast to the MS in the Adjacent Cell option of the PSI3 message. It is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message. Temp Offset (dB) Description: Parameter used on the MS side. there is a temporary offset “TempOffset” in the C32 that provides a negative offset. make a dial test at the cell boundary. Table 6-48 The value range of the offset ReselOffset 0 1 … The related level value represented (dB) -52dB -48dB … 31 +48dB Setting: 0 by default. Like the C2 in the GSM system. after the parameter is set. When the parameter value is 0dB. the calculation of the C32 standard also involves a cell reselection offset parameter (ReselOff). and test MS access success rate and access time with different parameter settings so as to determine whether to increase or decrease the value of the parameter. Value range: See Table 6-48. In the GPRS system. the HCS parameters of other cells will also be ignored. to indicate whether the HCS parameters (PrioClass and HCS_THR) exist in the cell. there is a temporary offset “TempOffset” in the C32 that provides a negative offset. Penalty Time (10s) Description: Parameter used on the MS side. The effective time is determined by the “Penalty Time” parameter. They belong to the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) parameters and are broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message. the cell reselection adopts C32. Table 6-50 The Values of “Penalty Time” Value 0 1 … 10s 20s … The related level value represented (dB) 31 320s Setting: 0 by default. It is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message. that is. 19. all the cells use the HCS signal strength threshold of infinity. Like the C2 in the GSM system. HCS parameters Description: Parameter used on the MS side. Value range: 0: Not use HCS parameters. 18. 1: Use HCS parameters. If the local cell does not use HCS parameters. In the GPRS system.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Infinity Setting: Preferably set the same as the offset in the C2 standard of the GSM system. Page 261 of 516 . Value range: See Table 6-50. Page 262 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Setting: 0 by default. It belongs to HCS parameter and is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message of the local cell and neighboring cells. Level Threshold Description: Parameter used on the MS side. It shows the HCS signal strength threshold of the cell. 20. Value range: See Table 6-51. 1. select the “Logical Site” node. It shows the cell reselection status. Priority Description: Parameter used on the MS side. It belongs to the HCS parameter and is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message. select “Create Cell”. 21.3 Cell parameters On the main interface shown in Fig. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: 0 by default. 6-18 in the GPRS environment. 6-2. and right click to pop up two option menus “Modify” and “Create Cell”. 6. Cell Reselection Status Description: This parameter belongs to HCS parameter and is broadcast to the MS in the PSI3 message. 6. Value range: 0: Restrict the cell reselection. Page 263 of 516 . which is as shown in Fig. Then an interface will appear.1 Configuring cell parameters In the pop-up menu. 22. 1: Allow cell reselection. 6-17 in the GSM environment and as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-51 Value 0 1 … The value range of “Level Threshold” Corresponding HCS signal intensity threshold value -110dB -108dB … 63 -48dB Setting: 0 by default. showing the HCS priority of the cell.3.1. 6-17 Configuring a cell (1) – GSM Fig. 6-18 Configuring a cell (1) –GPRS 1. Basic Params 1 Page 264 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Value range: 0x0000 ~ 0xFFFF 5) Network Color Code (NCC) Description: NCC is one of the parts to compose the base station ID code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). (btsid) Description: The logic BTS number inside a SITE. Here. network operators should allocate a unique code for each cell in a location area. which is used to enable mobile stations to Page 265 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1) Cell No. cell ID (CI). Value range: 0x0001 ~ 0xFFFF (0xFFFE cannot be used) 4) Cell ID (CI) Description: To uniquely represent each cell in the GSM PLMN. One location area contains multiple cells. and the location area code is used to identify different location areas. Value range: 1 ~ 3 2) Cell Type Description: The type of the cell. Table 6-52 The value range of the cell type Value 0 1 2 3 4 Umbrella cellular macro-cellular micro-cellular micro-micro-cellular Extension cell (TA>63) Cell Type Default: 1 3) Location Area Code (LAC) Description: To determine the location of the mobile station. LAC is one of the parts to compose LAI (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). Value range: See Table 6-52. the coverage of each GSM PLMN can be divided into many location areas. that is. one BTS is a cell or a sector frequently mentioned in the network planning. if the original cell and destination cell belong to different location areas. NCC occupies three bits. BCC occupies three bits. BCC is used to enable mobile stations to distinguish among neighboring cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and belonging to the same GSM PLMN. MS should initialize a location Page 266 of 516 . NCC is one of the network identification parameters. By disabling MS to report relative NCC in the cell. See Table 6-53. BCC is one of the network identification parameters. Normally. neighboring operators should have different NCCs. MS is disabled to measure the cell information of the related operators. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: It should be ensured that neighboring or adjacent cells using the same BCCH carrier frequency have different BSICs. 6) Bts Color Code (BCC) BCC is one of the parts to compose the base station ID code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). neighboring GSM PLMN should select different NCCs. Table 6-53 The value range of the cell frequency band Value 900 Cell frequency band GSM900: 890 ~915 MHZ (uplink) 935 ~ 960 MHZ (downlink) EXT900 EGSM900: 880 ~915 MHZ (uplink) 925 ~ 960 MHZ (downlink) DCS1800 GSM1800: 1710 ~1785 MHZ (uplink) 1805 ~ 1880 MHZ (downlink) 8) Reselect Hysteresis Power Level (CRH) Description: When MS reselects the cell. Normally. Actually. the GSM specifications stipulate that the TSC (Training Sequence Code) of broadcasting channel of the cell be equal to cell BCC. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: Normally. In addition.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 distinguish adjacent and different GSM PLMN cells. The parameter related to NCC is the “NccPermitted” parameter of the cell. 7) Cell Frequency Band: The system supports three frequency bands. one parameter is set in the GSM specification. When the traffic is enormous in a place and the signaling traffic overload often occurs. Value range: 0 ~ 7. but also decreases the call completion rate of the system due to paging unable to be responded during MS location updating. and is one of the cell selection parameters. It not only dramatically increases the signaling flow of networks. To reduce the impact of this issue. When the overlap coverage of the adjacent cells belonging to Page 267 of 516 . called cell reselection delay hysteresis (CRH). while the radio resources can not be fully utilized. will MS start the cell reselection procedure.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 updating process after cell reselection. proper adjustments are recommended. the C2 values of two cells measured at the adjacent cell boundary will have relatively great fluctuation. Table 6-54 The value range of “Reselect Hysteresis Power Level” Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB 10 dB 12 dB 14 dB The specified CRH level Setting: Normally it is suggested to set ReselHysteresis as 4 or 5 (i.e. it is extremely short in terms of location updating. Although the interval of reselecting two cells by MS will be no less than 15s. Due to the fading characteristic of the radio channel. the reselection hysteresis level is 8dB or 10dB). It is required that the signal level of the adjacent cell (location area is different from that of the local cell) be greater than that of the local cell and that its difference be greater than the value specified by the CRH. resulting in MS to frequently reselect cells. In the following cases. This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4”. See Table 6-54. it is suggested to increase the ReselHysteresis parameters of the adjacent cells belonging to different LACs. Only in this way. normally. the period for sending the “CCCH LOAD INDICATION” message is decided by this parameter. when the CCCH channel (RACH and PCH channels) load level of BTS is over a threshold value (overload) set by O&M. the reselection hysteresis level is between 2dB and 6dB). The parameter Ny1 (the Max Number of Repetition) decides the maximum number of resending times for the “RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION” message. or if this joint place is an area where there are few moving objects with low speeds like the highway. during asynchronous handover process. After the “ RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION” message is sent once. it is also suggested to increase the ReselHysteresis parameters. Among them. Default: 4 9) Ny1 Times: The maximum number of repetitions for sending physical information messages Description: In accordance with the GSM specifications. etc.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 different LACs is rather big. BTS will resend the “RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION” message and restart the timer T3105. If the timer expires and cannot correctly decode the frames in the second layer (format A or format B) or TCH frames. Value range: 5 ~ 35 Default: 5 10) Notification CCCH Message Period Description: In accordance with the GSM specifications.. the coverage hole appears. BTS starts the timer T3105. This parameter is one of the configuration parameters of BTS. i.e. BTS should send the “RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION” message to notify MS of the timing advance that will be used by MS. If the coverage of adjacent cells belonging to different LACs is bad at the joint places. which is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.e. it is suggested to set the ReselHysteresis parameter to 1~3 (i. Value range: 1 ~ 255 (in the unit of 102TDMA frame) Default: 10 Page 268 of 516 . BTS will periodically send the “CCCH LOAD INDICATION” message to BSC till the CCCH channel is no longer over the threshold value. . Description: The Max. Value range: Frequency set. the value is taken within the frequency range set by the BSC broadcast range. Value range: It ranges between 0 and 219 for the extended cell and between 0 and 63 for the common cell. and the value range of each frequency is the Page 269 of 516 . Value range: 0 ~ 219.RachBusyThs dBm). TA supported by the extended carrier frequency. < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 . 15) Radio Frequency Description: The radio frequency set of the BTS. See Table 6-55. If the value is exceeded (that is. Table 6-55 The value range of “RACH take powerlevel threshold (RbusyThs)” Value 0 1 2 .. 14) BCCH Description: BCCH carrier frequency absolute frequency number. less than . Value range: 1 ~ 63. Corresponding level value (dBm) 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 40 12) TA Max. Value range: According to the setting of the network plan report. TA that allows MS access to this cell. 13) TA Allowed Description: The permitted Max.. it will be considered as a busy RACH.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 11) The RACH take powerlevel threshold (RbusyThs) Description: The threshold for receiving signal level in the RACH bursts period.. BVCI. NSE is the network service entity.e. 1:Support. Here. 18) NSE No. Generally. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Default: 0 ~ 7 17) Description: This parameter indicates if this cell supports GPRS. Page 270 of 516 . Considering the scalability. each GPRS cell can be identified by BVCI uniquely. Each virtual connection has one identifier. Setting: Uniformly planned by the network operator. Value range: 0 ~ 65535. i. It enables the network service layer at the bottom layer to route BSSGP PDU to the peer entity very effectively.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 same as BCCH. Setting: Set according to the actual conditions. 19) BVC No. each GPRS cell is assigned with one BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) (NSEI+BVCI). (BSSGP virtual connection identifier) Description: BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) provides an approach for the communications among different BSSGP entities. Value range: 0: Not support. to facilitate the management. 16) PLMN Table Description: This indicates the PLMN table that allows MS to report the measurement results. marked with NSEI. one BSE is divided into one service entity.) Support GPRS Description: At the BSSGP layer of the GPRS protocol stack. the ZXG10 system also allows BSC to be attached with several NSEs. Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF Setting: Uniformly planned by the network operator. or Point-to-Multipoint (PTM) or inter-signaling entity transmission of BSSGP PDU is based on BVC. Each BVC must belong to one NSE. The peer-to-peer Point-to-Point (PTP). In one NSE. One NSE has and only has one piece of signaling BVC (BVCI=0). (Network Service Entity No. It is numbered uniformly in the entire network. which uses the location area to manage a group of cells. Value range: 1 ~ 6 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 20) Route Area No. The MS and SGSN in the Standby state know their routing area information. the GPRS system further divides one location area into several routing areas that are identified by RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC). Description: Like the GSM system. 6-19 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig. of SPCU corresponding to a cell. 6-20 in the GPRS environment. when the network has the packet data or circuit service data to transmit. the “Routing area update” process will be initiated. Thus. if the old and new RAIs change. Basic Params 2 The configuration of the cell basic parameters 2 is as shown in Fig. RAI cannot cross SGSNs. In case of MS cell reselection in the attach state. Page 271 of 516 . Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: Uniformly planned by the network operator. Value range: 0 ~ 255. “0” indicates that the SPCU composite unit is not configured. Description: The composite unit No. 22) BRP Group Description: BRP group corresponding to a cell. it will page the MS in that routing area. 21) PUC MUnit No. 6-20 Configuring a cell (2) –GPRS Page 272 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-19 Configuring a cell (2) – GSM Fig. It is a parameter used by BTS. Value range: 0 ~ 15 Default: 15 3) Ms Link Layer Error Counter Maximal Description: The maximum value of the counter S that measures the radio link faults at the MS side. The parameter will be broadcast to all the MSs in a cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. the RACH channel is overloaded. RxLevAccessMin is also one of the cell selection parameters. If some receiving signal levels of “AvgSlots” BPs are less than the RachBusyThs. Value range: 0 ~ 15 Default: 15 4) MS Get the Minimal Intensity When Visit this Cell Description: It is the minimal receiving level that allows MS to access the cell. it is stipulated in the GSM system that when MS needs to access the network. the Min. Table 6-56 The value range of “MS Get the Minimal Intensity When Visit this Cell” Page 273 of 516 . To prevent MS from accessing the system when the level of the receiving signal is quite low. Also. receiving level of MS when it is allowed to access the network.See Table 6-56. Value range: 0 ~ 63. Value range: 0 ~ 100 Default: 60 2) Bss Link Layer Error Counter Maximal Description: The maximum value of the counter S that measures the radio link faults at the BSS side. i. it is a decision criteria for MS to make cell selection and cell reselection.e.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1) Survey Average Burst Count by RACH Description: The number of bursts measured at RACH. in which case the satisfactory communication quality cannot be provided and the radio resources of the network will be wasted in vain. its receiving level must be bigger than one threshold level. See Table 6-57. When the measure is adopted to balance the traffic. However. 100 Meaning CCCH load percentage 0% CCCH load percentage 1% . so as to decrease the C1 and C2 values of the cell and the cell effective coverage. -49 ~ -48 > -48 Corresponding level value (dBm) Setting: Generally.. -101dBm~-100dBm) or below. the cell “RxLevAccessMin” may be appropriately increased. the recommended value should be approximate to the MS receiving sensitivity.. the threshold is decided by the “CcchLoadThs” parameter. “blind spot” will be caused at the cell boundaries.. it is recommended that the level value not exceed -90dB.. Default: 12 (-99dBm ~ -98dBm) 5) RACH Load Indication Threshold (RLIT) Description: In accordance with the GSM specifications. when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage is not a problem in some areas.e..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 0 1 . this parameter can be set as 10 (i.. and for some cells with traffic overload. which is higher than the MS’s receiving sensitivity (-102dBm). 62 63 < -110 -110 ~ -109 . Value range: 0 ~ 100. Among them. Table 6-57 The value range of the RACH load indication threshold Value 0 1 . otherwise. CCCH load percentage 100% Page 274 of 516 .At the preliminary running stage of the network. BTS will periodically send the “CCCH LOAD INDICATION” message to BSC till the CCCH channel is no longer over the threshold value. which is one of the configuration parameters of BTS. the parameter of related cells can be increased by 2.. the “RxLevAccessMin” value cannot be too large.. but. when the CCCH channel (the RACH channel among them) load level of BTS is over a threshold value (overload) set by O&M.. the network enables the MS to send multiple channel request messages before it receives the immediate assignment message in order to improve the access success rate of MS. Value range: 0 ~ 100.. Since RACH is an ALOHA channel. The “MaxRetrans” is one of the control parameters of the system. BTS will periodically send the “CCCH LOAD INDICATION” message to BSC till the CCCH channel is no longer over the threshold value. This parameter is one of the configuration parameters of BTS. when the CCCH channel (the PCH channel among them) load level of BTS is over a threshold value (overload) set by O&M. “Type 3” and “Type4” messages. CCCH load percentage 63% CCCH load percentage 100% 7) The Most Count of RACH Access Resend Last Time (MaxRetrans) Description: When MS starts the immediate assignment process (such as MS needs to update the location. Value range: See Table 6-59. See Table 6-58.. “Type 2”. and the maximum number of allowed resending times is decided by the “MaxRetrans”. Table 6-58 The value range of the PCH load indication threshold Value 0 1 . the threshold is decided by the “CcchLoadThs” parameter. it will send the channel request message in the RACH channel to the network. Among them.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6) PCH Load Indication Threshold (PLIT) Description: In accordance with the GSM specifications. 63 100 Meaning CCCH load percentage 0% CCCH load percentage 1% . This parameter notifies the MS in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1”. originate a call or respond to the paging). “Type 2bis”... Page 275 of 516 . The MS must extract the power control header from the downlink SACCH and takes the specified transmitting power as the output power. the power used when the channel request is sent on RACH) used by the MS before receiving SACCH is decided by the control channel maximum power level Page 276 of 516 . Since the SACCH is the associated channel signaling.e. it can be set as 2 (i. For the micro cell with heavy traffic and the cell with obvious congestion. D. For the cell radius over 3km and the area with relatively less traffic. thus.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-59 The value range of “Most Count of RACH Access Resend Last Time (MaxRetrans)” Value 0 1 2 3 1 2 4 7 MaxRetrans Setting: You can refer to the following methods for setting MaxRetrans: A. it can be set as 3 (i. Default: 2 8) MsTxPwrMax When Access (MTPMax) Description: During the communication between MS and BTS. such as SDCCH. the MS power control by the network actually begins after the MS receives SACCH. one is the power control byte and the other is the timing advance). For the cell radius less than 3km and the area with medium traffic. if the power level of MS cannot output the power value. the maximum number of resending times is 7) to improve the access success rate of MS.e. C.e.e. The power (i. it is recommended to set it as 0 (i. B. it will output the closest transmitting power that can be outputted. the transmitting power is controlled by the network. the network sets the power for MS via the power command and the command is transmitted on SACCH (the SACCH has 2 header bytes. For the micro cellular. the maximum number of resending times is 4).e. TCH. the maximum number of resending times is 2). the maximum number of resending times is 1). it must be used with other channels. it is recommended to set it as 1 (i. Table 6-60 The value range of “MsTxPwrMax When Access (MTPMax)” GSM900 Value MS output power (dBm) 0~2 3 4 5 .. This parameter is broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. Default: 2 9) AGCH Model Count Description: This is the number of blocks used for AGCH in the 51 Page 277 of 516 . and test MS access success rate and access time with different parameter settings so as to determine whether to increase or decrease the value of this parameter. and is one of the cell selection parameters. 17 18 19 ~ 31 39 37 35 33 .. Value range: See Table 6-60.. Normally. that is.. The “MsTxPwrMaxCch” is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by MS. you can test it in an experiment mode. Principle of setting this parameter: On condition that the MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with certain access success rate.. Obviously. the MS near BTS will interfere the neighboring channels. 13 14 15 ~ 28 36 34 32 30 . In practical applications.. the larger the cell coverage.. this parameter is recommended to be set as 5 (corresponding to GSM900MS) and 0 (corresponding to GSM1800MS). make a dial test at the cell boundary. the higher MS output power level is. 9 7 5 29 30 31 0 . after the parameter is set. the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. involving in the calculation of C1 and C2 values.. Value GSM1800 MS output power (dBm) 4 2 0 Setting: If this parameter is set too large. the MS at the cell boundary will have low access success rate. If it is too small.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “MsTxPwrMaxCch”. To make the MS know this configuration information. the system message of each cell contains a configuration parameter. that is. or 2 (CcchConf is not 1). it must be set how many blocks out of the CCCH channel message blocks on the network will be reserved for the access grant channel.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 multiframes (BS-AG-BLK-RES). This parameter is broadcast to all MSs in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” message. the BsAgBlkRes used for PCH can be calculated via “CCCHConf” and “BsAgBlkRes”. This parameter can be dynamically adjusted during the actual running according to the load status of various common channels. Table 6-61 shows the CCCH channel information blocks contained in each BCCH multi-frame (51 frames contained) in the case of different common control channel configurations. Table 6-61 The value range of “AGCH Model Count” The number of AGCH blocks reserved in each BCCH multi-frame 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The number of PCH blocks reserved in each BCCH multi-frame 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 CCCH_C ONF BS_AG_BLK_ RES 1 0 1 2 Others (illegal) Others 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting: 1 (when CcchConf = 1). 10) Call Team Account for Multiframe Count Description: The number of multi-frames (BS-PA-MFRMS) of 51 TDMA Page 278 of 516 . Since the CCCH channels contain both the access grant channel and paging channel. Value range: See Table 6-61. BsPaMframs is broadcast to the MS in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” message. for the area with heavy traffic. In the practical network. BsPaMframs is one of the system control parameters. and shuts off the power supply of some hardware equipment in the MS so as to save the power overhead of MS. each mobile subscriber (i. the parameter should be as small as possible. MS calculates its paging group in the light of its own IMSI. and each paging group in every cell is corresponding to one paging sub-channel.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 frames of MS sent in the paging information to the same paging group. Generally. Actually. MS only “tunes in” the paging sub-channel to which it belongs and ignores the contents of other paging sub-channels. the parameter determines how many sub-channels will be allocated for the paging channel in a cell. Table 6-62 The value range of “Call Team Account for Multiframe Count” Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The number of multi-frames cycled on the same paging channel in the same paging group 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Setting: On the condition of guaranteeing no overload for the paging channel. The multi-frame quantity (BsPaMframs) of the paging channel means how many multiframes will act as one cycle for the paging sub-channel. this parameter should be set as 6 or 7 (i. corresponding to each IMSI) belongs to one paging group. This parameter is mainly used by the MS to calculate its own paging group. Value range: See Table 6-62. 8 or 9 multiframes will be a cycle for the paging group). In the area with modest Page 279 of 516 . This parameter is broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “SYSTEM INFORMATION” message.e. so that the paging sub-channel location of the paging group can be calculated. In accordance with the GSM specifications. so that the related paging sub-channel can be monitored.e. the waiting indication information element. Default: 2 11) The Most Time Interval of MR Resend at RACH (T3122) Description: After the network receives the channel request message sent by MS.. To avoid the MS continuously sending the channel request that will result in further congestion of radio channels. Default: 10 3. it is recommended to set the T3122 as 10 ~ 15s.. and 15 ~25s for the area with high density traffic. Table 6-63 The value range of “The Most Time Interval of MR Resend at RACH (T3122)” T3122 0 1 2 .e.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 traffic. 6 or 7 multi-frames will be a cycle for the paging group). Page 280 of 516 . 4 or 5 multiframes will be a cycle for the paging group). the network will send the “IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message to the MS. MS must wait for a time indicated by T3122 before initiating a new call. For the area with very small traffic. this parameter can be set as 2 or 3 (i.e. 6-21 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig. 6-22 in the GPRS environment. this parameter can be set as 4 or 5 (i. 255s Meaning Setting: Generally. After receiving “IMMEDIATELY ASSIGNMENT REJECT”. Value range: See Table 6-63. that is... Optional Params The configuration of the cell optional parameters is as shown in Fig. if there is no proper channel to be allocated to the MS. the timer parameter T3122 will be contained in the “IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message. 255 0s 1s 2s . This parameter is also one of the system control parameters and is sent to MS in “IMMEDIATELY ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message. 6-22 Configuring a cell (3) . 6-21 Configuring a cell (3) .GPRS 1) Allow IMSI attach/detach Page 281 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig.GSM Fig. the network marks the working status of the subscriber. Value range: True: Allow MS to conduct the attach and detach operations in the cell. “CellBarAccess” is combined with “CellBarQulify” (cell disable limit) to decide the priority of the cell selection and reselection. Upon receiving the IMSI attach or the location updating process. This parameter participates in controlling whether Page 282 of 516 . switch-off or the process to take the SIM card out from the MS. and the called connection request of the subscriber will be denied now. Setting: For different cells in the same location area.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: Whether to allow IMSI Attach/Detach in a cell. and the MS checks whether the LAI where the MS is located is consistent with the original one saved. False: Not allow MS to conduct the attach and detach operations in the cell. If yes. the attach process of IMSI means that the MS reports entering the working status to the network or reinserting the SIM card into the MS. IMSI detach process means that the MS reports entering non-working status to the network. that is. otherwise. “TYPE 2bis”. the cell under the test or the cell for absorbing handover traffic only). “TYPE 2”. used for “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3”. this parameter value should be the same. the location updating process is started. The network (normally VLR) marks the IMSI subscriber in a non-working status. Default: False 3) Allow Downlink DTX Description: Applying DTX in the downlink direction is an optional procedure of BSC. Default: True 2) Cell Bar Access Description: PLMN operators can determine whether to allow the MS residing in the specific cell (for instance. “TYPE3” and “TYPE 4” messages. Accordingly. This parameter is contained in the “Control channel description” information element. This parameter is notified to the MS in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1”. so it is unnecessary to page. the IMSI attach process is started. Discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process in which the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber conversation. MS can originate the call re-establishment process to resume the conversation. False: The DTX mode cannot be adopted in the downlink direction. As to the MS without a SIM card or the MS having a SIM but its access class (one of classes from C0~C9) has been closed by the current cell (i. such as burglary alarm. Value range: True: The call reestablishment is allowed inside this cell. “TYPE 3” and “TYPE 4” messages. according to the system message of the current cell. any MS on the GSM network must have a valid subscriber identification module (SIM) card to get various services support from the network. which is broadcast to the MS in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1”. operators have the right to decide whether to allow the MS for making an Emergency Call (EC). Page 283 of 516 . and is one of the network function parameters. “TYPE 2bis”. Value range: True: The DTX mode can be adopted in the downlink direction. and is one of the network function parameters. Practically. Default: False 5) Allow Emergency Call Description: Generally. “TYPE 2bis”. “TYPE 3” and “TYPE 4” messages. False: The call reestablishment is not allowed inside this cell. It is broadcast to the MS in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1”. Default: True 4) Allow Call Reestablish In Cell Description: Since “blind spot” caused by burst interference or high-rise building will result in call disconnection due to radio link fault. This function is implemented by setting the “EmergencyCall” parameter. “TYPE2”. “TYPE 2”. it cannot start the access program). This function is implemented via setting the “CallReestablish” parameter. But the network has the right to allow the re-establishment. whether DTX (the “CHANNEL ACTIVATION” and “MODE MODIFY” messages given to BTS) is applied in the downlink direction will be jointly decided by this parameter and the indication about whether to adopt DTX in the downlink direction in the “ASSIGNMENT REQUEST” and “HANDOVER REQUEST” messages of MSC.e.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the DTX mode is applied in the downlink direction. e. T3212 can be Page 284 of 516 . that is. The interval for periodic location updating is controlled by the network and the period length is decided by the T3212 parameter. the emergency call is allowed. T3212 is one of the system control parameters. But on the network. This parameter is broadcast to all MSs in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” message. EC setting should be “False”. 25. which is different from China telephone number allocation.. Table 6-64 The value range of the T3212 timer T3212 0 Time indicated (min. Setting: In the GSM specifications.4 25. while the MSs with the access classes 11~15 are not allowed to make an emergency call if the related access control bit is set to T. and the other is that the network specifies the MS to periodically update its location.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: True: the MSs with the access classes 0~9 are not allowed to make an emergency call. Description: In the GSM system. Default: False 6) T3212 Timer: The timer for periodic location update.. notifying subscribers of various special service numbers. even 25 hours).. Value range: 0 ~ 255. But for the area with ordinary traffic.. See Table 6-64.2 . a larger period can be chosen (i. As to the area with relatively high traffic. 112 is connected to the answer phone. one is that the MS finds its location area has been changed (different LACs). 16 or 20 hours.5 Setting: The setting of this parameter will affect the overall service performance and utilization rate of radio resources of the network. there are two major causes resulting in location updating.) Infinite (without needing Time indicated (hr.1 0. generally. the emergency call phone number is defined as 112. False: All MSs are allowed to make an emergency call. 1524 1530 location updating) 0..) Infinite (without needing location updating) 1 2 . 254 255 6 12 .. Therefore. set the priority of the cell. The “Cell Bar Qualify” is used to set the cell priority in some special cases. Table 6-65 The value range of the “Cell Bar Qualify” CellBarQualify CellBarAccess Cell selection priority Cell reselection status F F T T F T F T Normal Barred Low Low Normal Barred Normal Normal Setting: Generally. traffic and functional difference of each cell. operators hope that the MS preferably selects some cells in the cell selection according to the capacity. etc. This parameter is broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. Value range: See Table 6-65. But in some cases. Default: 10 7) Cell Bar Qualify Description: For the overlapped areas in a cell. normally. while the priorities of other cells shall be set as “Low”. in which case the priority of this type cell shall be set as “Normal”. Whether this parameter is valid will be decided by “CellReselPI”. operators would hope that the MS preferably enter some types of cells first. The MSs with the class ranging between 0 and 9 are Page 285 of 516 . such as micro-cell application. that is. it is recommended to set T3212 as 0.. the cell priority is set as normal. Default: False (8) MS Type Can not Visit Cell Description: In the GSM system. “CellBarAccess” should be set as F. and is one of the cell selection parameters. and “CellBarQulify” is also set as F.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 relatively set small (such as 3 or 6 hours). dual-frequency networking. all the MSs have a access class (15 classes in total). namely. Note: This setting will not affect the cell reselection. This function can be implemented via setting the “CellBarQualify” parameter. For the area with extreme traffic overload. Other overload. and handled by BSS by not sending the “IMMEDIATE REJECT” message. which shall be detected in the “CCCH LOAD INDICATION” message and processed by BSS according to the standard GSM08. 4.g. Page 286 of 516 . 2. which shall be detected in the “DELETE INDICATION” message first.58. the system may have the following overload conditions: A. so that during commission or in the process of maintenance and test in some cells.g. unnecessary impact on the installation or maintenance may be reduced. and shall handled according to the algorithm as described in the GSM08. B. and can access the cell. while those with the class ranging between 11 and 15 are special MSs (no access class 10). RACH overload. which shall be detected in the “CCCH LOAD INDICATION” message. during the installation commissioning or the congestion control).58. Based on this. 2bis. Cell Selection Params The configuration of the cell selection parameters is as shown in Fig. Value range: False: MSs of related access classes are not prohibited. PCH overload. During the congestion control. the system can disable the MSs with certain access classes to access the cell (e. for C0 ~ C15 (excluding C10) these bits should be set as True. Default: Generally. C.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 common ones. D. 6-24 in the GPRS environment. True: MSs of related access classes are prohibited from accessing the cell. the degree of congestion can be reduced by temporarily prohibiting one type or multiple types of subscribers from accessing the system (mainly for subscribers of access classes 0~9). MTP overload). These pieces of information can reach the MS inside the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1. for any overload due to CCCH or processor. and shall not be handled by the BSS but shall be notified to the MSC. AccessControl is also one of the system control parameters. 3 and 4 messages through the “AccessControl” parameter. AGCH overload. which can be detected via the “OVERLOAD” message (e. Generally speaking. 6-23 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig. 6-23 Configuring a cell (4) – GSM Fig. 6-24 Configuring a cell (4) –GPRS Page 287 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. True: MS shall extract the parameter PI related to the cell reselection and the parameters related to the C2 calculation from the rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE7 or TYPE8 (SI7/8 Rest Octets). This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. and the MS will take C1 as the cell reselection standard. Setting: Generally. TemporaryOffset and PenaltyTime are invalid. while parameters like CellBarQualify. Value range: False: MS shall take the parameter C1 as the standard for the cell reselection. system messages 7 and 8 are seldom used.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1) Additional Reselection PI Description: According to the definition in the GSM specification. the cell selection and reselection of MS depend on parameters C1 and C2. True: MS shall extract Page 288 of 516 . the successive “ReselOff”. So the “AdditionReselPI” is set as False normally. It indicates whether the related parameter for calculating cell reselection standard C2 is contained in the “SYSTEM INFORMATION” message and whether C2 standard is adopted in the cell reselection. When the system adopts system messages 7 and 8. “TempOffset” and “PenalTim” will be invalid. This parameter will be broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. When this value is False. MS shall extract from them the parameter PI related to the cell reselection and the parameters related to the C2 calculation. ACS) is used to notify the MS about whether C2 is adopted during the cell reselection. Value range: False: If the rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 (SI4 Rest Octets) exist. and whether C2 is used as the cell reselection parameter is determined by the network operators. and is one of the cell selection parameters. “CellReselPI” is one of the cell selection parameters. AdditionReselPI (Additional Reselect Param Ind. and the cell reselection uses C2. the “AdditionReselPI” should be set as True. ReselOffset. Default: False 2) Cell Reselection PI (C2) Description: The cell reselection parameter index is employed to notify the MS about whether to use the C2 as the cell reselection parameter and whether there is the parameter for calculating C2. This parameter is broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. parameters like CellBarQualify. Meanwhile. CRO) is a magnitude. and penalty time (PenaltyTime). the network load balance can be realized. Usually. or to block the MS from entering some cells. ReselOffset. and is one of the cell selection parameters. The C2 is formed on the basis of parameter C1 plus some man-made offset parameters.. Value range: See Table 6-66.. the “CellReselPI” must be set as True. Whether this parameter is valid will be decided by “CellReselPI”. which indicates the man-made correction to C2. Default: True 3) Cell Reselection Offset (CRO) Description: The cell reselection caused by the radio channel quality takes the C2 as the standard. the Page 289 of 516 . 62 63 0 2 4 . temporary offset (TemporaryOffset). besides C1. Table 6-66 The value range of CRO Value 0 1 2 .. To calculate the correction of the cell C2 reselect standard is to encourage or block the MS to enter a cell. such measures are adopted to balance the traffic on the network. include three following ones: Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 parameters from the system messages of the cell broadcast to calculate the value of C2 and take it as the standard for the cell reselection. to add the man-made influence is to encourage the MS to enter some cells in priority.. otherwise. TemporaryOffset and PenaltyTime are valid. The ReselOffset (Cell Reselect Offset. so that. it should be as False. Setting: If the related cell adopts C2 as the cell reselection standard. 124 126 The related level value represented (dB) Setting: The setting of the cell reselection offset (ReselOffset). Factors affecting C2. C. bring no man-made influence on the cell. Besides.e. include three following ones: Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset).e. Factors affecting C2. normally it is suggested to set ReselOffset as 0 and PenaltyTime as 31. The C2 is formed on the basis of parameter C1 plus some man-made offset parameters. the PenaltyTime can be set as 31. the smaller ReselOffset. having certain repellency for that cell). normally MS is encouraged to work in that cell (i.e. temporary offset Page 290 of 516 . . Usually. Usually. The main function of PenaltyTime is to avoid frequent cell reselection of MS. For cells with small traffic and low equipment usage. having a certain tendency toward that cell). the less tendency. and the numerical value of C2 equals to C1 minus “Reseloffset”. the TemporaryOffset is recommended to be set as same as ReselOffset. the ReselOffset can be set properly: The much repellent. according to the repellent condition of the cell. the ReselOffset is recommended to be set between 0 ~ 10 (corresponding to 0 ~ 20dB). In case of large traffic or low communication quality inside a cell due to certain causes. and it is generally recommended to be set as 0 (20 seconds) or 1 (40 seconds) (the 1800 cell of dual-frequency network is such a case). set the ReselOffset: The much tendency. normally MS is expected not to work in that cell (i. the less repellant. C2 is equal to C1.In this case. B. can be divided into three cases: A. to reduce the possibility of the MS to reselect this cell. to add the man-made influence is to encourage the MS to enter some cells in priority. Thus. the “TemporaryOffset” parameter is invalid. besides C1. i. based on the level of tendency toward the cell. or to block the MS from entering some cells. the larger ReselOffset. or a little higher than “ReselOffset”. the C2 value corresponding to the cell is factitiously decreased. the smaller ReselOffset. For cells with mediate traffic. the larger ReselOffset. therefore. In that case. such measures are adopted to balance the traffic on the network. Thus. Default: 0 4) Temp Offset (TO) Description: The cell reselection caused by the radio channel quality takes the C2 as the standard.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 temporary offset (TemporaryOffset) and the penalty time (PenaltyTime). This parameter is broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. and is one of the cell selection parameters. and the period is determined by the “PenaltyTime” parameter. Usually. include three following ones: Cell reselection offset (ReselOffset). and is one of the cell selection parameters. Whether this parameter is valid will be decided by “CellReselPI”. What “temporary” means is that it only acts on C2 in a period. and penalty time (PenaltyTime). The C2 is formed on the basis of parameter C1 plus some man-made offset parameters. What “temporary” means is that it only acts on C2 in a period. to add the man-made influence is to encourage the MS to enter some cells in priority. Table 6-67 The value range of “Temp Offset (TO)” Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Infinity Related level value represented (dB) Default: 0 5) Penalty Time (PT) Description: The cell reselection caused by the radio channel quality takes the C2 as the standard. temporary offset (TemporaryOffset). and the period is determined by the “PenaltyTime” parameter. and penalty time (PenaltyTime). Whether this parameter is valid will be decided by “CellReselPI”. The TemporaryOffset indicates the temporary correction value for C2. besides C1. such measures are adopted to balance the traffic on the network. Page 291 of 516 . The TemporaryOffset indicates the temporary correction value for C2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 (TemporaryOffset). Value range: See Table 6-67. Factors affecting C2. This parameter is broadcast to all the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. or to block the MS from entering some cells. Page 292 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-68. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-68 Value 0 1 2 ... 29 30 31 The value range of “Penalty Time (PO)” The time value represented (second) 20 40 60 ... 600 620 TemporaryOffset is invalid, and the action direction of ReselOffset is reverse. Default: 20 6) Early Class Mark Transmission Control (ECSC) Description: According to the GSM specifications, when the MS is equipped with the ECSC function that is also supported by the network, the MS will transmit the additional class mark information (Classmark 3) to the network via the “CLASSMARK CHANGE” message as soon as possible after the immediate assignment. Whether the network supports the ECSC function is controlled by the “ECSC” parameter. The parameter is broadcast to the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” message. Value range: False: Disable ECSC of MS. True: Enable ECSC of MS. Setting: If there is another frequency band in the adjacent cell for handover or the cell is an extended GSM cell and the network supports the ECSC function, the “ECSC” here shall be set as True. Otherwise, it shall be set as False. Default: True 7) Hardware Support Half Rate (NECI) Description: Based on the GSM specifications, the traffic channels in the GSM system can be classified into the channel with full rate and the channel with half rate. The common GSM systems all support the channel with full rate; whether the network supports the half-rate service is decided by network operators. The NECI is used to notify the MS if the area supports the half rate service. The parameter is notified to the MS via the “RIL3_RR Page 293 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages and is one of network functional parameters. Value range: False: This cell does not support the access of the half rate service. True: This cell supports the access of the half rate service. Setting: False. Default: False 8) MS Power Offset A. Power Offset Index Description: In the GSM specifications, for the Class 3 MS of GSM1800, the transmitting power for sending an access request message on RACH is to add an offset value on the basis of the MsTxPwrMaxCCH value, which is specified by the “PwrOffset” parameter. But, whether the offset value is required is indicated by the “PwrOffsetInd” parameter, that is, the “PwrOffsetInd” parameter decides if the “PwrOffse” parameter is valid. The parameter is broadcast to the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3”,”TYPE 4”, “TYPE 7” and “TYPE 8” messages. Value range: False: The “PwrOffset” parameter is invalid. True: The “PwrOffset” parameter is valid. Default: False B. Power Offset Value Description: In the GSM specifications, for the Class 3 MS of GSM1800, the transmitting power for sending an access request message on RACH is to add an offset value on the basis of MsTxPwrMaxCCH value, which is specified by the “PwrOffset” parameter. But, whether the offset value is required is denoted by the “PwrOffsetInd” parameter, that is, the “PwrOffsetInd” parameter decides if the “PwrOffse” parameter is valid. The “PwrOffset” parameter also affects the MS in the cell selection and cell reselection calculation standards C1 and C2. The parameter is broadcast to the MSs in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3”, “TYPE4”, “TYPE7” and “TYPE8” messages. Value range: See Table 6-69. Page 294 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-69 The value range of “Power Offset Value” Value 0 1 2 3 0 2 4 6 The power offset represented(dB) Default: 0 5. Operation Course Addition Params The configuration of the operation course additional parameters is as shown in Fig. 6-25 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig. 6-26 in the GPRS environment. Fig. 6-25 Configuring a cell (5) – GSM Page 295 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-26 Configuring a cell (5) –GPRS 1) Use Directed Retry Description: Whether the Directed Retry process is used. In the assignment process, if there is no traffic channel to be assigned in the served cell while the system adopts the directed retry, it will assign a traffic channel for MS in an adjacent cell according to the measurement report from MS. This is a special handover process that can reduce the call drop rate. The directed retry can be divided into the directed retry inside BSC and that between the BSCs, the former of which does not require the participation of the MSC but the latter does. Value range: See Table 6-70. Table6-70 The value range of “Use Directed Retry” Value The directed retry inside BSC (with no MSC participation) 0 1 2 No Yes No The directed retry between BSCs (with MSC participation) No No Yes Page 296 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 3 Yes Yes Default: 0 2) Allow Queue when Assign Description: The parameter decides if the queuing can be performed in the process of assignment when there is no channel available in the cell. Value range: True/False Default: False 3) Allow Queue when Handover. Description: The parameter decides if the queuing can be performed in the process of handover when there is no channel available in the cell. Value range: True/False Default: False 4) Assign Remove Mark (Choose, Damage) and HandOver Remove Mark (Choose, Damage) Description: Whether to allow the forced release in the process of assignment and handover. The “forced release” process means that, when the priority in the request of assignment or handover is valid and also the preemption is valid, forcedly disconnect (handover) those easily damaged connections before they are not allocated with the resources, then, allocate the released resources to this assignment or handover request. Whether a call is easily damaged will be shown in the requests of assignment and handover. Value range: See Table 6-71. Table 6-71 The value ranges of “Assign Remove Mark (Choose, Damage)” and “HandOver Remove Mark (Choose, Damage)” Value 0 Meaning True: The assignment request allows forced occupancy False: The assignment request does not allow forced occupancy 1 True: The handover request allows the forced occupancy False: The handover request does not allow the forced Page 297 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 occupancy Default: False for both. 5) Allow Rapid Average after Call Setup/Handover/Power Control Description: Due to few measurement data, the corresponding handover and power control may not be performed in the process of call, since, these processes generally require the numbers of values that can be measured to reach a certain window value before the process of calculating the average value can be started. For example, when the window value to calculate the average value is 8, but here, the BSC only receives 5 measurement values, the common average process can do nothing at the time, anyhow, if the rapid average process is adopted, then, the BSC will directly calculate the average value of the 5 measurement values. In the entire process of the call, there will be three cases resulting in insufficient measurement value for calculating the average value, i.e. the call setup period, after handover and after power control. It is necessary to point out that, after the power control is performed once, the former measurement value is meaningless to the power control, it even might cause incorrect control, therefore, all the old measurement values for power control must be discarded in such a case (the measurement values without affecting the handover control still exist). Similarly, after the handover occurred (intra-BSC handover), the former measurement value is meaningless, it even might cause incorrect control, therefore, all the old measurement values for power control and handover control must be discarded in such a case. The “FastAvg” parameter decides whether the rapid average process can be separately used in the three phases. Value range: See Table 6-72. Table 6-72 The value range of “Rapid Average” Position 1 Meaning 1: The call setup phase allows the rapid average process 0: The call setup phase does not allow the rapid average process 2 1: The rapid average process is allowed after handover 0: The rapid average process is not allowed after handover 3 1: The rapid average process is allowed after power control Page 298 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 0: The rapid average process is not allowed after power control 4~8 Reserved, always 0 Setting: The generally-followed policies are as follows: A. When the SDCCH handover is allowed, position 1 can be set as 1; B. When the minimum time interval for handover is less than the time represented by some window value (the preprocessing of BTS shall be taken into account), we can consider setting position 2 to 1. C. When the preprocessing of BTS is performed, position 3 can be set as 1. Default: All the average values of call setup, handover and power control are “True”. 6) FACCH Call Setup Description: When an MS attempts to access the network, and there is no SDCCH available in the cell, here, the BSC can allocate the TCH channel according to the situation, i.e. the FACCH call setup process. Whether and how to use the FACCH call setup process is controlled by the “FacchCallInd” parameter. Value range: See Table 6-73. Table 6-73 The value range of “FACCH Call Setup” Position 1 Meaning 1: The emergency call allows the FACCH call setup process 0: The emergency call does not allow the FACCH call setup process 2 1: The paging response allows the FACCH call setup process 0: The paging response does not allow the FACCH call setup process 3 1: The originating call allows the FACCH call setup process 0: The originating call does not allow the FACCH call setup process 4 1: The call re-setup allows the FACCH call setup process 0: The call re-setup does not allow the FACCH call setup process 5~8 Reserved, always 0 Default: All the values of call setup are “True”. Page 299 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 7) Optimize TxPwr Description: By introducing the concept of optimal signal level, the transmitting power of the mobile station and the BS can be optimized after the assignment and handover of the mobile station and the BS (including the directed retry), thus, it can avoid the increased interference of entire GSM system caused by always using the maximum transmitting power, or the failure of the MS access and the reduction of system call completion ratio caused by using a smaller transmitting power (when it is intra-cell handover or when assigning) Of course, it is an optional item also, therefore, the “OptTxPwrInd” parameter is used to decide if the relevant function of transmitting power optimization is enabled. It is necessary to point out that the optimization of uplink transmitting power is related to the smallest acceptable carrier-to-noise ratio allocated by channel. Moreover, the parameter also decides the validity of parameters “OptRxLevUL” and “OptRxLevDL”, i.e. when a process in the uplink direction requires to be optimized, the “OptRxLevUL” parameter is valid; Otherwise it is invalid; so is with the downlink direction. Value range: See Table 6-74. Table 6-74 The value range of “Optimize TxPwr” Position 1 Meaning 1: Optimize the transmitting power when assigning in the uplink direction 0: Do not perform the transmitting power optimization when assigning in the uplink direction 2 1: Optimize the transmitting power during the intra-cell handover in the uplink direction (including the concentric handover) 0: Do not optimize the transmitting power during the intra-cell handover in the uplink direction (including the concentric handover) 3 1: Optimize the transmitting power during the inter-cell handover in the uplink direction(including the directed retry) 0: Do not optimize the transmitting power during the inter-cell handover in the uplink direction (including the directed retry) 4 5 Reserved, always 0 1: Optimize the transmitting power when assigning in the downlink direction 0: Do not optimize the transmitting power when assigning in the downlink direction Page 300 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6 1: Optimize the transmitting power during the intra-cell handover in the downlink direction (including the concentric handover) 0: Do not optimize the transmitting power during the intra-cell handover in the downlink direction (including the concentric handover) 7 1: Optimize the transmitting power during the inter-cell handover in the downlink direction(including the directed retry) 0: Do not optimize the transmitting power during the inter-cell handover in the downlink direction (including the directed retry) 8 Reserved, always 0 Default: All the seven kinds of power optimization settings are “False”. 8) Allow to Assign from SCDDH to TCH of Special TRX Description: Whether it is allowed to perform the assignment process from the SDCCH to the TCH of special TRX. On the basis of C/I concentric technology, when there is no TCH channel on a common TRX and if there is proper TRX channel on the special TRX, besides queuing to wait, it is also possible to directly assign the MS to the TCH channel on the special TRX from SDCCH to avoid the occurrence of call drop. The “CiAssignInd” parameter decides whether it can be done. Note: Whether the parameter is valid is decided by the bit related to the concentric circle in the “HoControl” field of the “R_HOC” table. Value range: False: The assignment procedure from SDCCH to TCH of special TRX cannot be executed. True: The assignment procedure from SDCCH to TCH of special TRX can be executed. Default: True (9) Uplink Best Signal Level Description: The parameter indicates the best receiving intensity of the uplink signal in the cell, i.e. under this receiving intensity, usually, the good signal quality and small interference can be guaranteed. So, in the process of assignment or handover, if the optimization of transmitting power in the uplink direction is performed, the “OptRxLevUl” is the mobile signal level that the BS expects to receive. Value range: See Table 6-75. Table 6-75 The value range of “Uplink Best Signal Level” Page 301 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 0 1 ... 62 63 < -110 -110 ~ -109 ... -49 ~ -48 > -48 Corresponding level value (dBm) Setting: For the parameter setting, you can refer to the descending threshold value controlled by the uplink power. Default: 22 10) Downlink Best Signal Level Description: The parameter indicates the best receiving intensity of the downlink signal in the cell, i.e. under this receiving intensity, usually, the good signal quality and small interference can be guaranteed. So, in the process of assignment or handover, if the optimization of transmitting power in the downlink direction is performed, the “OptRxLevDl” is the mobile signal level that the BS expects to receive. Value range: See Table 6-76. Table 6-76 Value 0 1 2 ... 62 63 < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 ... -49 ~ -48 > -48 The value range of “Downlink Best Signal Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) Setting: For the parameter setting, you can refer to the descending threshold value controlled by the downlink power. Default: 22 11) Candidate Cell Maximal Count Description: According to the relevant specifications, when the BSC sends the “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED” message to MSC, a certain number Page 302 of 516 The calculation method is: RxLevBalance = downlink signal – uplink signal. The "CiAssignThs” parameter determines the level value that must be exceeded by the signal level in the uplink direction (after correcting the power control). 19 20 Corresponding level value (dBm) Setting: For the parameter setting. when there is no TCH channel on the common TRX and if there is proper TRX channel on the special TRX. it is also possible to directly assign the MS to the TCH channel on the special TRX from SDCCH to avoid the occurrence of call drop.g.. Table 6-77 The value range of “Up-Downlink Signal Balance” Value 0 1 .. Value range: See Table 6-77. 19 20 0 1 ..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 of candidate cells are required to be given. e. Default: 0 13) Allow Uplink Minimal Signal Level Description: On the basis of C/I concentric technology and in the process of performing the assignment from SDCCH to the TCH of special TRX. you can refer to the descending threshold value controlled by the uplink power. Page 303 of 516 . the value 5dB means that the downlink signal is 5dB stronger than the uplink signal. Value range: 1 ~ 16 Default: 6 12) Up-Downlink Signal Balance Description: The parameter indicates the difference between the uplink signal level and the downlink signal level in the area covered by the cell.. and this parameter specifies the largest number of candidate cells that can be contained in the “BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED” message. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-78. -49 ~ -48 > -48 Corresponding level value (dBm) Default: 25 14) Minimal Resource Level Description: In case of some special frequency multiplexing modes. as the guarantee for the normal service needs the restriction on certain traffic (e. The parameter also affects the optimization of the uplink mobile transmitting power. Value range: 0 ~ 63.g. no channels will be allocated to the assignment procedure in the cell. Default: 15 6.. Table 6-78 The value range of “Allow Uplink Minimal Signal Level” Value 0 1 .. a minimal acceptable C/N value can be specified. Meanwhile.. this parameter is a threshold value of the traffic that a cell or its surrounding cells at the same layer can reach. When the TCH channel occupancy rate of a cell and its adjacent cell of the same layer (quantity of TCHs occupied by a cell and its adjacent cells of the same layer/total of TCHs occupied by a cell and its adjacent cells of the same layer) reaches this value. a better conversation quality can be obtained only in case of 50% of traffic). the handover will not be affected by this parameter. The “CnThresInd” parameter specifies the minimal acceptable C/N value. Value range: 0 ~ 100 Default: 100 15) Access Minimal C/N Value Description: When distributing a channel to a call. The principle of channel allocation is to select the idle channel that can meet this value as much as possible.. 62 63 < -110 -110 ~ -109 . System Params Page 304 of 516 . separately representing 0 ~ 63dB. which will be used to make the channel selection. 6-27 Configuring a cell (6) . Fig.GSM Page 305 of 516 . 6-27 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The configuration of the system parameters is as shown in Fig. 6-28 in the GPRS environment. Table 6-79 The value range of “Survey Period” Value 0 1 . and transfer it to BSC in the “RF RESOURCE INDICATION” message as a factor to be considered when BSC assigns channels.. AP) parameter. used for describing the remaining four boundaries. This parameter. 31 Reserved. Actually. calculate the average of the recent interference values periodically and convert it into the corresponding interference band information.. The value of the period is determined by the “InterfAvgPrd“ (Interference Averaging Period. 6-28 Configuring a cell (6) .GPRS 1) Survey Period Description: BTS needs to measure the interference on the unassigned traffic channels..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 31 SACCH multi-frames are reported to BSC once Meaning Default: 31 2) Interference Boundary Description: BTS needs to measure the interference on the unassigned traffic channels. Altogether six boundaries determine five interference bands. 1 SACCH multi-frame is reported to BSC once . is one of the configuration parameters of BTS. the interference boundary 0 and the interference boundary 5 need not be set and BTS need not consider these two boundaries. Page 306 of 516 . These corresponding relations are respective interference boundaries. calculate the average of the recent interference values periodically and convert it into the corresponding interference band information. one of them stands for infinity and the other for negative infinity. Some corresponding relations are needed in converting interference level (average) value into the corresponding interference band information. Value range: See Table 6-79. transfer it to BSC in the “RF RESOURCE INDICATION” message as a factor to be considered when BSC assigns channels. This parameter is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.. If SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-80.. thus avoiding inconsistent judgment standards in the uplink and downlink directions. one of which is based on uplink SACCH error Page 307 of 516 .. 63 other values The level value represented -110 dBm -109 dBm . and the other is based on the measurement value of RXLEV/RXQUAL.. and 63. -47 dBm Reserved. parameters “RxLevThs” and “RxQualThs” are invalid. Setting: Interference boundaries 1 ~ 4 are usually set between -85dBm and -115dBm.. This parameter determines which method BTS uses as the standard to judge connection failure. If the measurement value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge connection failure. 20. 25. 2: The measurement value based on RXLEV/RXQUAL. BTS will use the flowing two parameters: “RxLevThs” and “RxQualThs”. Meanwhile. Parameter “ConFailCriterion” (Connect Failure Criterion) is one the configuration parameters of BTS. one of which is based on uplink SACCH error rate. Value range: 1: Based on uplink SACCH error rate (in order to ensure the same judgment standard in the uplink and downlink directions). Default: Interference boundaries 0 ~ 5: 0. 15. Default: 1 4) Level Threshold of Survey RLF Description: The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according to two standards. 3) Radio Link Failure (RLF) Judge Standard Description: The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according to two standards. BTS will use the same “RadioLkTimeout” parameter value and the same process as MS does. 10. Table 6-80 The value range of “Interference Boundary” Value of the interference boundary n 0 1 . If uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure (parameter ConFailCriterion is 1). If the measurement value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge connection failure (parameter ConFailCriterion is 2). and the other is based on the measurement value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. this parameter is invalid. this parameter is invalid. If the measurement value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge connection failure (parameter ConFailCriterion is 2). Table 6-81 The value range of “ Level Threshold of Survey RLF” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 . the radio link will be considered as having failed when BTS detects that the uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold or the uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. 62 63 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 10 5) Quality Threshold of Survey RLF Description: According to GSM Specifications. RxQualThs is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.. Value range: See Table 6-81.. and the other is based on the measurement value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. If uplink SACCH error rate is used as the standard to judge connection failure (parameter ConFailCriterion is 1). one of which is based on uplink SACCH error rate. Value 0 1 2 . the radio link will be considered as having failed when BTS detects that the uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold or the uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold. Page 308 of 516 . Parameter “RxQualThs” specifies the threshold of the receiving quality. the network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link fails according to two standards... Parameter “RxLevThs” specifies the threshold of the receiving level.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 rate. RxLevThs is one of the configuration parameters of BTS. 2% 3. or AGCH channel overload.4% ~ 0.2% 0. in case of the CPU overload of TRX.8% ~ 1.8% Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default: 6 6) Survey RLF Period Description: The period of the network side to check the radio link fault (in units of SACCH multi-frame). Table 6-82 The value range of “ Quality Threshold of Survey RLF” The corresponding BER range <0.4% 6. Parameter “OverloadPrd” specifies the period for TRX to send the “OVERLOAD” message. Value range: 1 ~ 31 (in the unit of 102TDMA frame) Default: 10 Page 309 of 516 .2% ~ 6. OverloadPrd is one of the configuration parameters of BTS (all TRXs under BTS use the same period). or downlink CCCH channel overload.4% ~ 12.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-82.8% 0. TRX will notify BSC of this by sending the “OVERLOAD” message periodically until the overload disappears.2% ~ 0. Value range: 1 ~ 255 Default: 10 7) Send OverLoad Msg.6% 1.4% 0. Minimal Period Description: According to GSM Specifications.6% ~ 3.8% > 12. Timeout: When the timer T3105[0] expires. Timeout: When the timer T3105[1] expires. B. B. Stop conditions of the timer: If the network receives a layer-2 frame that can be correctly decoded or receives the “HANDOVER FAILURE” message from the old channel. A. timer T3105[1] stops. T3105[1] starts. This timer is one of the configuration parameters of BTS. Start conditions of the timer: After the network side sends the “RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION” message. RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION will be sent again. Stop conditions of the timer: If the network receives a layer-2 frame that can be correctly decoded or receives “HANDOVER FAILURE” message from the old channel. Start conditions of the timer: After the network side sends the “RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message”. T3105[0] stops. This timer is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.28s Reserved. Duration represented Setting: Unchangeable. T3105[0] starts. Table 6-83 The value range of “PHY Info Message Resend Time Interval during Handover On SDCCH Channel” T3105[0] 28 other values 0. RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION will be sent again. C. Page 310 of 516 . C. Value range: See Table 6-83. Default: 28 9) PHY Info Message Resend Time Interval during Handover On TCH Channel Description: The interval of re-sending RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION during asynchronous handover of TCH channel. A. Value range: See Table 6-84.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 8) PHY Info Message Resend Time Interval during Handover On SDCCH Channel Description: The interval of re-sending “RIL3_RR PHYSICAL I”formation" message during asynchronous handover of SDCCH channel. 6-30 in the GPRS environment. 7. Duration represented Setting: Unchangeable. One cell may have 4 BCCHs at most. Fig. 6-29 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig. Default: 10 10) BA Indication (or TS No. Default: Dynamic. 6-29 Configuring a cell (7) .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-84 The value range of “PHY Info Message Resend Time Interval during Handover On TCH Channel” T3105[1] 10 other values 0. indication of BCCH) Description: The timeslot where the common control channel BCCH is located. Cell Option Params The configuration of the cell optional parameters is as shown in Fig.GSM Page 311 of 516 .1s Reserved. 6-30 Configuring a cell (7) . After receiving the “IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message. Table 6-85 The value range of “Time Interval of MS Access Attempt after an Access Page 312 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. This parameter is also one of the system control parameters and is sent to MS in the “IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message.GPRS 1) Time Interval of MS Access Attempt after an Access Failure: (T3122) Description: After the network receives the channel request message sent by MS. i. Value range: See Table 6-85. MS must wait for a time indicated by T3122 before starting a new call. Wait indication information element. the “IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message contains timer parameter T3122. the network will send the “IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT” message to the MS.e. To prevent MS from making repeated channel requests thus resulting in radio channel blocking. if there is no proper channel to be allocated to the MS. 255s Duration represented Setting: Generally. Default: 10 2) Adjacent Cell Num of neighbor Band Reported in MultiBand Description: In single-band GSM system. when MS reports the survey result of the adjacent cells to the network. Table 6-86 The value range of “Adjacent Cell Num of neighbor Band Reported in MultiBand” Value 0 Meaning MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells with the strongest NCC according to the signal level of the adjacent cells. The "MulbandReport” parameter is used to notify MS that the adjacent cell contents of multiple frequency bands shall be reported. according to actual network conditions.. MS reports the adjacent cell in the local cell frequency band. regardless of which frequency band the adjacent cells are in. and 15 ~25s for the area with high density traffic. 255 0s 1s . Value range: See Table 6-86. it only needs to report the contents of the 6 adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency band. it is recommended to set the T3122 as 10 ~ 15s. If there are still more locations remaining. 1 MS reports the survey result of one adjacent cell with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (except the frequency band of the local cell) in the adjacent cell table. In multi-band networking.. It is one of the system control parameters.. thus hoping that MS reports the survey result not only according to the signal level but also based on the frequency band of the signals. In the remaining locations. Page 313 of 516 . MS reports the remaining adjacent cells. the operator usually hopes that MS first enters into a specific frequency band during handover.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Failure” Value 0 1 .. this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. MS reports the adjacent cell in the local cell frequency band. If the operator cannot select frequency bands. This parameter determines whether it is allowed to use cell broadcast short message service or adopt DRX (discontinuous reception) mode. If there are still more locations remaining. MS reports the adjacent cell in the local cell frequency band. If there are still more locations remaining. MS reports the remaining adjacent cells. It is also necessary to configure CBCH for the Page 314 of 516 . Default: 0 3) SMS Mode in Cell Description: According to the Specifications. B. it should be set to 0. In the remaining locations. However. regardless of which frequency bands they are in.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value Meaning regardless of which frequency bands they are in. the fact that BSC can use cell broadcast short message does not mean that MS is sure to receive the broadcast short message. regardless of which frequency bands they are in. C. If the operator hopes that MS first enters into a specific frequency band. 3 MS reports the survey result of three adjacent cell with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (except the frequency band of the local cell) in the adjacent cell table. please refer to the following principles in setting the value: A. MS reports the remaining adjacent cells. it is possible to broadcast to MS in the cell some useful information such as weather forecast and traffic conditions. Generally. cell broadcast short message is also an optional service of BSC. In the remaining locations. Through this service. Setting: The setting of this parameter is related to the traffic in various frequency bands. 2 MS reports the survey result of two adjacent cells with the strongest signals in the frequency bands (except the frequency band of the local cell) in the adjacent cell table. The traffic of various frequency bands is sharply different. If the situation is between these two cases above. it should be set to 3. The traffic of various frequency bands is basically the same. DRX mode in cell broadcast short message service may save the battery of MS on one hand. Default: 1 5) MS DTX Mode (SACCH) Description: Discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the Page 315 of 516 . For MS of the new version. This parameter is one of the network function parameters. and on the other hand. Default: 0 4) MS DTX Mode (BCCH) Description: Discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message” should be broadcast to all MSs in the cell. Value range: See Table 6-87. 2: Use the cell broadcast short message procedure and adopt the DRX mode. using DTX) if BTS and TRAU provide support. “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6” message contains DtxUplinkSacch. On one hand.e. but not to adopt the DRX mode. This parameter controls the way MS uses DTX mode. Table 6-87 The value range of “ MS DTX Mode (BCCH)” Value 0 1 2 3 MS may use DTX MS should use DTX MS should not use DTX Reserved. MS can even choose to receive only “interesting” broadcast short message. and on the other hand it may be necessary to notify MS of older versions (the first stage) via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message” on SACCH. Otherwise it is set to 2 (not using DTX). 1: Use the cell broadcast short message procedure. Meaning Setting: It is usually set to 1 (i. Value range: 0: Not use the cell broadcast short message procedure.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 cell. Otherwise it is set to 2 (not using DTX). and what “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” message on SACCH contains is DtxUplinkBcch parameter. What is notified to MS of older versions (the first stage) via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6” message on SACCH. 6-32 in the GPRS environment.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 subscriber communication process. This parameter is one of the network function parameters. Default: 1 8.e. 6-31 in the GSM environment while as shown in Fig. Value range: See Table 6-88. notifying MS of the new version via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6” message on SACCH. This parameter controls the way MS of the new version uses DTX mode. Page 316 of 516 . i. Other Params The configuration of other cell parameters is as shown in Fig. using DTX) if BTS and TRAU provide support. Table 6-88 The value range of “MS DTX Mode (SACCH}” Value range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TCH/F channel MS may use DTX MS should use DTX MS should not use MS should use DTX MS may use DTX MS should use DTX MS should not use DTX MS should use DTX TCH/H channel MS should not use DTX MS should not use DTX MS should not use DTX MS may use DTX MS may use DTX MS should use DTX MS should use DTX MS should use DTX Setting: It is usually set to 1 (i.e. 6-31 Configuring a cell (8) . 6-32 Configuring a cell (8) .GSM Fig.GPRS 1) T200 Timer Page 317 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. To lighten the load of Abis interface link. Table 6-90 The value range of “Handover Pretreat and Report Period” Page 318 of 516 . each standing for the value (in 5ms) of a kind of timer. so the message amount of Abis interface becomes smaller (whether the message amount becomes smaller depends on whether the length of the message before and after pretreatment is the same). 2) Handover Pretreat and Report Period Description: Measurement report is the information of Abis interface with the biggest quantity (information amount). then report to BSC at a low frequency. Usually. After using pretreatment. we may let BTS complete the report pretreatment.e. the values of these timers cannot be modified. the frequency decreases from the original twice/s to once/2s. i. Table 6-89 The value range of “T200 Timer” Parameter SDCCH FACCH/Full rate FACCH/Half rate SACCH with TCH SAPI0 SACCH with SDCCH SDCCH SAPI3 SACCH with TCH SAPI3 1 (5ms) 1 (5ms) 1 (5ms) 2 (10ms) 2 (10ms) 1 (5ms) 2 (10ms) Default value Setting: Refer to the above table for the default settings. Value range: See Table 6-90.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: T200 (altogether 7 kinds of T200) is the timer used on various control channels in LapDm protocol of BTS. This parameter determines the use and period of pretreatment. BTS will calculate the average of its own survey data and that of MS. The period of averaging and report may be 2. 3 or 4 SACCH multi-frames (480ms). Value range: This parameter has 7 bytes. But one negative effect of pretreatment is the untimely handover control and power control and bigger possibility of disconnection. Value range: See Table 6-89. Meaning Default: 3) CCCH Structure Parameter Description: Common control channel configuration parameter CCCH_CONF. In GSM system. CCCH may be borne by one or several physical channels. BS_CCCH_SDCCH_COMB (whether used together with SDCCH). Through this parameter. Value range: See Table 6-91. and CCCH and SDCCH may share one physical channel. All traffic channels in every cell share CCCH. and averaging and report period is 4 SACCH multi-frames other values Reserved. whose main functions are to send access grant (i. Immediate assignment) message and paging message. BS_CC_CHANS (quantity of CCCHs). Depending on the configurations of traffic channels in a cell and the traffic model of the cell. 2. and averaging and report period is 2 SACCH multi-frames 3 Pretreatment. Table 6-91 The value range of “CCCH Structure Parameter” CCCH-CON F 0 One basic physical channel used by CCCH. The way the common control channels in a cell are combined depends on the “CcchConf” parameter.e. and averaging and report period is 3 SACCH multi-frames 4 Pretreatment. we can get: 1. CcchConf is one of the system control parameters. which is used together with SDCCH 3 Meaning: The number of CCCH message blocks in one BCCH multi-frame 9 Page 319 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 0 2 No pretreatment Pretreatment. This parameter is broadcast to all MSs in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” message. CCCHs mainly include AGCH (Access Grant Channel) and PCH (Paging Channel). which is not used together with SDCCH 1 One basic physical channel used by CCCH. which are not used together with SDCCH 4 Three basic physical 27 Meaning: The number of CCCH message blocks in one BCCH multi-frame 18 channels used by CCCH. 5) Cell Support Encrypt Mode Description: This is the ciphering algorithm supported by BSC. Value range: See Table 6-92. which are not used together with SDCCH Others Reserved. learn whether the cell supports the required encryption algorithm and thus give the correct response. BSC will. — Setting: The setting of CcchConf in the cell must be the same as the actual configurations of CCCHs in the cell. Page 320 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 CCCH-CON F 2 Two basic physical channels used by CCCH. by checking this parameter. Table 6-92 TRX quantity CcchConf TCH SDCCH 1 1 7 4 The value range of cell configurations 2 0 14 8 3 0 22 8 4 0 29 16 5 0 37 16 6 2 44 16 4) Resource Location Information Description: Description of the geographical place where the cell is located. which are not used together with SDCCH 6 Four basic physical 36 channels used by CCCH. which contains the required encryption algorithm. If a “BSSAP CIPHER MODE COMMAND” or “BSSAP ASSIGNMENT REQUEST” or “BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND” is received from MSC. Value range: See Table 6-93. The configuration of “GPRS Cell Reselection” is shown in Fig. 6-33 Configuring cell (9) Page 321 of 516 . 6-33. Fig. so 0 may be set as the default value. Default: 09.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-93 The value range of “Cell Support Encrypt Mode” Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bit8=1/0 Meaning Supporting/not supporting A5/1 algorithm Supporting/not supporting A5/2 algorithm Supporting/not supporting A5/3 algorithm Supporting/not supporting A5/4 algorithm Supporting/not supporting A5/5 algorithm Supporting/not supporting A5/6 algorithm Supporting/not supporting A5/7 algorithm Setting: Currently GSM in China does not use encryption. GPRS Cell Reselection. 9. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message.. a minus offset is donated. -52dB -48dB . In the C32 standard calculation. In the C32 standard calculation. +12dB +16dB . When the offset represented by this parameter is 0dB.. Table 6-95 Value range for the Temp Offset of Cell Reselection Page 322 of 516 . For the C32 standard. The related level value represented (dB) 22 23 . which is similar to the C2 standard in GSM. it need not appear in the packet system message. Value range: See Table 6-94. In the GRPS system. 31 +48dB Setting: 0 2) Temp Offset of Cell Reselection Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side... there is also a cell reselection parameter ReselOff. It is broadcast to MS in the adjacent cell option of the PSI3 message.. whose effective period is determined by the “PenaltyTime” parameter. the cell reselection will adopt C32 as the standard.. there is also a temporary offset parameter TempOffset. Table 6-94 The value range of the GPRS Cell Reselection Offset Value 0 1 . the cell reselection will adopt C32 as the standard.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1) GPRS Cell Reselection Offset Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. In GRPS.. which is similar to the C2 standard in GSM.. Value range: See Table 6-95. whose effective period is determined by the “PenaltyTime” parameter. Table 6-96 Value range for the cell reselection penalty time Value 0 1 . the cell reselection will adopt C32 as the standard. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message.. it need not be broadcast to MS in the PSI message. which causes the abnormal release in this cell. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message.. Page 323 of 516 . When the duration represented by this parameter is the default value of 5 s. When MS executes one cell reselection. In the C32 standard calculation. 320s Time length represented Setting: 0 4) Minimal interval of Cell Reselection Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. which is similar to the C2 standard in GSM. In the GRPS system.. there is also a temporary offset parameter TempOffset. 31 10s 20s .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 ??? The related level value represented (dB) Setting: The same as the offset in the C2 standard of the GSM system. a minus offset is donated. it is not permitted to reselect that cell for MS within the period of T_RESEL unless there is no other cell for selection. For the C32 standard. 3) Penalty Time of Cell Reselection Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. Value range: See Table 6-96.. 63 -48 dBm -110 dBm -108 dBm . 5) Power Level Threshold of HCS Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. Corresponding HCS Power Level Threshold Setting: 0 6) HCS Priority Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message of this cell and adjacent cells..e. the time interval is 5 s). Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: 0 Page 324 of 516 . indicating the HCS power level threshold of the cell... belonging to the HCS parameters.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-97. Table 6-97 Value range for the Minimal interval of Cell Reselection Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5s 10s 15s 20s 30s 60s 120s 300s Time interval represented Setting: 0 (i. indicating the HCS priority of the cell. Table 6-98 The value range of Power Level Threshold of HCS Value 0 1 . belonging to the HCS parameters.. Value range: See Table 6-98. Due to the fading characteristic of the radio channel. Value range: 0: Not apply. the C32 values of two cells measured at the adjacent cell boundary will have a relatively big fluctuation. Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. To reduce the impact of this issue. but also decreases the call completion rate of the system due to paging unable to be responded during MS location updating. thus resulting in MS to frequently reselect cells. MS should initialize a location updating process after cell reselection. if the original cell and destination cell belong to different location areas. Setting: 0 8) Reselection Hyst. It not only dramatically increases the signaling flow of networks. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. When MS conducts GPRS cell reselection. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. normally. 1: Apply. causing the radio resources unable to be fully utilized. Although the interval of reselecting two cells by MS will not be less than 15s. Page 325 of 516 . indicating whether to apply the CellReselHys parameter to the C31 standard. it is extremely short in terms of location updating. Value range: See Table 6-99.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 7) Reselection Hysteresis on C31 Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. called Cell Reselection Hysteresis (CRH) that requires the signal level of the adjacent cell (the location area is different from that of this cell) to be greater than the local cell signal level and its difference to be greater than the value specified by the CRH before MS starts the cell reselection process. one parameter is set in the specification. it need not be broadcast in the PSI3 message. it is suggested to increase the CRH parameters of neighboring cells with different LACs in the area. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. or if this joint place is an area where there are few slow moving objects like the highway. etc.e. It indicates a hysteresis value that will be used when MS selects a cell of another routing area in the STANDBY and READY states. When the value of this parameter is the same as that of CellReselHys. the reselection hysteresis level is between 2dB and 6dB). When the overlap coverage of the adjacent cells belonging to different location areas is rather big. i. B. the coverage hole appears. Proper adjustment is suggested for the following cases: A. Page 326 of 516 . it is suggested to increase the cell reselection hysteresis parameter. Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. the CRH is 8dB or 10dB). Value range: See Table 6-100.e. “4” or “5” is recommended (that is. C.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-99 The value range of the GPRS Cell Reselection Hysteresis Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0dB 2dB 4dB 6dB 8dB 10dB 12dB 14dB The specified hysteresis level Setting: Generally.. If the coverage of adjacent cells belonging to different LACs is poor at the joint places. it is suggested to set the reselection hysteresis parameter to 1~3 (i. 9) Route Area Reselection Hyst. When there is very large traffic in an area and the overload phenomena of signal flow frequently occurs. Page 327 of 516 . the communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication process after accessing).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-100 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The value range of the “Route Area Reselection Hyst. receiving level for enabling MS to access this system (GRPS). that is:MS Level Minimal to Access. 1: Use the positive ReselectOffset only for the adjacent cells with the Max. it is stipulated in the GSM system that the receiving level be larger than a threshold level when the MS needs to access the network.” The specified CRH level 0dB 2dB 4dB 6dB 8dB 10dB 12dB 14dB Setting: 7 10) Reselection Offset Rules Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message of this cell and the PSI3 and PSI3bis messages of the adjacent cell. it is also one of the decision standards (a parameter to calculate C31 and C32) for MS to make the cell selection and reselection. Value range: 0: Use the positive ReselectOffset for all adjacent cells. Setting: 0 11) MS Level Minimal to Access Description: It is a usage parameter at the MS side.To prevent the MS from accessing the system in case of the low receiving signal level (usually. This parameter indicates the Min. and from unreasonably wasting the radio sources of the network. indicating whether to adopt extra rules when ReselOff is used. In addition. receiving level. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-101. Page 328 of 516 . which is higher than the MS’s receiving sensitivity of -102dBm. The value range of “MS Level Minimal to Access” Corresponding level value (dBm) 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Setting: Commonly. so as to decrease the C1 and C2 values of the cell and the cell effective coverage. During the communication between MS and BTS.. the power used before receiving the network power control information is determined by MsTxPwrMaxCCH. but. this parameter can be set as 10 (i. otherwise “blind spot” will be created at the cell boundaries factitiously. If MS cannot output that power. < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 . the “RxLevAcMin” value cannot be too large. When the measure is adopted to balance the traffic. its transmitting power is controlled by the network. the cell “RxLevAcMin” may be relevantly increased. -101dBm~-100dBm) or below. it will output a power that is closest to that power. When MS receives the messages from the PBCCH channel. The network conducts the power setting for MS via the power command..e.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-101 Value 0 1 2 . the parameter of related cells can be set to 2 (i.. it is broadcast to MS in the PSI message of this cell and the PSI13 and PSI3bis messages of the adjacent cell. and for some cells with overloaded traffic.e. 12) Maximum power of the MS before it receives the network power control (MS Max TxPwr before POC by Network) Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage is not a problem in some places.. However. the recommended value should be approximate to the MS receiving sensitivity. involving in calculation of C1 and C2 values. it is recommended that the level value not exceed -90dBm. -99dBm~-98dBm). Value range: See Table 6-102. MS must output the power according to the transmitting power planned by the network.At the preliminary running stage of the network.. This parameter is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection by MS. Page 329 of 516 . Normally. the MS near BTS will interfere the neighboring channels.. you can test it in an experiment mode... If it is too small.. the MS at the cell boundary will have low access success rate. make a dial test at the cell boundary. 36 34 32 30 . 17 18 19~31 39 37 35 33 . the MS access level should be reduced as much as possible. Setting: 0 Page 330 of 516 . the HCS parameters of other cells will be ignored as well. after the parameter is set. 9 7 5 13 14 15~28 4 2 0 Setting: If this parameter is set too large. 29 30 31 0 . Principle of setting this parameter: Under the precondition that the MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed with certain access success rate. Obviously. the higher MS output power level is.. the larger the cell coverage. In practical applications.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-102 Value The value range of “MS Max TxPwr before POC by Network” MS output power (dBm) GSM900 Value MS output power (dBm) GSM1800 0~2 3 4 5 . That is. 1: To use the HCS parameters. that is. Value range: 0: Not to use the HCS parameters. indicating if the HCS parameters (PriorityClass and HCSThr) exist. and test MS access success rate and access time with different parameter settings so as to determine whether to increase or decrease the value of the parameter. all the cells use the infinite HCS signal intensity threshold.. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. 13) Use HCS Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. this parameter is recommended to set as 5 (corresponding to GSM900MS) and 2 (corresponding to GSM1800MS). If this cell does not use the HCS parameters... belonging to the HCS parameter. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 14) Description: This parameter is broadcast to MS in the SI4. SI6. MS will abandon all the TBFs that are running. SI7 and PSI3 messages and in the PSI3 and PSI3bis messages of the adjacent cells. broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message. Value range: See Table 6-103. It is used to indicate the LSA identifier of the cell. If MS is enabled to access other cells (RadAcRetry=1). MS cannot reselect the previous cell within the period of T_RESEL seconds. It is an offset value that will be used when MS is informed to conduct the LSA reselection between two cells with the same LSA priority. If there are other appropriate cells. SI6 and SI7 messages. Value range: 0: Disabled. If abnormal releases occur during the packet transmission. Table 6-103 The value range of “Offset between Same LSA Cell” Offset 0B 4B 8dB 16dB 24dB 32dB 48dB 64dB LSA Index Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Page 331 of 516 . Setting: 0 16) Offset between Same LSA Cell Description: This parameter is broadcast to MS in the SI4. Value range: 24bit valid. 15) Allow MS Attempt Access Another Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. 1: Enabled. It indicates if MS is enabled to attempt to access another cell (if any). it shall execute abnormal cell reselection and initialize the establishment of the uplink TBF in the new cell. Setting: Determined by the network operator after the planning. Page 332 of 516 . 6-34 shows the parameter configuration of the GPRS NC Survey. used to calculate the C4 standard. Table 6-104 Value range of “ MS Level Ths.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Setting: 0 17) MS Level Ths. Value range: See Table 6-104. When High Priority Cell Reselect Description: This parameter is broadcast to MS in the SI4. When High Priority Cell Reselect” Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0dB 6dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB Infinity Offset Setting: 1 10. SI6 and SI7 messages. GPRS NC Survey Fig. It is related to the RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN parameter. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. When NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0. indicating the report period of the cell reselection survey report when MS is in the packet idle mode. belonging to the NC survey parameters. 6-34 Configuring a cell (10) 1) Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Idle Mode) Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5 message. it need not be broadcast in the PSI5 message. Page 333 of 516 . Value range: See Table 6-105. 84s (default value) 7.36s 30.96s 1. belonging to the NC survey parameters. Value range: See Table 6-106.36s 30.92s 3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-105 Value range of “Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Idle Mode)” Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0. When NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0. it need not be broadcast in the PSI5 message.44s (default value) Meaning Setting: 7 2) Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Transmission Mode) Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side.48s 0.84s 7. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5 message.96s 1.72s 61.44s Meaning Setting: 3 3) Ns Survey Report Command Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. broadcast to MS in Page 334 of 516 .92s 3. indicating the report period of the cell reselection survey report when MS is in the packet transmission mode.48s 0. Table 6-106 The value range of Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Transmission Mode) Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0.68s 15.72s 61.68s 15. which are used for the cell reselection. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5. the NC survey parameters (NcNoDrxPer. Table 6-108 Value 0 1 2 3 The value range of “Network Control Command” Meaning NC0: MS controls the cell reselection. indicating the network control command used in the cell. Setting: 0 4) Network Control Command Description: This is a usage parameter of MS. Setting: 0 5) Minimal Time in non-DRX Mode Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. NC2: The network controls the cell reselection and sends the survey reports. It indicates the survey report command of MS in the cell. 1 MS shall send the survey report and/or the extended survey report to the network. belonging to the network control survey parameters. Details about further cell selection and survey are included in the PSI5 message. PSI13 and SI3 messages. the default value shall be adopted. If it is equal to NC1 or NC2. no survey report shall be sent to the network (=NC0 and EM0). indicating the minimal time within which MS shall be in the non-DRX mode after sending the NC survey report once. Table 6-107 Value 0 The value range of “NS Survey Report Command” Meaning MS controls the cell reselection (=NC0) in the packet idle and packet transmission modes. without survey reports. NcRepPerI and NcRepPerT) can be ignored. while NC survey parameter is ignored. When NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0. If is equal to NC0. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5 message. NC1: MS controls the cell reselection and sends the survey reports. belonging to the NC survey parameters. Reserved and interpreted as NC0. Page 335 of 516 . and the PSI5 message shall not be broadcast. Value range: See Table 6-107. Value range: See Table 6-108. it need not be broadcast in the PSI5 message.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 PSI1. Reserved and will be interpreted as EM0.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-109.20s 1. NccPermited. etc. When the ExtMeaOrder parameter is EM1.72s 0. Reserved. Table 6-110 Value 0 1 2 3 The value range of “Ms Extend Survey Command” Meaning EM0. belonging to the extend survey parameters. MS shall send the extend survey report to the network. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5 message. indicating the report type of the MS extend survey report. it is valid and is sent in the PSI5 message.96s 1. Page 336 of 516 . It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5 message. indicating whether MS conducts the extend survey and how to interpret the rest extend survey parameters (ExtRepType.92s The value range of “Minimal Time in non-DRX Mode” Meaning Setting: 2 6) MS Extend Survey Command Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. MS shall not conduct the extend survey. belonging to the extend survey parameters. Table 6-109 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No non-DRX mode 0. Setting: 0 7) MS Extend Survey Report Type Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. ExtRepPer. Value range: See Table 6-110.). EM1.44s 1. Value range: See Table 6-111.24s 0.48s (default value) 0. it is valid and is sent in the PSI5 message. Reserved. If the frequency points of the extend survey are in the six strongest carrier frequencies. The survey report includes the receiving signal level. belonging to the extend survey parameters. while the BSIC decoding is unnecessary. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI5 message. The report includes the receiving signal level and BSIC successfully decoded. it shall be reported. The report includes the receiving signal level and BSIC successfully decoded (if any). 1 2 3 Setting: 0 8) Extend Survey Report Interval Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. it shall be reported no matter if it succeeds in BSIC decoding. Besides. When the ExtMeaOrder parameter is EM1. indicating the report interval of the extend survey report. If the frequency points of the extend survey are in the six strongest carrier frequencies. Value range: See Table 6-112. it succeeds in BSIC decoding. and the survey of the NCC part is permitted. Type-3 survey report. the interference of each carrier frequency shall be reported too. Table 6-112 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The value range of “Extend Survey Report Interval” Meaning 60s 120s 240s 480s 960s 1920s 3840s 7680s Setting: 0 Page 337 of 516 . The frequency points of the extend survey shall be reported.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-111 Value 0 The value range of “MS Extend Survey Report” Meaning Type-1 survey report. Type-2 survey report. 6-35 Configuring cell (1) 1) T3168 Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. Table 6-113 The value range of T3168 Page 338 of 516 . time for MS to wait for the “PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT” message after it sends the “PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST” (or when the “PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK” message contains Channel Request Description IE) message. Value range: See Table 6-113. 6-35 shows the parameter configuration of the GPRS Cell Option. belonging to the GPRS cell option parameters. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. GPRS Cell Option Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 11. It indicates the Max. PSI13 and SI13 messages. Fig. 5s 1. 7 Duration represented 0. The time represented by T3192 must be less than the Page 339 of 516 ..5 s). For each received RLC data block whose FBI is 1 and which has the valid RRBP domain: A. 7 The value range of T3192 Duration represented 0. 3. 3..In the acknowledged mode. In the unacknowledged mode.5s Setting: 1 (0. Meanwhile. After T3192 expires. if MS receives the “PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT” message or “PACKET TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE” message.0s 0. if the RLC data block to be transmitted is the final downlink data block. the resources will be released and the detection of the PDCCH channel will be stopped..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 0 1 .. In this case.. the T3192 timer will be stopped and turn to the packet transmission state. MS shall send the “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE” message with the FAI domain of 1 on the uplink block specified by the RRBP domain.5s Setting: 4 (2 seconds) 2) T3192 Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. In the protection period of the T3192 timer.5s . MS shall send the “PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK” message with the FAI domain of 1 on the uplink block specified by the RRBP domain. Value range: See Table 6-114.. During the packet downlink transmission..0s 0.0s . B. MS starts the T3192 timer. Table 6-114 Value 0 1 2 . the detection will turn to the paging channel. the network will initialize the release of the downlink TBF by sending one RLC data block whose Final Block Identifier (FBI) is 1 and which has one valid RRBP domain.. 1} When MS receives the “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message so that V (S) can advance.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 protection time T3193 of the downlink TBF at the network side. belonging to the GPRS cell option parameters. 7 The value range of N3102 Value represented 4 8 12 . T3182 will be stopped. They are broadcast to MS in the PSI1.. the initial value of the timer N3102 will be set to the PanMax value. PSI13 and SI13 messages. 32 Setting: PanDec(0). Network mode 1: The network sends the CS paging message to “GPRS Page 340 of 516 .. indicating the values of PAN_DEC. belonging to the GPRS cell option parameters. Table 6-115 Value 0 1 2 . MS will conduct the cell reselection as an abnormal release. PAN_INC and PAN_MAX. When N3102≤0 is met. indicating the network operation mode in the cell. thus ensuring TFI of MS is unique at any moment. the timer T3182 will be started. They are broadcast to MS in the PSI1. PanInc(1) and PanMax(7) 4) Network Mode Description: These are the usage parameters at the MS side. N3102 Increase Step (PanInc). When MS detects the stall condition (stall condition.. which is divided into following three modes: A. 2). and N3102 Max (PanMax) Description: These are the usage parameters at the MS side. 3) N3102 Decrease Step (PanDec). V(S) = V(A) + WS). If T3182 expires. PanInc will be added to N3102 (but no more than PanMax). Value range: See Table 6-115. After receiving the “PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK” message that causes V(S) to be less than V(A) + WS. Each time MS conducts the cell reselection. MS will deduct PanDec from N3102.. PSI13 and SI13 messages. only the A interface can be used for sending the CS paging message to “GPRS attached” MS. This means that MS only needs to monitor the CCCH paging channel. which means the PCCCH channel may not be assigned for BSS . 5) Time To Non-Drx Mode Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. In this case. which is also used for the GPRS paging. Network mode 3: The network sends the CS paging message to “GPRS attached” MS over the CCCH paging channel. When the Gs interface exists. In this case. This means that MS only needs to monitor one paging channel. However.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 attached” MS over the channel the same as the GPRS paging channel (packet paging channel or CCCH paging channel). mode 2 can be set. we can use: 1) Network mode 2. When the Gs interface does not exist. This means MS must monitor two paging channels to receiving the CS or GPRS paging message (if the packet paging channel is available in the cell). when it is assigned with one packet data channel. the CS paging message is still transmitted over the CCCH paging channel. 2) Network mode 3. C. or over the GPRS traffic channel (when it is assigned with one packet data channel). the network mode 1 can be adopted. Network mode 2: The network sends the CS paging message to “GPRS attach” MS over the CCCH paging channel. NMO must be the same. Value range: Table 6-116 shows the value of the network modes: Table 6-116 Value 0 1 2 3 Network mode 1 Network mode 2 Network mode 3 Reserved The value range of the network mode Meaning Setting: By default. B. The GPRS paging message is sent over either the packet paging channel (if available in the cell) or over the CCCH paging channel. belonging to the Page 341 of 516 . Like the cells under RAC. MSC can send the CS paging message to “GPRS attached” MS through SGSN. The duration of being in the non-DRX mode is determined by the smaller value of the NON_DRX_TIMER and DRX_TIMER_MAX parameters. belonging to the GPRS cell option parameters. indicating the value of DRX_TIMER_MAX. 7 0s 1s 2s 4s . Also.. This parameter determines the time duration (time represented by BS_CV_MAX) of the timer T3198 that shall be used by MS when it acts as the sending party and the time duration (time represented by 4×BS_CV_MAX) of the timer T3200 that is used by MS when it is in the non-DRX mode. All the uplink data blocks sent by MS contain the CV (COUNT DOWN VALUE) field. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. PSI13 and SI13 messages. Value range: See Table 6-117. Blocks Transmission in Each TS Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. MS shall first enter into the non-DRX mode after changing from the packet transmission mode to the packet idle mode. Table 6-118 Value 0 1 The value range of “Max. indicating the value of the Max. Table 6-117 Value 0 1 2 3 .. Value range: See Table 6-118. PSI13 and SI13 messages. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1.. it determines the value of N3104max (=3 × (BS_CV_MAX+3) × quantity of uplink assignment time slots). The network can use that field to calculate the data blocks that need to be sent on the current TBF by using that field. Blocks Transmission in Each TS” Meaning One block (duration) One block (duration) Page 342 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 GPRS cell option parameters. 64s The value range of “Time To Non-Drx Mode” parameter Time interval represented Setting: 2 6) Max.. quantity of blocks (BS_CV_MAX) permitted to be transmitted in each Time Slot (TS). Value 0 1 Setting: 1 8) Access Burst Bit Type Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. indicating whether the 8-bit or 11-bit access burst will be used in the PRACH. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 . without any other essential difference.. belonging to the GPRS cell option parameters. Value range: See Table 6-119.. 15 . indicating the default format when MS sends the “PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT” message. The 11-bit access burst has more abundant contents than the 8-bit access burst. Fifteen blocks (duration) Setting: 15 7) Package Control Acknowledgement Default Format Description: This is a usage parameter at the RLC/MAC layer and at the MS side on BRP. The default format is RLC/MAC block. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. Table 6-120 Value 0 1 To use 8-bit access burst To use 11-bit access burst The value range of “Access Burst Bit Type” Meaning Setting: 0 12.. PSI13 and SI13 messages. GPRS Other Page 343 of 516 . belonging to the GPRS cell option parameters. Table 6-119 The value range of “ Package Control Acknowledgement Default Format” Meaning The default format is four access bursts. PSI13 and SI13 messages. Value range: See Table 6-120. PTCCH/U and PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMNT messages. ACS) is used to notify the MS whether C2 is adopted during the cell reselection.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. the cell selection and reselection of MS depend on the parameter C1 and C2. Page 344 of 516 . 6-36 Configuring cell (12) 1) Allow Send SYS16 and SYS17 of System Information on BCCH Description: According to the definition in the GSM specification. 1: MS shall derive the parameter PI related to the cell reselection and the parameters related to the C2 calculation from the rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE7 or 8 (SI7/8 Rest Octets). and is one of the cell selection parameters. and whether C2 is used as the cell reselection parameter is determined by the network operators. MS shall derive the parameter PI related to the cell reselection and the parameters related to the C2 calculation from them. This parameter is broadcast to the MS in the cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. AdditionReselPI (Additional Reselect Param Ind. 6-36 shows the parameter configuration of other GPRS parameters. Fig. Value range: 0: If the rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 (SI4 Rest Octets) exist. Setting: 0 3) Route Area Color Code Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. it will originate the “Routing area update” process just like the case where it spans two different routing areas. TC=(FN DIV 51)mod(8))) or at the BCCH Ext position (in this case one fixed AGCH block whose TC is equal to 0 is occupied). the GPRS network will allocate different RaColor values to adjacent cells with the same routing area code. Thus. It is broadcast to MS in SI3. SI4. when MS receives different RaColor values in the cells having the same routing area code.g. Otherwise. Value range: 0: To send on BCCH Norm. and can be sent either at the BCCH Norm position (in this case the BCCH block whose TC is equal to 4 is occupied. It indicates the scheduling position of SI13 on BCCH. 2) Si3 Position Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. Otherwise most of MSs (NEC) cannot access the network. to ensure MS can originate the “Routing area update” process. indicating the priority of the MS package Page 345 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Setting: Normally. the immediate assignment message) for the sending opportunity. the possibility that SI13 can be sent successfully is small as it needs to compete with other messages (e. with the usage similar to that of BTS Color Code (BCC) in the GSM system. SI7 and SI8. SI13 will have no chance to be transmitted. It is broadcast to MS in PSI13 and SI13 messages. When it is sent at the BCCH Ext position. SI7 and SI8 and in PSI3 of the adjacent cells. the system messages 7 and 8 are seldom used. broadcast to MS in SI3. In this case. 4) Priority Of Package Access Allow Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. SI4. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: Uniformly planned by the network operator. the “Quantity of access permit reserved blocks” (BsAgBlkRes in the R_BTS table) must be bigger than 0. The system information 13 is related to the GPRS service only. In some cases (cell reselection spanning BSCs). and AdditionReselPI must be set to 0. 1: To send on BCCH Ext. It indicates the Min. it is not allowed to convert one dynamic PS+CS channel into a PS channel. It shall be interpreted as that package access is not allowed in the cell. Package access allowed in the cell. It shall be interpreted as that package access is not allowed in the cell. As the total amount (16) of package system messages that can be transmitted at high rates is limited. 2 Not used. It is allowed to access the package with the priorities 1 ~ 3. It is allowed to access the packet with the priorities 1 and 2. If the idle channel number is smaller than this threshold. Not used. the PS+CS channel can be converted into the PS channel. threshold of the idle channel number in the CS mode when the network decides to convert one PS+CS channel into a PS channel. Value range: See Table 6-121.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 access allowed by the cell. if the total number of idle channels in the cell is bigger than that threshold. 3 4 5 6 7 It is allowed to access the package with the priority 1. Table 6-121 Value 0 1 The value range of “ Priority Of Package Access Allow” Meaning Package access not allowed in the cell. When one PS+CS channel in the CS mode is released. It is allowed to access the package with the priorities 1 ~ 4. and the amount of messages to be transmitted always varies since each Page 346 of 516 . Value range: 0 ~ 255 Setting: 2 6) High Rate System Information Description: This is a global process usage parameter on BRP. Setting: 7 5) Idle Channel Num Ths on CS Mode (PS+CS=>PS) Description: This is a DBS usage parameter on Pn. Its functions are similar to those of ACCESS CLASS. indicating if various PSI messages need to be sent at high rates. description of the control channel. It indicates if the transmitting period and transmission position of the cell PSI1 message. users can only roughly determine the requirements of the transmission rate of each kind of system message. Table 6-122 Value 0 1 Not transmitted at high rates It is allowed to transmit at high rates Value range of “High Rate System Information” Meaning Setting: 1 7) Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS and FUC sides. 1: PSI3. Page 347 of 516 . 5: PSI13. 4: PSI5. possible global power control parameters.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 kind of package system message has different content lengths. The “SplitPgCycle” function means that messages like “Package immediate assignment”. PSI includes the information about the cell reselection. It indicates if the “SplitPgCycle” function is supported on the cell CCCH. If only PBCCH exists. PRACH control. Setting: 0 8) PSI1 Msg. Value range: See Table 6-122. “Package immediate assignment reject”. can be sent on several BLOCKs. 3: PSI4. The package system messages corresponding to the array subscripts are as follows: 0: PSI2. Repeat Prd Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS and FUC sides.. Value range: 0: The cell CCCH does not support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE. “Package paging”. 2: PSI3BIS. broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message and in the PSI13 and SI3 messages of this cell and adjacent cells. it will be sent at a high repeat rate. the global process will dynamically determine the transmission rate of each kind of system package message according to the user requirements (analyzing according to the array subscripts 0~5 of SendSpeed in turn) and system restrictions. 1: The cell CCCH supports SPLIT_PG_CYCLE. Before the transmission. broadcast to MS in the PSI13 and SI13 messages. etc. etc. . Setting: 1 9) Support PACKET PSI STATUS Msg. indicating the current value of the PSI message saved in MS. so as to speed the background follow-up processes (otherwise the PSI message can be detected only at the time planned by the network). Table 6-123 Value 0 1 . When PsiStaInd is equal to 1. Value range: See Table 6-124. Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side and on BRP. the network can set the PSI message needed by this MS on PACCH. Repeat Prd” Meaning The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 1 multiframe. Description: PPCH load calculation period is a BRP usage parameter. 1 The network supports the “PACKET PSI STATUS” message.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-123. Then.. The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 2 multiframes. It indicates if the network supports the “PACKET PSI STATUS” message. . This function is optional... MS can send the “PACKET PSI STATUS” message to the network. 15 The value range of “ PSI1 Msg.” Meaning The network does not support the “PACKET PSI STATUS” message. Setting: 0 10) PPCH Load Calculation Prd. Table 6-124 Value 0 The value range of “Support PACKET PSI STATUS Msg. broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. Value range: 0 ~ 16 Page 348 of 516 . The PSI1 repeat period is equal to 16 multiframes. Setting: 0 13. 6-37 shows the parameter configuration of the GPRS channel. Page 349 of 516 . Vale range: 0 or 1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Setting: 10 11) PRACH Load Report Period Description: PRACH load report period Value range: 0 ~ 255 (s) Setting: 10 s 12) Initial Value Of Link Error Timer Description: Initial value of the link error timer Value range: 0 ~ 100 Setting: 20 13) Power Threshold of PRACH Load Description: Power threshold of PRACH load Value range: 0 ~ 100(%) Setting: 20 14) Support Extend Page Mode in Cell Description: To indicate if the extend paging mode is supported. GPRS Channel Fig. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. The PBCCH block is used by the package system messages transmitted at the high and low rates at the same time. Page 350 of 516 . PBCCH occupies two blocks in the multiframe. It indicates the amount of blocks used as PBCCH in a 52-multiframe (12 blocks). PBCCH occupies three blocks in the multiframe. This parameter needs to be configured together with the “PSI1_REPEAT_PERIOD” parameter in the PSI1 message.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Table 6-125 The value range of “Blocks for PBCCH in Frames” Value 0 1 2 Meaning PBCCH occupies one block in the multiframe. Value range: See Table 6-125. The message transmitted at high rate has a higher priority. one of the PCCCH structure parameters. so as to ensure both the high-rate and low-rate package system messages have the block resources for transmission. 6-37 Configuring cell (13) 1) Blocks for PBCCH in Frames Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message.. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. Table 6-126 Value 0 The value range of “Blocks for PAGCH in Frames” Meaning The amount of blocks reserved for PAGCH.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 3 Meaning PBCCH occupies four blocks in the multiframe. . one of the PCCCH organization parameters. PDTCH and PACCH is 0. The “UPLINK ASSIGNMENT” message will be sent on these fixed blocks by preference. . Setting: 5 3) Fixed Block for PRACH on PCCCH Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side.. It indicates the amount of blocks on which neither the package paging nor the PBCCH can appear in a 52.. When MS sends the channel request on the PRACH channel. 12 13~15 The amount of blocks reserved for PAGCH. so as to speed the establishment of the uplink TBF. 1 The amount of blocks reserved for PAGCH.multiframe. Page 351 of 516 .. Setting: 0 2) Blocks for PAGCH in Frames Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. It indicates the amount of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel by the PDCH channel bearing PCCCH. These blocks need to be marked with “USF=FREE”. MS can use this parameter or “USF=FREE” to determine the allocation of PRACH. PDTCH and PACCH appear. PDTCH and PACCH is 1. only PAGCH. On these blocks. Value range: See Table 6-126. The same as 0. one of the PCCCH organization parameters. PDTCH and PACCH is 12. it will wait “UPLINK ASSIGNMENT” message on all the PCCCH channels whose time slots are the same as those of the PRACH channels. The same as 0. Two attempts allowed. . Four attempts allowed. .. Table 6-128 Value 0 1 2 3 One attempt allowed. retransmission times of different priorities. 2.. 12 13~15 Meaning The amount of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel is 0. one of the PRACH control parameters. one of the PRACH control parameters. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. Times on Different Priority” Meaning Setting: 2 5) Access and Persist Level of Different Radio Priority Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. 15}. The amount of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel is 12.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-127. The first array element corresponds to the Max. For each package access attempt. times of attempts permitted of priority 1 and so on. Table 6-128 shows the value range of Max. 3. Setting: 2 4) Max Retrans. Times on Different Priority Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side... The network sets corresponding level threshold P[i](i=1.. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. times of random access attempts of MS with priorities 1 ~ 4 permitted on PRACH. Table 6-127 The value range of “Fixed Block for PRACH on PCCCH” Value 0 1 . MS will derive one random value R with even probability distribution from the set {0. Only when P[i] Page 352 of 516 .. It indicates the Max. Value range of “Max Retrans. 4) for MS of each radio priority. Seven attempts allowed.. The amount of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel is 1. Value range: This parameter is an array and the array element is 4. 1. will MS be allowed to originate the package access attempt. Value range: This parameter is an array and the array element is 4. The first array element corresponds to the access persist level of radio priority 1 and so on. As PRACH is one ALOHA channel. the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages before receiving the package assignment message so as to enhance the success probability of MS access. Table 6-129 Value range of “Access and Persist Level of Different Radio Priority” Value 0 1 . When no response to the previous channel request message is returned. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. Persist level 14 Persist level 16 Meaning Setting: 0 6) Min TS Interval of Adj Channel Requirement Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. MS normally will send the channel request message to the network on the PRACH channel.. Each time a new connection is created. Value 0 1 2 Page 353 of 516 . Value range: See Table 6-130.. Table 6-130 The value range of “Min TS Interval of Adj Channel Requirement” Meaning The amount of extended TSs is 2. one of the PRACH control parameters. The parameter TxInt is used to determine the random period of wait. The amount of extended TSs is 4. Table 6-129 shows the value range of “Access and Persist Level of Different Radio Priority”. 14 15 Persist level 0 Persist level 1 ..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 is less than or equal to R.. MS will wait a random period of time and then send the channel request message again. The amount of extended TSs is 3. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Meaning The amount of extended TSs is 5. The amount of extended TSs is 10. Each time a new connection is created. The amount of extended TSs is 25. Random Access” Value 0 1 2 3 Meaning S=12 S=15 S=20 S=30 Page 354 of 516 . The amount of extended TSs is 8. The amount of extended TSs is 6. The amount of extended TSs is 12. As PRACH is one ALOHA channel. The amount of extended TSs is 9. The amount of extended TSs is 50. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. Value range: See Table 6-131. The amount of extended TSs is 14. the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages before receiving the package assignment message so as to enhance the success probability of MS access. MS normally will send the channel request message to the network on the PRACH channel. Setting: 2 7) TS Number of Trans. The amount of extended TSs is 16. MS will wait a random period of time and then send the channel request message again. The amount of extended TSs is 32. Table 6-131 Value range of “TS Number of Trans. The amount of extended TSs is 7. The amount of extended TSs is 20. one of the PRACH control parameters. When no response to the previous channel request message is returned. Random Access Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. The parameter S is used to determine the random period of wait. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 4 5 6 7 8 9 10~15 Meaning S=41 S=55 S=76 S=109 S=163 S=217 Reserved. Fig. 6-38 shows the parameter configuration of the GPRS power control. 6-38 Configuring cell (14) Page 355 of 516 . GPRS Power Control Fig. Setting: 2 14. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. 10 11~15 Meaning α = 0..1 . PSI13 and SI13 messages.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1) MS Power Control Parameter Alpha Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side.. one of the global power control parameters and GPRS power control parameters.. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. 25 26~31 /6 /6 Multiframes with the filter period of 2(25/2)/6 Multiframes with the filter period of 2 (25/2) /6 Setting: 0 3) Filter Period of Power (Frames): Packet Transmission Mode Page 356 of 516 . one of the global power control parameters and GPRS power control parameters.0 Setting: 0 2) Filter Period of Power (Frames): Packet Idle Mode Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side.. Table 6-132 Value range of “MS Power Control Parameter Alpha” Value 0 1 . (0/2) (1/2) Value 0 1 . α = 1.. Value range: See Table 6-132. It determines the filter period of one signal power during the power control in the packet idle mode.0 α = 1. Value range: See Table 6-133.. It determines the value of the MS power control parameter Alpha(α). Table 6-133 The value range of the filter period of power (frames) in packet idle mode Meaning Multiframes with the filter period of 2 Multiframes with the filter period of 2 .0 α = 0.. PSI13 and SI13 messages.. one of the global power control parameters and GPRS power control parameters.. PSI13 and SI13 messages. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. 15 Pb = 0dB Pb = -2dB . Value range: See Table 6-134.... (25/2) (1/2) /6 /6 Setting: 0 4) PBCCH Power Decrease according to BCCH (-2dB) Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side..Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side... one of the global power control parameters and PBCCH descriptive parameters. 5) Survey Position Page 357 of 516 . Pb = -30dB Meaning Setting: When PBCCH is on the BCCH frequency. It determines the filter period of one signal power during the power control in the packet transmission mode. It determines the power decrease value corresponding to the output power of BCCH used on the PBCCH block.. Table 6-135 The value range of “ PBCCH Power Decrease according to BCCH (-2dB)” Value 0 1 . Value range: See Table 6-135. Table 6-134 The value range of the filter period of power (frames) in the packet transmission mode Value 0 1 . 25 26~31 Meaning Multiframes with the filter period of 2(0/2)/6 Multiframes with the filter period of 2 . PSI13 and SI13 messages. Pb must adopt 0. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. Multiframes with the filter period of 2 Reserved. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. the channel list of interference survey will be included. This parameter indicates whether to broadcast the optional PSI4 message. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. Setting: 0 7) Filter Const of Interference Signal Power Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side.e. If yes. Downlink survey shall be made on PDCH for the power control. It is broadcast to MS in the PSI1. Table 6-136 Value 0 1 The value range of “Survey Position” Meaning Downlink survey shall be made on BCCH for the power control. It is one of the global power control parameters. one of the global power control parameters and GPRS power control parameters. Value range: See Table 6-136. It determines a filter constant of interference signal power for the power control. Table 6-137 The value range of “ Filter Const of Interference Signal Power” Meaning Filter constant 2 (0/2) Value 0 1 Filter constant 2(1/2) Page 358 of 516 . broadcast to MS in the PSI1 message. PSI13 and SI13 messages. Setting: 0 6) Sending PSI4 Description: This is a usage parameter at the MS side. i. It determines the position where the downlink power shall be surveyed for the sake of uplink power control. one of the global power control parameters and GPRS power control parameters. INT_MEAS_CHANNEL_LIST_AVAIL. 1: To broadcast the PSI4 message. PSI13 and SI13 messages. Value range: 0: Not to broadcast the PSI4 message. Value range: See Table 6-137. 2. Configure Disturbance Cell.1 Configuring a transceiver (TRX) In the main interface (shown in Fig. select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options: Configure TRX. 6-2).1. (trxid) Description: the No.. Configure CA Frequency.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 . The radio parameters related to these options will be detailed in the following.1. 6-39 Configuring TRX 1. 15 . Configure Adjacent Cell Reselection. Configure Handover Control. 6. select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options.. Configure Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection. Select “Configure TRX” from the menu.4..4 Configuring Cell In the main interface (shown in Fig. Filter constant 2 (15/2) Setting: 0 6. as shown in Fig.. Configure Power Control. Page 359 of 516 . 6-39. of the current TRX. TRX Type (trxtype) Description: the type of TRX. and Configure Frequency Hopping System (FHS). 6-2). usually used in concentric circle. Fig. Transceiver No. Configure Adjacent Cell Handover. corresponding to this baseband TRX. 5. Description: the radio carrier No. Table 6-138 TrxType 0 1 TRX type Type Common type (outer circle) Special type (inner circle) Default: 0 3. Page 360 of 516 . Correlation RadioCarrier No. It is the internal parameter of OMCR (V2). select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. Correlation Bts Board Description: the DN of the relevant equipment under this BSS: SiteId-Rack-Shelf-Panel.1. 4. Select “Configure Disturbance Cell” from the menu. 6-40. 6. Allocation priority of the same carrier frequency type Description: the allocation priority of the carrier frequencies of the same type. 6. as shown in Fig. Correlation TelecomLapdLink DN Description: DN of Lapdlink used by baseband TRX.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-138. 6-2).4.2 Configuring a disturbance cell In the main interface (shown in Fig. 6-2).4. of the current interference cell. 2. select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. 6. 6-40 Configuring a disturbance cell 1. 6-41 Configuring CA frequency Page 361 of 516 . Description: No. Select “Configure CA Frequency” from the menu. InterferenceCell No. Relation Cell DN: Description: the DN of the external cell under this BSS: BssId-EcId.1. Fig. 6-41.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig.3 Configuring CA frequency In the main interface (shown in Fig. 2) BA frequency list Description: the list of the absolute RF channel numbers of BCCH carrier Page 362 of 516 . B. The value range of each element is 0 ~ 1023. TxPwrMax Modulate Value Description: the static power level of TRX of the cell.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1. Description: the power level of the corresponding carrier frequency. used to adjust the transmitting power of the carrier frequency. At present. and elements should be sequenced according to the following rules: A. is sequenced at the last. frequency 0. appearance of two frequencies (900M and 1800M) in the same cell is not supported. The number of valid elements (counted from the beginning) in an array is determined by the previous parameter CaFreqNum (number of cell frequencies). GSM1800M frequencies are sequenced in ascending order. Value range: 0 ~ 6 Default: 0 4. if any. standing for a frequency. This parameter is broadcast to MSs mainly to decode the Mobile Allocation (MA) table used for frequency hopping.: ID of the carrier frequency. each element of which is the size of a word (16bit). Absolute Radio Carrier 1) Cell frequency list Description: the list of the absolute RF channel numbers of various frequencies used by the cell. Carrier No. This parameter should be broadcast in some form to MSs in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1” message. Value range: 1 ~ 8 Default: dynamic 3. The GSM900 frequencies in the range of 1 ~ 124 and 975 ~ 1023 are sequenced in ascending order. 2. TxPwrMax: the power level of the corresponding carrier frequency. Value range: this parameter can be regarded as an array. “2bis” or “2ter” message.1. B.4 Configuring power control In the main interface (shown in Fig. C. Setting: This parameter must contain ARFCN of BCCH of this cell. and elements should be sequenced according to the following rules: A. Frequency 0. as shown in Fig. The value range of each element is 0 ~ 1023. standing for a frequency.4. Power Survey The parameters of Power Survey in GSM environment are shown in Fig. are lined behind 2) in ascending order. 6-2). Frequencies 512 ~ 885. 1. 6. Frequencies 975 ~ 1023 and frequency 0. This parameter should be broadcast in some form to MSs in the cell via “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE2”. each element of which is the size of a word (16bit). if any. 6-43.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 monitored by the idle MS. and those in GPRS environment are shown in Fig. Select “Configure Power Control” from the menu. are lined behind 1) in ascending order. Value range: this parameter can be regarded as an array. The number of valid elements (counted from the beginning) in an array is determined by the previous parameter BaFreqNum (number of BA frequencies). if any. 6-42. select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. is behind 975 ~ 1023. if any. 6-43. Frequencies 1 ~ 124 are lined at the head in ascending order. 6-42 and Fig. Page 363 of 516 . GSM Fig. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement Page 364 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-42 Power survey .GPRS 1) Sample Count of Uplink Level Description: In GSM system. BSC makes power control decision according to the measurement data. 6-43 Power survey . The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. BSC makes power control decision according to the measurement data. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. so it is quite accurate. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. when making power control decision. BSC. BSC. when making Page 365 of 516 . no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 3) Sample Count of Downlink Level Description: In GSM system. This size is the number of samples used in averaging.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 value resulting from complicated radio transmission. Parameter PcUlLevWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging downlink signal intensity for power control. If DTX mode is used. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. so it is less accurate. Value range: 1 ~ 32 Default: 6 2) Reserve Count of Uplink Level Description: According to GSM Specifications. Parameter PcUlLevWindow (power control uplink level average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of uplink signal level. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. BSC. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. Therefore. when averaging the measurement values. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. when averaging the measurement values. so it is less accurate. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. BSC. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 5) Sample Count of Uplink Quality Description: In GSM system. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. Therefore. BSC. Parameter PcDlLevWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging downlink signal intensity for power control. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. Value range: 1 ~ 32 Default: 6 4) Reserve Count of Downlink Level Description: According to GSM Specifications. If DTX mode is used. so it is quite accurate. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. no longer uses the original measurement data but Page 366 of 516 . BSC makes power control decision according to the measurement data. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 power control decision. when making power control decision. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. Parameter PcDlLevWindow (power control downlink intensity average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of downlink signal intensity. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. so it is less accurate. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 uses a series of average values of the measurement data. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. when making power control decision. when averaging the measurement values. BSC makes power control decision according to the measurement data. so it is quite accurate. BSC. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. If DTX mode is used. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. Value range: 1 ~ 32 Default: 6 6) Reserve Count of Uplink Quality Description: According to GSM Specifications. Parameter PcUlQualWindow (power control uplink quality average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of uplink signal quality. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 7) Sample Count of Downlink Quality Description: In GSM system. BSC. thus reducing the Page 367 of 516 . and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. Parameter PcUlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging uplink signal quality for power control. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. Therefore. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 effect of burst measurement value. Parameter PcDlQualWindow (power control downlink quality average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of downlink signal quality. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. Value range: 1 ~ 32 Default: 6 8) Reserve Count of Downlink Quality Description: According to GSM Specifications, discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. If DTX mode is used, the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode, and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots, so it is quite accurate. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots, so it is less accurate. Therefore, BSC, when averaging the measurement values, should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. Parameter PcDlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging downlink signal quality for power control. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 9) Performance Survey Report Period Description: multi-frames). Default: 10 Power control performance survey report period (51 2. Power Adjust Threshold The parameters of Power Adjust Threshold in GSM environment are shown Page 368 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 in Fig. 6-44, and those in GPRS environment are shown in Fig. 6-45. Fig. 6-44 Power adjust threshold - GSM Fig. 6-45 Power adjust threshold - GPRS 1) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Level Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are Page 369 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 obtained, power control decision can be made. One of the factors which may lead to MS (uplink) power increase. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent uplink signal intensity averages are smaller than the related threshold, then MS (uplink) transmitting power should be increased, because the uplink signals are too weak. Parameter PcUlInclLevThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcUlInclLevN defines the related N value, and parameter PcUlInclLevP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcUlInclLevP≤PcUlInclLevN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-139. Page 370 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-139 Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 Threshold 0 1 … … 62 63 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 18, P=3, N=4 2) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Downlink Level Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made. One of the factors which may lead to BTS (downlink) power increase. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent downlink signal intensity averages are smaller than the related threshold, then BTS (downlink) transmitting power should be increased, because the downlink signals are too weak. Parameter PcDlInclLevThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcDlInclLevN defines the related N value, and parameter PcDlInclLevP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcDlInclLevP≤PcDlInclLevN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-140. Table 6-140 Value range of “Threshold of Pwr.. INC due to Downlink Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 … … Threshold 0 1 62 63 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 18, P=3, N=4 3) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Level Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made. One of the factors which Page 371 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 may lead to MS (uplink) power decrease. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent uplink signal intensity averages are larger than the related threshold, then MS (uplink) transmitting power should be decreased, because the uplink signals are too strong. Parameter PcUlRedLevThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcUlRedLevN defines the related N value, and parameter PcUlRedLevP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcUlRedLevP≤PcUlRedLevN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-141. Table 6-141 Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … … Threshold 0 1 2 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 22, P=3, N=4 4) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Level Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made. One of the factors which may lead to BTS (downlink) power decrease. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent downlink signal intensity averages are larger than the related threshold, then BTS (downlink) transmitting power should be decreased, because the downlink signals are too strong. Parameter PcDlRedLevThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcDlRedLevN defines the related N value, and parameter PcDlRedLevP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcDlRedLevP≤PcDlRedLevN≤31; the value range of the threshold is in Table 6-142. Table 6-142 Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Level” Page 372 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Threshold 0 1 2 … < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … Corresponding level value (dBm) 62 63 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 22, P=3, N=4 5) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Quality Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made. one of the factors which may lead to MS (uplink) power increase. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent uplink signal intensity averages are larger than the related threshold, then MS (uplink) transmitting power should be increased, because the uplink signal quality is too poor. Parameter PcUlInclQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcUlInclQualN defines the related N value, and parameter PcUlInclQualP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcUlInclQualP≤PcUlInclQualN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-143. Table 6-143 Threshold 0 1 … Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Quality” Corresponding quality level 0 1 … BER<0.2% 0.2%<BER<0.4% … Meaning 6 7 6 7 6.4%<BER<12.8% 12.8%<BER Default: 3, P=3, N=4 6) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Downlink Quality Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made. One of the factors which may lead to BTS (downlink) power increase. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent downlink signal intensity averages are larger than Page 373 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the related threshold, then BTS (downlink) transmitting power should be increased, because the downlink signal quality is too poor. Parameter PcDlInclQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcDlInclQualN defines the related N value, and parameter PcDlInclQualP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcDlInclQualP≤PcDlInclQualN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-144. Table 6-144 Threshold Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. INC due to Downlink Quality” Corresponding quality level 0 1 2 … 0 1 2 … BER<0.2% 0.2%<BER<0.4% 0.4%<BER<0.8% … Meaning 7 7 12.8%<BER Default: 3, P=3, N=4 7) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Quality Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made. One of the factors which may lead to MS (uplink) power decrease. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent uplink signal intensity averages are smaller than the related threshold, then MS (uplink) transmitting power should be decreased, because the uplink signal quality is too good. Parameter PcUlRedQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcUlRedQualN defines the related N value, and parameter PcUlRedQualP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcUlRedQualP≤PcUlRedQualN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-145. Table 6-145 Threshold Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Quality” Corresponding quality level 0 1 0 1 BER<0.2% 0.2%<BER<0.4% Meaning Page 374 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2 … 2 … 0.4%<BER<0.8% … 6 7 6 7 6.4%<BER<12.8% 12.8%<BER Default: 3, P=3, N=4 8) Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Quality Description: according to GSM Specifications, after a series of averages are obtained, power control decision can be made.Downlink receiving quality is one of the causes for BTS (downlink) power decrease. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent downlink signal quality averages are smaller than the related threshold, BTS (downlink) transmitting power should be decreased, because the downlink signal quality is too good. Parameter PcDlRedQualThs defines the related threshold, parameter PcDlRedQualN defines the related N value, and parameter PcDlRedQualP defines the related P value. Value range: 1≤PcDlRedQualP≤PcDlRedQualN≤31; the value range of the threshold is shown in Table 6-146. Table 6-146 Threshold 0 1 2 … Value range of “Threshold of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Quality” Corresponding quality level 0 1 2 … BER<0.2% 0.2%<BER<0.4% 0.4%<BER<0.8% … Meaning 6 7 6 7 6.4%<BER<12.8% 12.8%<BER Default: 3, P=3, N=4 3. Power Control The parameters of Power Control in GSM environment are shown in Fig. 6-46, and those in GPRS environment are shown in Fig. 6-47. Page 375 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-46 Power Control parameters - GSM Fig. 6-47 Power Control parameters - GPRS 1) Power Control Object No. Description: No. of the power control object. 2) Allow Rapid Power Control Page 376 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: whether rapid power control process is allowed. Rapid power control process is an option of BSC. Rapid power control can decrease the interference of the whole system and meet the need of dynamic power control of rapidly moving MS. The amplitude of power control used by rapid power control process each time is no longer a fixed value, but a integer multiple of cell parameter power control step (increase and decrease). Parameter RapidPc determines whether rapid power control process is allowed. Value range: False: the rapid power control process is not used; True: the rapid power control process is used Fault: False 3) Max. Value of Power DEC Description: when the system can perform rapid power control for the reason of quality, to prevent MS call drop due to too rapid power decrease, the corresponding power decrease max. limit is set, corresponding to the respective quality level. E.g. PwrDecrLimit[0] determines the max. power decrease limit for (BER<0.2%) calls whose quality level is 0. Note that this parameter is valid for both uplink and downlink. Value range: This parameter can be regarded as a array with eight elements, each of which is a byte. PwrDecrLimit[n] determines the max. power decrease available to calls whose quality level is n. The value range of each element is 0 ~ 38, standing for 0 ~ 38dB Setting: 38 may be set as the default value. If performance statistics parameter shows that power decrease leads to a lot of call drops, then corresponding limits should be set according to the performance statistics parameter. Default: 38 4. Other Other parameters in GSM environment are shown in Fig. 6-48, and those in GPRS environment are shown in Fig. 6-49. Page 377 of 516 Time Interval of RxLev Power Adjust Description: this parameter specifies the minimal interval of power control.GSM Fig. 6-48 Other power control parameters .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. it is likely to receive two survey reports using Page 378 of 516 .GPRS 1) Min. Usually. 6-49 Other power control parameters . after power control. is ignored. False: do not allow downlink power control.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the original transmitting power. i. False: do not allow uplink power control. therefore there should be a minimal interval of power control. Value range: 0 ~ 32 Default: 2 2) Allow Uplink Power Control Description: whether uplink power control is allowed in the cell. Value range: True: allow downlink power control. during which signal level information etc. Table 6-147 Value 0 1 2 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB The value range of “MS TxPwr Increase Step” Step represented Default: 0 5) MS TxPwr Decrease Step Description: power decrease step.e. Default: True 4) MS TxPwr Increase Step Description: power increase step. whether power control is performed on MS. Value range: True: allow uplink power control.e. This parameter is used in both directions. The signal level information in the reports is not accurate and thus should be ignored (other information like adjacent cell information is still valid). Value range: see Table 6-147. i. Default: True 3) Allow Downlink Power Control Description: whether downlink power control is allowed in the cell. whether power control is performed on BTS. Page 379 of 516 . This parameter is used in both directions. one is the power control byte and the other is the timing advance). Value range: see Table 6-149. it will output the closest transmitting power that can be outputted. TxPwr” GSM1800 The MS output power (dBm) 36 34 32 30 … Setting: This parameter is usually set to a value identical to MsTxPwrMaxCch of the cell. if the power level of MS cannot output the power value. TxPwr Description: During the communication between MS and BTS. When the BSC controls the power. MsTxPwrMax is also a parameter used by BSC to calculate PBGT value. The MS must extract the control header from the downlink SACCH and takes the specified transmitting power as the output power. Table 6-148 Value 0 1 2 The value range of “MS TxPwr Decrease Step” Step represented 2dB 4dB 6dB Default: 0 6) MS Max. Table 6-149 GSM900 Value The MS output power (dBm) 0~2 3 4 5 … 17 18 19 ~ 31 9 7 5 39 37 35 33 … 13 14 15 ~ 28 29 30 31 0 … 4 2 0 Value The value range of “MS Max. the transmitting power of MS is controlled by the network.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: see Table 6-148. the network sets the power for MS via the power command and the command is transmitted on SACCH (the SACCH has 2 header bytes. the parameter is the maximum transmitting power that can be adopted by MS in the cell. Page 380 of 516 . one is the power control byte and the other is the timing advance). this parameter can be set to 15 ~ 28 (i. 0dBm) by default. 0 (GSM1800) 7) MS Min.e.e. TxPwr Description: During the communication between MS and BTS. the transmitting power of MS is controlled by the network. lower limit of power control) that can be used by MS in the cell. The MS must extract the control header from the downlink SACCH and takes the specified transmitting power as the output power. 5dBm) by default. Value range: see Table 6-150. if the power level of MS cannot output the power value. When BSC is performing power control. For GSM1800 cell. TxPwr Description: when BTS communicates with MS. BTS must take the transmitting power specified by the Page 381 of 516 . TxPwr” GSM1800 The MS output power (dBm) power (dBm) 0~2 3 4 … 17 18 19 ~ 31 9 7 5 39 37 35 … 13 14 15 ~ 28 29 30 31 … 4 2 0 36 34 32 … Setting: for GSM900 cell. The network sets the power of BTS through power command.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Default: 5 (GSM900). this parameter can be set to 19 ~ 31 (i. its transmitting power is controlled by the network. Default: 19 8) BS Min.e. this parameter is the minimal transmitting power (i. it will output the closest transmitting power that can be outputted. Table 6-150 GSM900 Value The MS output Value The value range of “ MS Min. the network sets the power for MS via the power command and the command is transmitted on SACCH (the SACCH has 2 header bytes. Page 382 of 516 .e. Table 6-151 Value 0 1 … Pn Pn –2dB … The value range of “ BS Min. The maximum power level of BTS is Pn. this parameter is the minimal transmitting power (i. lower limit of power control) that can be used by BTS in the cell. 6-50 Parameters of GPRS Power Control 1) Uplink Power Control Strategy Description: this parameter determines the uplink power control strategy of the GPRS.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 power command as the output power. Fig. When BSC is performing power control. TxPwr” BTS minimal power level 15 Pn –30dB Default: 15 5. GPRS Power Control The parameters of GPRS Power Control are shown in Fig. 6-50. Value range: see Table 6-151. Table 6-153 Value 0 1 2 3 Others Non-control Open loop control Closed loop control Quality-based control Reserved. Which power control mode will be used is decided by the “BTS_PWR_CTRL_MODE” parameter. Downlink power control strategy Setting: 0 3) Downlink Power Control Mode Description: the downlink power control mode adopted at the BTS side. Table 6-154 The value range of the downlink power control mode Page 383 of 516 . while mode B can only be used for the fixed allocation mode.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-152. Uplink power control strategy Setting: 0 2) Downlink Power Control Strategy Description: this parameter determines the downlink power control strategy of the GPRS. Value range: See Table 6-154. Mode A may be used for any allocation mode. The value range of uplink power control strategy. Value range: See Table 6-153. The value range of downlink power control strategy. The BTS has two power control modes: A and B. Table 6-152 Value 0 1 2 3 Others Non-control Open loop control Closed loop control Quality-based control Reserved. based on BCCH on Mode A Description: an optional downlink power control parameter. During the packet transfer mode. If P0 exists.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 0 1 MODE A B Setting: 0 4) Value of Power Dec. Value range: see Table 6-155. Table 6-155 Value 0 1 … 15 The value range of “ Value of Power Dec. the power control is not used. Value range: see Table 6-156. included in the assignment message. P0 value shall not change unless re-assignment or new assignment is established and the assignment does not include the PDCH(s) of any previous assignment. based on BCCH on Mode A” Value represented by P0 P0=0dB P0=2dB … P0=30dB Setting: 0 5) Precision Description: this parameter determines the power control precision of the GPRS. Value range: 0 ~ 31 Setting: 0 6) Receive Power Strength from MS Needed Description: this parameter is used for the uplink open-loop power control. the power control is used. otherwise. Table 6-156 Value 0 The value range of “Receive Power Strength from MS Needed” Meaning -110 dBm Page 384 of 516 . 6-2).1. as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 1 … 63 -109 dBm … -47 dBm Setting: 1 6. Description: No. the Page 385 of 516 .4. Handover Pretreatment The parameter configuration of “Handover Pretreatment” is shown in Fig. of the handover control object 2) Static state PRI of cell handover Description: According to the specification. Select “Configure Handover Control” from the menu. in the course of handover. 1. 6-51 Configuring handover pretreatment 1) Handover Control No. Fig. 6-51. 6-51.5 Configuring the handover control In the main interface (shown in Fig. select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. 5) Power of Uplink Intensity Description: according to GSM Specifications. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. you can sort on the basis of radio conditions.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 cell priority should be considered when sorting candidate cells. three factors decide sequencing of the candidate cells: priority. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. the priority and the traffic are the major impact. Therefore. Page 386 of 516 . the larger of the value. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. in case the same results come out of these two factors. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. Value range: 1 ~ 31 Default: 2 4) Reserve Count of Uplink Intensity Description: in GSM system. Parameter HoUlLevWindow (Sampling Count of Uplink Intensity) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of uplink signal intensity. Among them. when making handover decision. If DTX mode is used. BSC. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. the higher level of priority. BSC. and radio conditions. Default: 3 3) Sampling Count of Uplink Intensity Description: in GSM system. Value range: 0 ~ 7. Parameter “Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell” is the number of uplink intensity averages transferred in handover required message. traffic. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. when making handover decision. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. Value range: 1 ~ 31 Default: 2 7) Reserve Count of Downlink Intensity Description: in GSM system. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. when averaging the measurement values. Parameter “Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell” is the number of downlink intensity averages transferred in the “handover Page 387 of 516 . so it is less accurate. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. BSC. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. when making handover decision. so it is quite accurate. Parameter HoUlLevWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging uplink signal intensity for handover. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. when making handover decision. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. Therefore. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 6) Sampling Count of Downlink Intensity Description: in GSM system. BSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. BSC. “HoDlLevWindow” (averaging window of handover downlink intensity) parameter is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of downlink signal intensity. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. The “HoUlQualWindow” (handover uplink quality average window) Parameter is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of uplink signal quality. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 9) Sampling Count of Uplink Quality Description: in GSM system. when making handover decision. Therefore. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. so it is quite accurate. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. Parameter HoDlLevWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging downlink signal intensity for handover. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. when averaging the measurement values. 8) Power of Downlink Intensity Description: according to GSM Specifications.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 required” message. BSC. BSC. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. Value range: 1 ~ 31 Default: 2 10) Reserve Count of Uplink Quality Page 388 of 516 . so it is less accurate. If DTX mode is used. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. Therefore. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. so it is quite accurate. BSC. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. Parameter HoUlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging uplink signal quality for handover. Parameter “Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell” is the number of uplink quality averages transferred in “handover required” message. so it is less accurate. BSC. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: in GSM system. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. 11) Power of Uplink Quality Description: according to GSM Specifications. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. If DTX mode is used. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. when making handover decision. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 12) Sampling Count of Downlink Quality Description: in GSM system. BSC. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. Parameter HoDlQualWindow (handover downlink Page 389 of 516 . BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. when averaging the measurement values. when making handover decision. Value range: 1 ~ 32 Default: 2 13) Reserve Count of Downlink Quality Description: in GSM system. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 quality average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of downlink signal quality. so it is less accurate. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. Value range: 1 ~ 3 Default: 2 Page 390 of 516 . thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. BSC. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. when making handover decision. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. If DTX mode is used. Parameter HoDlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging downlink signal quality for handover. 14) Power of Downlink Quality Description: according to GSM Specifications. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some timeslots. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. BSC. when averaging the measurement values. Therefore. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. Parameter “Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell” is the number of downlink quality averages transferred in “handover required” message. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. so it is quite accurate. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process that the system does not transmit signals in the speech pause period during the subscriber communication process. One is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. Parameter “Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell” is the number of adjacent cell intensity averages transferred in “handover required” message. and the other is the average of the measurement results of some special timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. BSC. The first type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of all timeslots.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 15) Sampling Count of Adjacent Cell Description: in GSM system. when making handover decision. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. BSC. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data according to the actual conditions and use the data to calculate the average value. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. the measurement data reported to BSC include two types. so it is quite accurate. Parameter NCellWindow (adjacent cell average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of adjacent cell signal intensity. when making handover decision. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. 17) Power of Adjacent Cell Description: according to GSM Specifications. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. If DTX mode is used. But the second type of measurement data is the average of the measurement results of some Page 391 of 516 . This size is the number of samples used in averaging. Value range: 1 ~ 31 Default: 2 16) Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell Description: in GSM system. when making handover decision. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value. The weight for the second type (for some timeslots) of measurement data is 1 by default. BSC. smaller than -110dBm). we suppose occasional 0’s are allowed and are not used in averaging. 18) Sampling Count of Distance Description: in GSM system. so it is less accurate. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. when making handover decision. This size is the number of samples used in averaging. Parameter “Reserve Count of Distance” is the number of distance averages transferred in “handover required” message. BSC. and the measurement data of the missing cell shall thus be recorded as 0 (i. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. Value range: 1 ~ 31 Default: 2 19) Reserve Count of Distance Description: in GSM system.e. MS can only report the measurement data of six adjacent cells with the strongest signal strength. 20) Allow Zero Description: according to GSM Specifications. To avoid the bad effect of 0 on averaging. so the measurement results of adjacent cells recorded by BSC may be discontinuous. thus reducing the effect of burst measurement value.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 timeslots. should use different weights for the two types of measurement data. Therefore. Parameter DistanceWindow (Sampling Count of Distance) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of the distance from MS to BTS (actually the timing ahead TA). Parameter “Power of Adjacent Cell” determines the weight for the first type (for all timeslots) of measurement data when averaging adjacent cell signal intensity. but excessive 0’s indicate that the signals of this adjacent cell Page 392 of 516 . BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. To avoid the bad effect of burst measurement value resulting from complicated radio transmission. BSC makes handover decision according to the measurement data. no longer uses the original measurement data but uses a series of average values of the measurement data. BSC. when averaging the measurement values. The uplink RxLev is one of the causes for the handover. i. N value and P value of Uplink RxLev Description: according to GSM Specifications. Fig. To be specific. Handover Level The parameters of Handover Level are shown in Fig. the sampling values are much credible and the measurement average = sum of the reported values / (NCellWindow – the number of 0’s). handover decision can be performed. during averaging.e.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 are not good. 6-52 Configuring handover level 1) Level. Value range: 0 ~ 31 Default: 1 2. in averaging. after a series of average values are obtained. 6-52. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent uplink signal intensity averages are smaller than the Page 393 of 516 . these sampling values are hardly credible and the measurement average = sum of the reported values / NCellWindow. Allowed. if the number of 0’s in the sampling count goes beyond Zero. If the number of 0’s in the reported values does not go beyond ZeroAllowed. can be ignored. Parameter Zero Allowed is used to determine how many 0’s are normal. Parameter HoUlLevThs defines the related threshold. Page 394 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 related threshold. parameter HoUlLevN defines the related N value. Value range: 1≤HoUlLevP≤HoUlLevN≤31. and parameter HoUlLevP defines the related P value. level values are shown in Table 6-157. because the uplink signal level is too low. handover shall be performed. handover shall be performed. power control is preferred. The downlink RxLev is one of the causes for the handover. and parameter HoDlLevP defines the related P value. then handover is necessary. after a series of average values are obtained. N=4 2) Level. N value and P value of Downlink RxLev Description: according to GSM Specifications. Default: 10. Table 6-158 Value 0 1 2 … < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … The value range of “Downlink RxLev Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Setting: usually the value of HoDlLevThs should be smaller than the Page 395 of 516 . range: 1≤HoDlLevP≤HoDlLevN≤31. i. Parameter HoDlLevThs defines the related threshold. because the downlink signal level is too low.e.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-157 Value 0 1 … The value range of “Uplink RxLev Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 … 62 63 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Setting: usually the value of HoUlLevThs should be smaller than the threshold (PcUlInclLevThs parameter in R_POC table) for uplink power control (increase). handover decision can be performed. P=3. parameter HoDlLevN defines the related N value. level values are shown in Table 6-158. If power control does not work. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent downlink signal intensity averages are smaller than the related threshold. after a series of average values are obtained.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 threshold (PcDlInclLevThs parameter in R_POC table) for downlink power control (increase). Note that it is 3dB greater than the value of RxLevAccessMin of the cell. power control is preferred. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent uplink signal quality averages are larger than the related threshold. If power control does not work. then handover is necessary. handover decision can be performed. power control is preferred. i. N value and P value of Downlink RxQual Page 396 of 516 . This parameter can be set to 15 (i. If power control does not work. Default: 4. level values are shown in Table 6-159. parameter HoUlQualN defines the related N value. because the uplink signal quality is too poor.8% … Meaning 6 7 6 7 6. N value and P value of Uplink RxQual Description: according to GSM Specifications.8%<BER Setting: usually the value of HoUlQualThs should be greater than the threshold (PcUlInclQualThs parameter in R_POC table) for uplink power control (increase). P=3. Value range: 1≤HoUlQualP≤HoUlQualN≤31.4%<BER<12.e.e. i. P=3. N=4 3) Level. Default: 15.4% 0.4%<BER<0. handover shall be performed.2% 0. Table 6-159 Value The value range of “Uplink RxQual Level” Corresponding quality level 0 1 2 … 0 1 2 … BER<0. N=4 4) Level. then handover is necessary. Parameter HoUlQualThs defines the related threshold. The uplink RxQual is one of the causes for the handover.2%<BER<0.e.8% 12. -96dBm ~ -95dBm) by default. and parameter HoUlQualP defines the related P value. handover decision can be performed. The downlink RxQual is one of the causes for the handover. parameter IntraHoUlLevN defines the related N value. The decision process is like this: if the uplink quality condition for handover is met and P out of N recent uplink signal intensity averages are larger than the related threshold. after a series of average values are obtained. N=4 5) Level. then handover is necessary. and parameter HoDlQualP defines the related P value. after a series of average values are obtained.8%<BER Setting: usually the value of HoDlQualThs should be greater than the threshold (PcDlInclQualThs parameter in R_POC table) for downlink power control (increase). P=3.4%<BER<0. Default: 4.4% 0. handover shall be performed.e. Value range: 1≤HoDlQualP≤HoDlQualN≤31.2% 0. because the uplink (co-frequency) interference is too serious. Parameter IntraHoUlLevThs defines the related threshold. The uplink (co-frequency) interference is one of the causes for handover. handover shall be performed. power control is preferred. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent downlink signal quality averages are larger than the related threshold. handover decision can be performed. i.8% … Meaning 6 7 6 7 6.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: according to GSM Specifications. and Page 397 of 516 . Table 6-160 Value The value range of “Downlink RxQual Level” Corresponding quality level 0 1 2 … 0 1 2 … BER<0. N value and P value of Uplink RxLev of Internal Handover Description: according to GSM Specifications.2%<BER<0.4%<BER<12. If power control does not work. because the downlink signal quality is too poor. Parameter HoDlQualThs defines the related threshold. level values are shown in Table 6-160.8% 12. parameter HoDlQualN defines the related N value. Value range: 1≤IntraHoDlLevP≤IntraHoDlLevN≤31. Parameter IntraHoDlLevThs defines the related threshold. there will be an cell internal handover. and parameter IntraHoDlLevP defines the related P value. level values are shown in Table 6-161. If this handover condition is met. Table 6-161 Value 0 1 2 … < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … Levels of “Uplink RxLev of Internal Handover” Corresponding level value (dBm) 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Setting: usually the value of IntraHoUlLevThs should be greater than the threshold (PcUlRedLevThs parameter in R_POC table) for uplink power control (decrease). there will be an cell internal handover. parameter IntraHoDlLevN defines the related N value. If this handover condition is met. N value and P value of Downlink RxLev of Internal Handover Description: according to GSM Specifications. handover shall be performed. The decision process is like this: if the downlink quality condition for handover is met and P out of N recent downlink signal intensity averages are larger than the related threshold. threshold values are shown in Table 6-162. after a series of average values are obtained. Page 398 of 516 . handover decision can be performed. The downlink co-frequency interference is one of the causes for handover. Value range: 1≤IntraHoUlLevP≤IntraHoUlLevN≤31. Default: 35. N=4 6) Level. because the downlink co-frequency interference is too serious.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 parameter IntraHoUlLevP defines the related P value. P=3. Value range: 1≤GoodCiP≤GoodCiN≤31. a handover from the common TRX to the special TRX shall be performed for Good C/I Parameter GoodCiThs defines the related threshold. after a series of averages are obtained. P=3. Table 6-163 Value range of “Level of C/I Allow to Access Special TRX” Value 0 1 … -127Db -126dB … Corresponding C/I value 255 128dB Page 399 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-162 Value range of “Level of Downlink RxLev of Internal Handover” Value Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … … 0 1 2 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Setting: usually the value of IntraHoDlLevThs should be smaller than (or equal to) the threshold (PcDlRedLevThs parameter in R_POC table) for downlink power control (decrease). N=4 7) Level. level values are shown in Table 6-163. N value and P value of C/I Allow to Access Special TRX Description: If the system adopts concentricity technology. Default: 40. Good C/I of the current special layer frequency is one of the causes for concentric handover. and parameter GoodCiP defines the related P value. parameter GoodCiN defines the related N value. if P out of N recent C/I values are larger than the relevant threshold. The decision process is like this: when the current call is at the common TRX (frequency). handover decision can be made. and the level ranges 1 ~ 31. N value and P value of C/I When Allow Handover From Special TRX Description: If the system adopts concentricity technology.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Default: 133. If the measured signal intensity of a call is lower than this threshold continuously. parameter BadCiN defines the related N value. level values are shown in Table 6-164. The decision process is like this: when the current call is at the special TRX (frequency). P=3. if P out of N recent C/I values are smaller than the relevant threshold. Candidate cell is a special associated cell in the adjacent cell. handover decision can be made. N=4 8) Level. Value range: 1≤BadCiP≤BadCiN≤31. then the condition for rapid attenuation handover is satisfied. after a series of averages are obtained. Page 400 of 516 . RapidHoN is a counter value.e. Table 6-164 Value range of “Level of C/I When Allow Handover From Special TRX” Value 0 1 2 … -127dB -126dB -125dB … Corresponding C/I value 255 128dB Default: 130. P=3. Bad C/I of the current special layer frequency is one of the causes for concentric handover. RapidHoThs is a signal intensity threshold. the minimal times when the measured value of the signal intensity of the call is continually lower than the threshold. N=4 9 Level and N value of Rapid Handover Description: some parameters are needed in rapid attenuation handover. and parameter BadCiP defines the related P value. a handover from the special TRX to the common TRX shall be performed for Bad C/I Parameter BadCiThs defines the related threshold. i. Value range: The value range of RapidHoThs is shown in Table 6-165. Default: 10.e. N=1 10) Level of Macro-Micro Handover Description: some parameters are needed during macro-micro handover. Parameter RapidHoN should be set in such a way as to ensure that rapid handover is faster than the ordinary signal level handover. The macro-micro handover level is a signal intensity threshold.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-165 Value 0 1 … The value range of “Rapid Handover Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 … 62 63 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Setting: parameter RapidHoThs may be set to 15 (i. -96dBm ~ -95dBm) by default like the level threshold of ordinary handover. When the measured value of the signal intensity of an adjacent micro cell is continuously larger than the MacroMicroHoThs value (threshold) for a number of times. the call can be handed over to this adjacent micro cell. Table 6-166 The value range of “Macro-Micro Handover Level” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 … … Value 0 1 61 62 63 -50 ~ -49 -49 ~ -48 > -48 Default: 20 11) N value of Macro-Micro Handover Page 401 of 516 . That may enable a slowly moving MS to enter the micro cell. The times are determined by MacroMicroHoN of each adjacent cell Value range: see Table 6-166. Table 6-167 DistanceThs The value range of “Distance Handover Level” Corresponding timing advance Corresponding distance from MS to BTS (approx. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent time advance (distance) averages are larger than the related threshold. handover shall be performed.100m 1. This parameter describes the counter value that the local cell. handover decision can be performed.N value of macro-micro handover (MacroMicroHoN) is a counter value that is related to a given adjacent micro cell. The distance from the MS to the BTS is also one of the causes for the handover. after a series of average values are obtained. the call can be handed over to this adjacent micro cell. refer to Table 6-167. When the measured value of the signal intensity of this adjacent micro cell is continuously larger than the MacroMicroHoThs value for MacroMicroHoN times. and parameter DistanceP defines the relevant P value.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: some parameters are needed during macro-micro handover. There is a signal intensity threshold and a counter value. Value range: 1≤DistanceP≤DistanceN≤32.Parameter DistanceN defines the relevant N value. should use. Default: 2 12) P value and N value of Distance Handover Description: according to GSM Specifications. Value range: 1 ~ 255 Setting: The setting of the parameter MacroMicroHoN in the local micro cell is related to the local cell size and the standard used in measuring MS moving speed. That may enable a slowly moving MS to enter the micro cell layer. because the MS goes beyond the service coverage of the cell. as a micro cell.650m Page 402 of 516 .) 0 1 2 … 0 1 2 … 550m 1.650m … 63 63 34. because the MS goes beyond the service coverage of the cell.100m … Corresponding time advance Page 403 of 516 . handover shall be performed. Value range: see Table 6-168. Table 6-168 Value 0 1 … 62 62 0 1 … 34.Parameter DistanceThs defines the relevant threshold. The decision process is like this: if P out of N recent time advance (distance) averages are larger than the related threshold. Fig. handover decision can be performed.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Default: P=3. N=4 3. The distance from the MS to the BTS is also one of the causes for the handover. 6-53 Configuring handover condition 1) Time Advance (DistanceThs) Description: according to GSM Specifications. Handover Condition The parameters of Handover Condition are shown in Fig. after a series of average values are obtained. 6-53.) 550m 1. TA to allow MS access.100m The value range of “Time Advance” Corresponding distance from MS to BTS (approx. DistanceThs is also used as max. then to those on the same layer. In addition. The next handover is allowed only if the time from the last handover of MS is longer than that time length. Table 6-169 Value 0 1 … 0s 1s … The value range of “Minimal Interval” Duration represented 31 31s Setting: this parameter can be set as 5 by default for a macro cell. Value range: see Table 6-169. This parameter defines a time length. a micro cell has its own handover policies. First hand over to adjacent cells on the upper layer of the local cell. there are three options in selecting and sequencing the candidate cells for calls: A.650m Setting: the threshold parameter may be set to 63 by default. Page 404 of 516 . Default: 5 3) Hierarchy Priority Choose Parameter: for the level/quality handover.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 63 63 34. B. but can only be set as 0 for a micro cell. the system may restrict frequent inter-cell handover via parameter HoMinInterval so as to avoid effect on the user’s communication quality and system performance. Note that this parameter is only valid for inter-cell handover. but invalid for ordinary intra-cell handover or intra-cell concentric handover. Description: if level/quality handover (signal level and signal quality) condition is satisfied. and finally to other adjacent cells. 2) Minimal Interval Description: to prevent an MS just handed over to a cell from being handed over to another cell immediately (this case often happens on the border of two cells). then to those on the upper layer. so this parameter is only valid for macro cell layer or its upper layers. First hand over to adjacent cells on the same layer of the local cell. and finally to other adjacent cells. then to those on the upper layer. All adjacent cells are treated alike. then to those on the same layer. and finally to other adjacent cells. Setting: for a micro cell. this parameter has a priority higher than that of the adjacent cell. During related level/quality handover control performed by the service process. Value range: See Table 6-170. first hand over to the macro cell layer if any call in a micro cell needs to be handed over because of signal quality or intensity. this parameter is usually set to 2 (the second option). that is.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 C. standard PBGT handover needs some restrictions or controls. Table 6-170 Value 0 The value range of “Hierarchy Can Use standard PBGT HO” Meaning 0: Disallow PBGT handover to any adjacent cell on the same layer with different frequencies 1: Allow PBGT handover to a adjacent cell on the same layer with different frequencies 1 0: Disallow PBGT handover to the adjacent cell without hierarchy 1: allow PBGT handover to the adjacent cell without hierarchy 2 0: Disallow PBGT handover to any adjacent cell on the upper layer 1: Allow PBGT handover to a adjacent cell on the upper layer 3 0: Disallow PBGT handover to any adjacent cell on the lower layer 1: Allow PBGT handover to a adjacent cell on the lower layer Page 405 of 516 . 4) Hierarchy Can Use standard PBGT HO Description: in multi-layer network and dual-band network applications. 3 (ALL_LAYER): all adjacent cells are treated alike. this parameter is usually set to 1 (the first option). This parameter determines which of the above options is selected. and finally to other adjacent cells. that is. Parameter PbgtHoLayer is used to control the applications of PBGT handover. For a macro cell. Value range: 1 (UPPER_LAYER): priority is given to adjacent cells on the upper layer. first hand over to another macro cell if any call in a macro cell needs to be handed over because of signal quality or intensity. 2 (SAME_LAYER): priority is given to adjacent cells on the same layer. Value range: See Table 6-172. The decision process is like this: if the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is larger than the relevant threshold of this cell. The PBGT value of an adjacent cell is also one of the causes for handover. handover decision can be performed. handover decision can be performed. Table 6-172 The value range of “Micro Level of Quality Handover” Value 0 1 Value represented Page 406 of 516 . Table 6-171 The value range of “Minimal PBGT Threshold” Value 0 1 … … Value represented 47 48 Default: 30 6) Micro Level of Quality Handover Description: according to GSM Specifications. after a series of average values are obtained. The parameter HoMarginRxQual is the threshold that must be used during the handover decision when an adjacent cell wants to hand over to this cell via signal quality. Value range: See Table 6-171. handover shall be performed to find a better cell. after a series of average values are obtained. In handover because of quality.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Default: 0 5) Minimal PBGT Threshold Description: according to GSM Specifications. The parameter HoMarginPbgt is the threshold that must be used during the handover decision when an adjacent cell wants to hand over to this cell via PBGT. adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced. This indicates that MS is at the edge of the cell. Handover may occur if RxLevMin of MS required by the adjacent cell is smaller than RxLevMin of MS required by this cell. The parameter HoMarginRxLev is the threshold that must be used during the handover decision when an adjacent cell wants to hand over to this cell via signal level. In handover because of level. after a series of average values are obtained. Page 407 of 516 . only adjacent cells larger than RxLevMin can become candidate cells for handover. 9) Level of Minimal RxLev Description: the minimum receiving intensity level (on BCCH channel) needed to allow MS to hand over to the cell. Value range: See Table 6-173. handover decision can be performed.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 … … 47 48 Default: 30 7) Minimal Threshold of RxLev HO Description: according to GSM Specifications. adjacent cells should be screened and sequenced. MS in the cell constantly monitors the intensity on the BCCH channel of the adjacent cell. However. This is one of the parameters in priority cell judgment in the handover control process. Table 6-173 The value range of “Minimal Threshold of RxLev HO” Value 0 1 … … Value represented 48 Default: 30 8) Maximal TxPwr Description: the maximum transmitting power that MS can use in adjacent cells. there are four handover modes: A. Allow pseu-synchronization handover: the MS can figure out the time advance of the destination cell. Allow synchronization handover: the time advance of the destination cell is the same as that of the source cell. Table 6-175 Position Bit 1 The value range of “Handover Method” Meaning 1: Allow synchronous handover 0: Disallow synchronous handover Bit 2 1: Allow asynchronization handover 0: Disallow asynchronization handover Page 408 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: See Table 6-174. Table 6-174 Value 0 1 2 … The value range of “Level of Minimal RxLev” Corresponding level value (dBm) < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … 63 > -48 Default: 15 10) Handover Method (HoPatternInd) Description: according to the Specifications. D. Allow pre-synchronization handover: the BSC knows the time advance of the destination cell. Allow asynchronization handover: the time advance of the destination cell cannot be known. This parameter determines what handover modes BSC can use. C. B. Value range: See Table 6-175. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Bit 3 1: Allow pseu-synchronization handover 0: Disallow pseu-synchronization handover Bit 4 1: Allow pre-synchronization handover 0: Disallow pre-synchronization handover Bit 5 ~ 8 Reserved, always 0 Setting: 1 and 2 may usually be set to False. If partial handover speeds are to be accelerated, 3 may also be set to False. At present 4 is always set to True. Default: allow synchronization handover: True; allow asynchronization handover: True; allow pseu-synchronization handover: False; allow pre-synchronization handover: False. 4. Handover Control The parameters of Handover Control are shown in Fig. 6-54. Fig. 6-54 Configuring handover control parameters Description: multiple handover trigger conditions are defined in the Specifications, and the introduction of micro cells also brings many handover algorithms. Except for some basic types of handover based on receiving intensity and receiving quality, some other optional types of Page 409 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 handover are not always adopted in the cell. Parameter HoControl determines whether to implement other types of handover in the cell. Value range: HoControl is a 16-bit bitmap, as shown in Table 6-176. Page 410 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-176 Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1: Allow SDCCH handover 0: Disallow SDCCH handover 1: Allow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference 0: Disallow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference 1: Allow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference 0: Disallow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference 1: Allow handover due to distance 0: Disallow handover due to distance 1: Allow standard PBGT handover 0: Disallow standard PBGT handover 1: Allow automatic handover base on traffic 0: Disallow automatic handover base on traffic 1: Allow handover based on direction 0: Disallow handover based on direction 1: Allow concentric handover 0: Disallow concentric handover 1: Allow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference between super TRX channels 0: Disallow intra-cell handover due to downlink interference between super TRX channels 10 1: Allow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference between super TRX channels 0: Disallow intra-cell handover due to uplink interference between super TRX channels 11 1: Allow PBGT handover between adjacent cells in TRX channel 0: Disallow PBGT handover between adjacent cells in TRX channel 12 13 14 15 16 1: Allow dynamic adjustment of handover priority 0: Disallow dynamic adjustment of handover priority 1: Allow rapid handover 0: Disallow rapid handover 1: Allow macro-micro delay handover 0: Disallow macro-micro delay handover 1: Allow micro-micro delay handover 0: Disallow micro-micro delay handover Reserved, always 0 The value range of HoControl Meaning Setting: positions 1 and 4 may usually be set to True, 2 and 3 to False, 5 to False, 6 to False when multi-layer or dual-band network is used, 7 to True, 8, 9 and 10 depending on specific conditions, usually to True. For a micro cell, Page 411 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 position 15 shall be set to False and 14 to True. For a macro cell, position 14 shall be set to False and 15 to True. 12 and 3 are usually set to True and 11 to False. 5. Other The other parameters are shown in Fig. 6-55. Fig. 6-55 Configuring other parameters 1) Handover Failure Penalty Period Description: a protection period for preventing immediate handover after handover failure. Unit time is the period of survey or pretreatment survey report. Value range: 1 ~ 255 Default: 7 2) Allowed Dynamic Priority Difference Description: dynamic priority difference between the destination cell and the local cell that can be tolerated during handover. In the algorithm of the cell handover, check in turn the tolerable dynamic priority difference, tolerable power budget difference, moving direction of MS, etc. Page 412 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: 1 ~ 7 Default: 1 3) Allowed PBGT Difference Description: Allowable power budget difference between the destination cell and this cell during handover. Value range: 1 ~ 20 Default: 3 4) Control Value of Handover on Traffic (hierarchy) Description: the layered control value for traffic handover, i.e. which layer should be preferred for handover Value range: 0 ~ 3 Default: 1 (at the same layer) 5) Control Value of Handover on Traffic (frequency) Description: the layered control value for traffic handover, i.e. which frequency band should be preferred for handover. Value range: 0 ~ 1 Default: 0 6) Threshold of Handover on Traffic Description: the threshold at which the database gives an alarm on the traffic of a cell. Value range: 30 ~ 100 Default: 70 7) Default Minimal RxLev. Description: the default minimum receiving level threshold for handover to the undefined adjacent cell. Value range: 15 8) Default Maximal TxPwr. Description: the default maximum transmitting power needed by MS in the undefined adjacent cell. Page 413 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value range: 15 9) Default Minimal PBGT Threshold Description: the default minimum receiving intensity threshold needed to hand over to the undefined adjacent cell. Value range: 15 6.1.4.6 Configuring adjacent cell handover and reselection In the main interface (shown in Fig. 6-2), select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. Select “Configure AdjCell handover and reselection”, as shown in Fig. 6-56. Fig. 6-56 Configuring adjacent cell handover and reselection 1. Adjacent Cell Handover Object No. (hrid) Description: the unique ID of the adjacent cell handover and reselection object. Value range: 65 ~ 96 2. Handover Priority Description: according to the Specifications, during the handover, the cell priority should be considered when sequencing candidate cells. Therefore, three factors decide the sequencing of the candidate cells: priority, traffic, and radio conditions. Among them, Page 414 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 the priority and the traffic are the major factors; in case the same results come out of these two factors, you can sequence them on the basis of radio conditions. Value range: 0~ 7; the larger the value, the higher cell priority. Default: 3. 3. Adjacent Cell Max TxPwr. Description: during the communication between MS and BTS, the transmitting power of MS is controlled by the network. The network sets the power for MS via the power command and the command is transmitted on SACCH (the SACCH has 2 header bytes, one is the power control byte and the other is the timing advance byte). The MS must extract the power control header from the downlink SACCH and takes the specified transmitting power as the output power; if the power level of MS cannot output the power value, it will output the closest transmitting power that can be output. When the BSC controls the power, this parameter is the maximum transmitting power that can be adopted by MS in the cell. MsTxPwrMax is also a parameter for BSC to calculate the PBGT value. Value range: See Table 6-177. Table 6-177 The value range of “ Adjacent Cell Max TxPwr.” GSM1800 Value Output power of the MS (dBm) 29 30 31 0 … 36 34 32 30 … GSM900 Value Output power of the MS (dBm) 0~2 3 4 5 … 17 18 19 ~ 31 39 37 35 33 … 9 7 5 13 14 15 ~ 28 4 2 0 Setting: this parameter is usually set as the same value as Page 415 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 MsTxPwrMaxCch (the maximum power level of the control channel in a cell). 4. Min RxLev Needed Description: the minimal receiving level that allows MS to access the cell. To prevent the MS from accessing the system in case of the low receiving signal level (usually, the communication quality cannot guarantee normal communication process after accessing) and from unreasonably wasting the radio source of the network, it is stipulated in the GSM system that the receiving level be larger than a threshold level when the MS needs to access the network, that is: Min RxLev Needed (the minimal receiving level that allows MS to access the cell). In addition, it is also one of the standards (a parameter to calculate C1 and C2) for MS to make the cell selection and reselection. This parameter will be broadcast to all the MSs in a cell via the “RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3” and “TYPE4” messages. RxLevMin is also one of the cell selection parameters. Value range: See Table 6-178. Table 6-178 Value 0 1 2 … 62 63 < -110 -110 ~ -109 -109 ~ -108 … -49 ~ -48 > -48 The value range of “Min RxLev Needed” Corresponding level value (dBm) Setting: generally, the recommended value should be approximate to the MS receiving sensitivity. For some cells with overloaded traffic, the “RxLevAccessMin” of the cell may be relevantly increased, so as to decrease the C1 and C2 values of the cell and the cell effective coverage. However, the “RxLevAccessMin” value cannot be too large, otherwise “blind spot” will be created at the cell boundaries factitiously. When this measure is adopted to Page 416 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 balance the traffic, it is recommended that the level value not exceed -90dB.At the network’s preliminary running stage, this parameter can be generally set as 10 (i.e., -101dBm~-100dBm) or below, which is higher than the MS’s receiving sensitivity -102dBm; However, when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not a problem, this parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB). Default: 15 5. Cell Layer Num Description: with the introduction of multi-layer network technology and dual-frequency network technology, the multi-layer radio coverage will be formed in the same physical area, so the various corresponding handover strategies are introduced. The detailed description of handover policies is outside the scope of this document. However, in a word, limiting the PBGT handover defined in the Specifications to one layer can reduce the number of handovers during the call, thus improving the system reliability and communication quality. Policies of handover between a macro cell layer and a micro cell layer mainly depend on the moving speed of the MS: an MS with a higher moving speed will try its best to stay at the macro cell layer (upper layer of the micro cell layer), and an MS with a lower moving speed will try its best to enter the micro cell layer (lower layer of the macro cell layer). Only in the case of non-PBGT handover and emergency, will the undefined cell of the service cell be considered as a candidate cell. Value range: this parameter may be regarded as an array, and each element determines the hierarchical relationship between the relevant adjacent cell and the local cell. The number of cells in the array is decided by the “NCellNum” parameter. The value range of each element is shown in Table 6-179. Page 417 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Table 6-179 Value 0 1 N, undefined The value range of cell layers Meaning SAME, the adjacent cell and the local cell are in the same layer (it can perform the PBGT handover) 2 UPPER, the adjacent cell is the upper layer of the local cell (when the local cell is a micro cell) 3 LOWER, the adjacent cell is the lower layer of the local cell (when the cell is a macro cell) others Reserved. Setting: the following standards can be referred to when you make the settings, as shown in Table 6-180: Table 6-180 Adjacent cell The local cell Settings of the number of cell layers GSM 900M GSM 1800M macro-cel l N SAME UPPER N N LOWER SAME LOWER N N UPPER SAME N LOWER N LOWER N LOWER LOWER LOWER GSM 1800M micro-cell micro-micro cell Sector GSM cell 900M l macro-cel micro-cell Sector cell GSM900M macro cell GSM900M micro cell GSM1800M cell GSM1800M cell Micro-micro-cell micro macro N N N N N UPPER N UPPER SAME LOWER N UPPER N UPPER N N 6. Is Related Cell Description: in the fast fading handover, the candidate destination cell can only be the related cell of the service cell. This is one parameter of the adjacent cell, which is used to indicate if the adjacent cell is the related cell of the service cell. Value range: False: this adjacent cell is not the related cell of the Page 418 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 service cell; True: this adjacent cell is the related cell of the service cell; Default: False. 7. Synchronize to Adjacent Cell Description: if it belongs to a central module. Value range: True/False 8. Related Cell DN Description: DN(BssId-SiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (BssId-EcId) of the external cell. Page 419 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6.1.4.7 Configuring the adjacent cell handover In the main interface (shown in Fig. 6-2), select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. Select “Configure AdjCell handover”, as shown in Fig. 6-57. Fig. 6-57 Configuring the adjacent cell handover Please refer to section 6.1.4.6 “Configuring adjacent cell handover and reselection”. 6.1.4.8 Configuring the adjacent cell reselection In the main interface (shown in Fig. 6-2), select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options. Select “Configure AdjCell reselection”, as shown in Fig. 6-58. Fig. 6-58 Configuring the adjacent cell reselection Page 420 of 516 Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Please refer to section 6.1.4.6 “Configuring adjacent cell handover and reselection”. Page 421 of 516 Value range: 0 ~ 63. Description: based on the FH algorithm defined by GSM Specifications 05. i. 6-59.02. Fig. and the only difference is that the MAIO is put in the TS attribute.1. Hopping Serial Number (HSN) and Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). Different TSs can share a group of MAs and the relevant HSNs.9 Configuring the frequency hopping system In the main interface (shown in Fig. Frequency Hopping No. the cyclic FH. For the cells close to each other that adopt the same MA. of which HSN=0 is a special FH. the HSN determines the operation track of the frequency in the course of FH. different HSNs can ensure that there is no conflict of usage of frequency in the FH course. Setting: for the cells close to each other that adopt the same MA. of which. select “Cell” and right click to pop up a menu of options.4. 6-59 Configuring the FHS 1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. different HSNs can ensure that there is no conflict of usage of frequency in the FH course. Default: 0 Page 422 of 516 .e. the MAI is a function of Frame Number (FN) of TDMA. as shown in Fig. Select “Configure PHS”. 6-2). Default: 0 3. 6-2). Select “Create Channel”. Value range: 0: no frequency hopping. select “TRX” and right click to pop up a menu of options.4. 6-60. Fig. Fig. and Fig.1. as shown in Fig.10 Configuring the channel In the main interface (shown in Fig. 6-60 Configuring a channel (traffic channel) . It is a sub-set of the CA of the cell.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2. 6. Value range: no more than 64. there are two configuration options for the channel creator.GSM Page 423 of 516 . 1: baseband frequency hopping. 2: radio frequency hopping. According to the channel combination. Frequency Group Description: a list of the absolute RF channel numbers of each frequency in the frequency hopping group. Frequency Hopping Mode Description: the frequency modulation mode adopted for the cell. When it notifies the MS which channel should be used. 6-62. 6-61. it will issue the related information to the MS. .3)+ CBCH 8 9 SDCCH/8(0. 0) + FACCH/H (0. Description: the number to identify the channel. Channel No. Value range: see Table 6-181. 1) + TCH/H(1. It is a very important configuration and is closely related to the CELL’s attribute and “CcchConf”. Table 6-181 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Settings of “TS radio Channel Combination” Explanation TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF TCH/H(0. 6-61 Configuring a channel (traffic channel)-GPRS Fig. and it can serve as one of the conditions to check if the configuration is correct. 1) SDCCH/8 (0.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 1) + SACCH/TH (0.3) + SACCH/C4(0. 1) TCH/H (0..... 1) + FACCH/H(0.7) + CBCH TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M Page 424 of 516 . 1) + SACCH/TH (0.7) + SACCH/C8 (0.3)+ SACCH/C4 (0.7) FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4(0.. 6-62 Configuring a channel creator (control channel) 1..3) BCCH + CCCH FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4(0. TS radio Channel Combination Description: combination information “BcchArfcn” this parameter is used to indicate the channel mode of the TS..7) + SACCH/C8(0. 2. Description: it is the physical TS number of CHANNEL in TRX. For the TS where the BCCH channel is located. 3. Train Serial Code Description: it is the train serial code of the TS. Default: 0 4.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Value 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TCH/F + SACCH/M TCH/FD + SACCH/MD PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH CTSBCH+CTSPCH+CTSARCH+CTSAGCH CTSPCH+CTSARCH+CTSAGCH CTSBCH CTSBCH+TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/CTS E-TCH/F+E-FACCH/F+SACCH/TF E-TCH/F+E-FACCH/F+SACCH/M E-TCH/F+SACCH/M E-TCH/FD+SACCH/MD Explanation Setting: the default can be set as 0. this parameter must be equal to the BCC of the cell. with little relation between them. this parameter must be equal to the BCC of the cell. PCM Line No. There are 8 kinds of train serial codes. It is used by the self-adaptive equalization circuit at the receiving end for reference in time delay compensation. 5. Value range: 0 ~ 7 6. Value range: 0 ~ 7 Setting: for the TS where the BCCH channel is located. Page 425 of 516 . Sub Time Slot No. Description: serial number of the PCM circuit. Time Slot No. 1 Overview The software loading mainly offers such software version management functions as software storing. software version setting. Value range: See Table 6-182. thus to greatly save the loading time and quickly complete the loading tasks of various boards. It enables you to make software upgrading and loading without traveling to the site.2 Software loading The software loading mainly provides the upgrading and loading of card software in ZXG10-BSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Description: it is the sub-channel number of the logical channel (traffic channel) in the physical channel (TS).” Conditions Channel Combination” field is 0 (TS_COMB_TCHF) 0~1 When the “TS radio Channel Combination” field is 1 (TS_COMB_TCHH0) or 2 (TS_COMB_TCHH1) 0~3 When the “TS radio Channel Combination” field is 5 (TS_COMB_MBCCHC) 0~7 When the “TS radio Channel Combination” field is 3 (TS_COMB_SDCCH) 6. thus facilitating the management of GSM equipment and offering the management function of software versions.2. It is equipped with the ability of concurrently processing and can load multiple boards at the same time. 6. and makes the relevant Page 426 of 516 . The OMCR (V2) server software storing It copies the software files to the specified directory on the OMCR (V2) server and the foreground MP. ZXG10-BTS (V1A and V2). software upgrading and so on. ZXG10-OBTS and ZXG10-MB. Table 6-182 Value 0 When the “TS radio The value range of “Sub Time Slot No. The functions of software loading are as follows: 1. software loading. 4. Such records are the foundation of the software loading action. the MP of the specified module of the specified BSC will restart. The server forwards this version number to the client for display.2 Software loading flow Software loading flow is shown in Fig. 6.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 records in the databases of the foreground and the background. Page 427 of 516 . 6-63.2. If this operation is done. and the board returns its running version number to the OMCR (V2) server. Viewing the foreground running version It transmits the inquiry command to a foreground board. and then the specified MP version will run. The software storing is the foundation of all software loading operations (including the software version setting and software loading actions). which means creating or modifying the software version records of some specified object boards or some specified kinds of software. 2. 3. Software upgrading Upgrading the board software at the control layer such as BSC_MP is done through class-1 software. 6. Transferring the software to MP It transmits a stored software to the MP of the specified module of the specified BSC. Software loading It notifies the MP to load a software or a kind of software onto a specified object board or an object rack. 5. Note that the version file of this MP must exist in the hard disk of the MP of this MP (special regulations of BSC: the version file of the MP must be under the $OMCHOME/tmp/ftp/Version directory). Software version setting It involves creating and modifying the software version. MB equipment loading. the files will be requested from the server. This is a CMIS action. the stored software that has been sent to the foreground can save the loading time. After version updating. and copied to the MP of the relevant module MP of the BSC by being transmitted to the foreground. which means creating or modifying the software version records of some specified object boards or some specified kind of software. When storing the software. the files stored on MP will be used in priority during BSC board loading and BTS. For the control layer software. Besides. So. To improve the speed of software loading. if the new version cannot correctly start or has Page 428 of 516 . The version loading notifies the MP to load the software or a kind of software onto a specified object board or object rack. saved in the $OMCHOME/tmp/ftp/version” directory on the server. it means the software upgrade. Only when MP does not contain the required files. The software version setting involves creating and modifying the software version.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Software version Software storing Software version setting (create. and it is only necessary to copy the software to the MP and then update it. . the relevant software should be connected to the BSC module to be configured. modify) Software loading Software running Fig. the relevant version information is written in the databases of the foreground and the background. and then it can be loaded. The records are the foundation of the software loading action. 6-63 The software loading flow The software must be stored first. Table 6-183 Software ID BTS_BIE BTS_CHP BTS_CKU BTS_CMM BTS_CUI BTS_EAM BTS_DSP0 BTS_DSP1 BTS_FUC BTS_RCU BTS_SCU BTS_OMU BTS_CHP BSC_EDRT BSC_EFREN BTS_FUC BSC_MP BSC_SMB BSC_SMT1 BSC_SMT2 List of software IDs and their usage Function BS interface equipment unit Channel processor Clock panel Common management module Carrier frequency interface Environment alarm panel Micro cell: DSP0. See Table 6-183.2.3. The function field that follows indicates the usage of the software. belonging to the TRU panel. use the old version to restore the system. and is defined in “prefix+function” mode. the system might break down. There are two prefixes: BSC and BTS. and it is normally represented by the board name. When the above situation appears. the old version should be saved before updating the version. Micro cell: DSP1.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 serious faults due to some reasons. Therefore. 6. Frame unit controller Micro cell: radio frequency interface unit Micro cell: signaling control unit board Operation and maintenance unit software Channel processor software Enhanced DRT The DSP version on EDRT Frame unit controller software Module processor software Sub-multiplexing board software Sub-multiplexing board 1 software Sub-multiplexing board 2 software Page 429 of 516 .3 6. belonging to the TRU panel.2. indicating respectively whether the software belongs to BSC or BTS.1 Version information Software ID The software ID is used to indicate the function of software. FF: the version number independent of the hardware platform. If the software itself remains unchanged both Page 430 of 516 . For a software.2 Software version The software version consists of four fields. ranging 00~99.7 signaling board The MPPP communication board on ECOM board General peripheral processor (GPP) board Bit Oriented Switching Network Enhanced LAPD signaling board BSSGP RLC/MAC protocol board Frame relay protocol board The DSP version on BRP Peripheral processor board of the Gb interface Access unit control board 6. ranging 00~99. 4. VV: the version number independent of the hardware platform.2.3. ranging 00~99. XX: the version number independent of the hardware platform.VV. VV should be updated. ranging 00 ~ 99. The value of VV decides the main functions of the software. If they are added or modified. HH: a number related to the hardware platform. such as “HH. 2. 3. The value of FF decides the local functional features of the software.FF. FF will be upgraded. If there is structural adjustment in software.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Software ID BSC_DRT BSC_DTI BSC_FR BSC_HR BSC_EFR BSC_MTPEN BSC_IPCBEN BSC_GPP BSC_BOSN BSC_LAPDEN BSC_BRP BSC_FRP BSC_BRPDSP BSC_GIPP BSC_PUC Function Dual rate transcoder board software Digital trunk interface software Full-rate voice-coded DSP algorithm Half-rate voice-coded DSP algorithm Enhanced full-rate voice/data circuit Enhanced No.XX”. Meanings of each field are as follows: 1. each of which contains two digitals. the HH value will remain unchanged unless the software is modified due to the modification of the hardware platform on which it is running. the XX= “52”~“98” are not defined. and then the software loading operation.4 6. 6. so you may input “01.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 structurally and functionally. the meaning is “Formal version”. or load multiple board software at a time on a physical site. the software loading of each board is carried out through the boards on the rack diagram. 2-10) to enter the software loading main interface (as shown in Fig. and when XX=”99”.00”. For example. for the BS (including the micro-cell). the meaning is “b”…. and only some errors and BUGs are corrected.2. 6-64).1 Operations of the software loading interface Brief introduction to operations For the new software version.00. As for the BSC.2.2 Entry into the software loading interface After a user succeeds in logon. through software setting. when XX=”01”.2. The defined meaning of XX is as follows: when XX=”00”. Page 431 of 516 . Besides.00. XX should be upgraded.00. when XX=”26”. the first software version number of ZXG10-BSC&BTS is defined as “01. it is recommended to perform the storing operation first. all stored software versions can be seen by browsing the versions. You can also create. you can either load the board software independently on the rack diagram.4. the meaning is “a”. BTS software and DSP software can be set as the existing software version that is the basis for loading. first save the software. the meaning is “z”. the BSC software. Among them. when XX=”25”. and load versions of the same type in a batch operation. when XX=”51”.4. For the software to be loaded. set.00a” during software storing. he (she) can select the “Configuration Management → Software Loading” on the main interface (as shown in Fig. the meaning is “Z”. the meaning is “A”…. 6. and Exit. etc. Refresh. Status Bar. it can present all the BSCs and their racks under the BSS and the managed BTS if it is the physical view. Expand. the character input Page 432 of 516 . 6-64 Software loading main interface The menus on the menu-bar are: 1.. Collapse 4. The left side of the main window is the browse tree. use the “Switch View” button. Help.Expand Load Version. The lower part of the interface is the command box. Expand. All. i. Modify Version. Physical View.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. it will present the stored software version. 2. Help: Software Loading Help. Operation: this is a dynamic menu. All the buttons on the toolbar have the corresponding options in the menu. Expand All. Toolbar. Class-1 software version and the software package. Collapse All. Delete Version. Create Version.e. If it is the logical view. Directory and Index. Delete Stored Software. Inquire 3. the View: Logical View. and Refresh. Click to Inquire. the tool buttons on the toolbar in turn are: Switch View. Collapse. and the menus vary with the contents clicked by the mouse. and Exit. About … From left to right. All. Command Version. Collapse. Setting: Select All. To switch the view. Box. including Store Software. After the tree is Expanded. the software must be stored first.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 interface. as shown in Fig.4. and the relevant record will be added in the database for loading in the future. etc. the relevant MML command will be displayed in the command box. browsing the version. 6-67 (in the GPRS environment). only the command related to the software loading can be input in the software loading application window.Click “Operation→Store Software” to pop up the “Store Software” interface. the software will be copied to the OMCR (V2) server and the corresponding directory on MP of the relevant module of the BSC. 1.2. 6-65. Fig. 6. It is necessary to point out that. 6-66 (in the GSM environment) and Fig. 6-65 The logical view Page 433 of 516 .. During the interface operation. Storing software Prior to the software loading. During the storing operation.3 Version management The software version management involves storing the software. The software storing is performed in the logical view as illustrated in Fig. transmitting it to the foreground and setting the software. except the multiplexing command. The user can directly input the MML command in the command box to complete an operation. The auto search function can be used to add respectively the versions and paths to the version number boxes and path boxes of the relevant boards. The system will search based on the root directory.GSM Fig.GPRS The software of boards of the same type is generally put in the same path. and click “Auto Search” button in the interface. 6-66 Store Software . 6-67 Store Software .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 434 of 516 . Select an appropriate path in the root directory. 6-68 (in the GSM environment) and Fig.GSM Fig. as shown in Fig. 6-69 (in the GPRS environment). 6-68 Auto search .GPRS Page 435 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 and automatically match the found software version to the relevant board. 6-69 Auto search . Fig. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 After the auto-search. you can view its relevant software version information. as illustrated in Fig. there may be multiple appropriate software versions under the root directory. By clicking the version node to view. the system will match the first appropriate software version it finds to the relevant board. press the “Exit” key to return to the software loading interface. press the “Browse” key and select the actual path to find out the software version that really needs to be stored. There is a prompt on whether the software storing is successful or failed. you can select the software. the MB also needs to select the module to be configured. Browsing the software version The version browse function can be used to check the stored software and their versions. Finally. In the case of the BTS. The software ID. so as to determine the applicable scope of the software. software version. 2.e. However. i. View the software version information of BSC_GPP. Therefore. Certainly. file size and file name of every stored software are listed in the window. you can modify the software singly and manually in the lower window. arrange the version number and path directly and manually in the lower window without auto-search. click the “Store Software” key to store it. The module number of the BSC software need not be selected since it is specified as 1. When the storing is finished. 6-70. Page 436 of 516 . the system will automatically copy the files from the server to the MP. The sending-software-to-the-foreground” operation is not necessary because all the software versions are sent via FTP to the OMCR (V2) server and the relevant directory of the corresponding MP module of the BSC while storing the software. Select the Page 437 of 516 . Moreover. Sending software to the foreground Because the files stored on MP are used in priority to load software. due to the process of copying files from the server to the MP. With the function of sending software to the foreground.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. if there are no required files on the MP (i. the required files are not transmitted to the foreground) while loading.e. So. the software can be first stored on the MP hard disk of BSC to save the time for software loading before loading the BS equipment. and the “Sending software to the foreground” operation can be used for this purpose. the software to be loaded can be sent to the MP hard disk of the foreground in order to get ready for loading the software. the software loading time will be relatively longer. 6-70 Browsing the software 3. as shown in Fig. Select “Create Version” from this menu to pop up the interface for creating Class-1 software. and the operation can be completed. 6-71. right click to pup up the “Send to Foreground” menu.2. By clicking the browse tree on the logical view interface of the software loading.4 Class 1 software loading Class 1 software version refers to the operations to create. which are performed in the logical view. 6-71 Class 1 software version In Fig. you can browse all the current version information of Class 1 software as illustrated in Fig. you can modify. 6. After the version is created. deleting or loading Class 1 software is similar to that for creating Class 1 software. First create the relevant software version when Class 1 software is loaded. For example. 6-72.4. delete and load the software version. 6-70. The relevant software version for storing must be available before creating Class 1 software version The interface for modifying. 6-71. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 software version to be transmitted in the “Browse Version” interface shown in Fig. right click “Class 1 Software” to pop up a menu. set and load versions with the same type in a batch of operations. Class 1 software Page 438 of 516 . the system will send a broadcast message. Select the board type. 6-72 Class 1 software loading version 6. If the create operation is successful.2. 6-71. 3. Press the “Exit” key to go back to the Class 1 software interface as illustrated in Fig. Select the software version that will be set on the selected module in BSC. 5. if the create operation fails.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 version is created as follows: 1. Fig.4. Then the software version information to be created will be created as the selected available software version information.5 Rack software loading The software loading of each board on BSC is processed directly on the Page 439 of 516 . select the module number and site type also. Select the big type. Press the “Create” key. In the case of the BTS software. the system will give a prompt of failure in the interface. 2. 4. notifying all workstations in the system that this software version is successfully created. The system provides in real time the rack diagram of the BSC. the boards for which the software loading or upgrading can be conducted are as follows: 1. to create or modify the software version records of a specified destination board or a specified kind of software. AIPP.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 rack diagram. Only after the software version of the specified board is created. select the rack that needs to load the software under the BSC. can the operations of inquiring. and the interface display is as illustrated in Fig. Page 440 of 516 . Loading software version indicates the action that MP is notified to load certain software or a kind of software to a specified destination board or a destination rack. BOSN. on the basis of the stored software version. including setting and loading the software version. TCPP: software loading In the browse tree on the software loading physical view interface. DRT: software loading/DSP software loading 3. TIC. displaying different racks in different ways. 6-73. Such records are the foundation of the software loading action. For the BSC (V2). Setting software version is. MP: software upgrading 2. modifying and deleting the software version and loading software for the board be performed. whose interface is shown in Fig. the menu will be: Modify Version. and Inquire the Running Version. and Inquire the Current Running Version. BOSN software loading Right click the BOSN board to pop up the shortcut menu of the BOSN board in the interface: Create Version. Right click to pop up the “Create Version” menu. If the software version of the relevant board has been created. Load Version. 1. Page 441 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Delete Version. Inquire Version.the rack diagram display We take the BOSN board and DRT board as an example to introduce the software loading carried out directly on the board in the rack diagram. 6-74. 6-73 BSC loading . and press the “Create” key. Page 442 of 516 . the system will send a broadcast message. “Port No. The currently configured software version of the board is presented in the “Current Software Version” box. If the create operation is successful. After create operation is successful. “Unit No. etc.” and “Slot No. notifying all workstations in the system that this software version is successfully created.”. 6-74 Creating the BOSN board software The board information of the selected board in the rack diagram (here is the selected BOSN board) is presented at the upper part of Fig. 6-74. if the create operation fails. the system will give a prompt of failure in the interface.”. ”Rack No.”. and loading the software is similar to that shown in Fig. deleting.”. The new software version can thus be created.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. the interface for modifying. Press the “Exit” key to go back to the rack diagram interface as illustrated in Fig.”. including the “BSC No. “Board Type”. “Munit No.”. “Shelf No.”. Select the version to be updated to from the “Update To” in the lower “Update Software Version” box. 6-73. “Module No. and Inquire the Current Running Version. For loading. here only one figure is provided. The software loading operations of DRT.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6-74.(Since the interfaces of create.) Fig. AIPP. and load are similar. TIC and TCPP are as the same as the BOSN software loading. If the software version of the relevant board or the DSP software version has been created. DSP software loading Right click the DRT board to pop up the shortcut menu of the DRT board in the interface: Create Version. the menu will be: Modify Version. and the processing interface of the DSP software loading will appear. delete. and Inquire the Current Running Version of DSP. Delete Version. Right click to pop up the menu. modify. Load Version. click “Load” button to complete the board software loading. Inquire the Current Running Version. Inquire Version. except for the command buttons in the interface. 6-75. 2. Create DSP Version. 6-75 Creating the DSP board software Page 443 of 516 . as shown in Fig. ”. except for the command buttons in the interface. Select the version to be updated to from “Update To” in the lower “Update Software Version” box. the system will give a prompt of failure in the interface. notifying all workstations in the system that this software version is successfully created. “Module No. Select the “DSP No. “Unit No. 6. the interface for modifying. After the create operation is successful.”.4.2. 6-75. and press the “Create” key. 6-73.”. Press the “Exit” key to go back to the rack diagram interface as illustrated in Fig. the system will send a broadcast message. including the “BSC No.”.”. “Rack No.”. For loading. The new DSP software version can thus be created.6 Physical site software loading The software loading of BTS (including micro-cell BTS) is different from that of the BSC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The software information is presented at the right upper part of the interface. deleting. select the BTS that needs software loading under the BSC. and the interface display is as illustrated in Fig. If the create operation is successful. 6-73. Page 444 of 516 . In the browse tree on the software loading physical view interface as shown in Fig.”. then the current version information used by this DSP is presented at the lower part. 6-76. “Munit No. if the create operation fails. click “Load” button to complete the DSP software loading. and loading the DSP software is similar to that shown in Fig. “Shelf No.” and “Slot No. the system will send a broadcast message. 6-76 The BTS software loading The software information of the selected BS is presented at the right upper part of the interface. the system will give a prompt of failure in the interface. “Site No. you should ensure that there is the relevant record in the stored software versions. Select the version to be updated from the check box of the board in the “Update Version” box and set the relevant update software. Page 445 of 516 . “Modify Version”. Various software versions currently used by BS are presented below the software information. Click the check box before the relevant software in “Update Version”. In the “Operation” menu. To create and modify the version. which has only the software of FUC. The selected BS in Fig. you can select “Create Version”. “Inquire Version” and “Load Version” to execute the corresponding operations. including the “BSC No”.” and the description of BS.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-76 is BTS (V1A). then the relevant available stored version record will be automatically added to the “Update Version” drop-down list box for selection. if the operation fails. notifying all workstations in the system that the operation on the selected software version is successful. After the operation succeeds. CHP and OMU. 6-77 The BTS rack diagram In Fig. 6-77. 6-77: Fig. For example. and Inquire the Current Running Version. Modify Version. the BTS software loading may also be performed in the BTS rack diagram as illustrated in Fig. Load Version. Delete Version.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In addition. right click on the relevant panel to pop up the shortcut menu in the interface: Create Version. by clicking “Create Version”. Inquire Version. 6-78 BTS rack software loading Page 446 of 516 . as shown in Fig. the interface for creating the BTS software version will pop up. 6-78: Fig. and the version management. 2. if the operation fails. you can first get rid off the shared directory on the server. if not.2. If the software has not been stored or has been lost after being stored. When the program exits abnormally (i. the communication between the foreground and the background. the foreground may possibly give no response to the background messages. As a result. The relevant record will be automatically added to the “Update Version” drop-down list box for selection. the system will give a prompt of failure in the interface. and the file directory is required to be set up in advance when assigning. The specified path is assigned at the client. the files cannot be found during loading. and the opened files have not been closed in time. the later versions will check if the directory exists. Unable to create or find files The operations of software storing and downloading are performed in a specified path on the server. notifying all workstations in the system that the operation on the selected software version is successful. The multi-party cooperation is needed to bring it into normal play. you should ensure that there is the relevant record in the stored software versions. or a certain board is not plugged firmly.5 Troubleshooting The software loading is a complex job that involves the database operation. and then share it again. At this time. it will be created automatically.e. or the power has not been turned on. Another common reason Page 447 of 516 . 6. the error that the files cannot be created and some files cannot be deleted might occur.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 When creating the version. accidental power-off or restarting). After the operation succeeds. Below are the problems likely to occur in the software loading process: 1. Sometimes if the corresponding process in the foreground has not been started or has errors. No response from the foreground or too many communication errors Software loading needs to be implemented with the cooperation of both the foreground and the background. the system will send a broadcast message. is inconsistent with files” is displayed during storing To avoid loading a wrong version. 6. click “Configuration Management→Integrated Configuration Management” menu item in the main interface of the OMCR Page 448 of 516 . such an error message will appear. In this case. so that the user can complete the initial configuration or incremental configuration conveniently. This information will be checked during storing or initial version setting. the data in the database do not conform to the actual equipment in the rack. If the files to be stored are inconsistent with the input version ID or the version No. then it is possible that the active MP is synchronizing data to the standby MP. 4. 5. You need to wait for a while before performing operations. and provides the user with a good graphical user interface based on the flow. first check whether the communication with MP is normal. Data synchronization failure during software loading or storing In this case. It establishes for the user a flow that enables the operator and maintainer to conduct physical configuration easily.e. 3. or in the hardware failure.3. please replace it with another version and try it again. i. the corresponding identification information is added to the version files.. So this problem may be eliminated by entering the correct version information and using the right version files.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 for this error is that the equipment data have not been configured properly. An error message of “Version ID or version No.1 Integrated configuration management Overview The integrated configuration management is used for initial configuration and for modification to the configuration data. After successful login..3 6. The software loading failed again and again The largest possibility lies in the board software itself that is unable to run normally. If it is. as shown in Fig. To enter the initial configuration wizard. Fig. select “Initial Configuration” and then click “OK”. 6-80 Main interface of the integrated configuration management Page 449 of 516 . as shown in Fig. select the configuration mode. 2-10). If you click “Cancel”. 6-80. 6-79 Selecting the configuration mode Fig. The specific settings according to the wizard will be introduced in the subsequent chapters. To enter the modify configuration wizard. First. After the settings in the wizard are completed. select “Modify Configuration” and then click “OK”.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 (V2) client (Fig. you will enter the state where you can only edit the script. the main interface for integrated configuration management will appear. 6-79. first write the data into the background database.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6.tmp file currently exists.3. There are many MML commands for the initial configuration. and finally send the ZDB file to the foreground. In this mode. 6-79.2 6. click “New” (as shown in Fig. to improve the efficiency.3. Page 450 of 516 . then generate the ZDB file through the zdbsvr conversion tool. 6-81 Opening and editing the script If the OMCHOME/ftpc/cmclient/configscript. Fig. and click “OK” to enter the interface as shown in Fig.1 Operations of the integrated configuration management interface Initial configuration This section will focus on the initial configuration. the debug mode is recommended for the initial configuration. the user can directly open it and continuously edit it. 6-81. Select “Initial Configuration” shown in Fig. and modify configuration will be introduced in the next section. 6-82) and click “Next” to enter the wizard for editing the MSC. Otherwise. so.2. 6-83 Editing the MSC If there is an existing MSC. 6-83. 6-82 Creating a new script and editing it Click “Next” to enter the wizard for creating the MSC. Fig. as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. only the BSC will be added during this initial configuration and the MSCID shall be the same as the existing one. Click Page 451 of 516 . 6-84. Right click the “MSC” node in the physical view. 6-85. and select the “MSC Properties” menu. 6-84. as shown in Fig. and select “Initialization Radio Info”. alias. In this way.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 “Next” to enter the part for editing the BSC. click “OK”. In the interface shown in Fig. input the parameters such as BSCID. Fig. 6-84 Configuring the BSC After the BSC parameters are properly configured. Page 452 of 516 . The information about the nodes such as the MSC and BSC will be generated. during generation of the BSC. as shown in Fig. The specific parameters can certainly be modified through the interface of the radio part in the integrated configuration management. longitude and latitude. the program will automatically generate the corresponding radio information. The MSCID cannot be modified.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Fig. 6-86. the interface for editing the MSC will be displayed. 6-86 Modifying the MSC Page 453 of 516 . as shown in Fig. 6-85 Modifying the MSC In this way. 6-88 (in the GPRS environment). Select the “BSC Properties” menu.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In Fig.GSM Page 454 of 516 . Then the user can modify the BSC parameters. 6-87 Selecting and modifying the BSC . right click the “BSC” node in the physical view to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. 6-85. Fig. 6-87 (in the GSM environment) or in Fig. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. 6-87 or Fig. 6-90 (in the GPRS environment). 6-89 (in the GSM environment) or in Fig. 6-88 Selecting and modifying the BSC . select “Add Rack” to enter the interface for adding the racks. 6-88.GPRS In the right-click menus shown in Fig. Page 455 of 516 . and board. shelf. Page 456 of 516 . 6-89 Adding a rack . 6-91.GSM Fig. The program will automatically add the default rack.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-90 Adding a rack .GPRS Select the shelves in turn (first select those at the control layer) and click “OK”. as shown in Fig. and then just click “OK”. Adding a new DRT board Right click the DRT board to pop up a menu as shown in Fig. select the “Add Board” to enter the interface for setting the DRT parameters. Page 457 of 516 . Fig.Select the DRT type and the DSP type.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. 6-93. 6-92. 6-92 Adding a DRT board (1) In the right-click menus as shown in Fig. 6-91 Default rack 1. 6-92. The user can click an item in the N7Lik list. 6-93 Adding a DRT board (2) 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. Page 458 of 516 . By selecting in the list. In this menu. the user can specify the corresponding SLC and then click “OK”. select the “Add Board” menu to enter the interface for setting the TIC parameters. Adding a TIC board for A interface Right click the TIC board to pop up a menu. 6-94. Fig. select the CMT_ZXG10_2MMTP. 7. Configuring the BIPP Right click the BIPP board to pop up a menu. otherwise. select the “Board Properties” menu to enter the interface for setting the MTP parameters. If it is configured as 2M No. as shown in Fig. In this menu. Configuring the MTP Right click the MTP board to pop up a menu. 6-94 Adding a TIC for A interface 3. Among them: HW1 is an odd number. the default is CMT_ZXG10_MTP. Note that the communication types of two MTP boards must be the same. select the “Board Properties” menu to enter the interface for setting the BIPP parameters. the HW number cannot be modified because the connection has been configured. 6-96. and HW2 equals to the selected HW1 value plus 1 and cannot be modified. as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 459 of 516 . 6-95 Configuring the MTP 4. 6-95. During the incremental configuration. In this menu. 6-97. the connection information will be displayed. as shown in Fig. When this TIC panel or the PCM is deleted in this interface. In this menu. Page 460 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. all the PCMs are allocated. select the “Board Properties” menu to enter the interface for setting the TIC parameters. the connection information will also be deleted.Generally. If a PCM connects to the Site. Configuring the TIC board with Abis interface Right click the TIC board to pop up a menu. 6-96 Configuring the BIPP 5. right click the “Physical Equipment” node in the physical view. 6-98. Page 461 of 516 . as shown in Fig. 6-97 Configuring the TIC with Abis interface 6. Configuring the SITE In Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-85. After the Site is created. The maximal length of the alias is 40. corresponds to the number of the module connected to the BIEPCM.Input the information such as SITEID and SITE Type.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. neither SITEID nor the Site Type can be modified. as shown in Fig. 6-100. Fig. 6-99 Configuring the SITE (2) Click “Next” to enter the interface shown in Fig. and ModuleNo. select “Add BTS” menu to enter the wizard for adding the Site. 6-99. Page 462 of 516 . 6-98 Configuring the SITE (1) In the pop-up menu. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Select the connection type corresponding to the PCM. 6-101. as shown in Fig. 6-100 Configuring the SITE (3) Select “Initialization Panel” and click “Next” to begin to configure the BIEPCM. 6-101 Configuring the SITE (4) Page 463 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Click “Connect” to pup up a dialog box as shown in Fig. Fig. Then the user will enter the interface as shown in Fig. 6-102. 6-103. Fig. 6-102 Configuring the SITE (5) Select a PCM and then click “OK”. 6-103 Configuring the SITE (6) Page 464 of 516 . Select the PCM to be connected. Fig. as shown in Fig. 6-104 Configuring the SITE (7) 7. 6-104. shelf. rack. 6-105. The Site. and panel will be automatically generated.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Click “Finish”. Page 465 of 516 . as shown in Fig. Modifying the BIE panel Right click the BIE/EBIE board. 6-105 Modifying the BIE panel (1) In the pop-up menu. select the “Panel Properties” menu to enter the interface for setting the BIE/EBIE parameters.Through the “PanelType” selection box.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. If the connection type is set to “Empty”. Page 466 of 516 . the EBIE cannot be modified to the BIE. it indicates that the PCM is not allocated. It can be modified to the BIE after the connection relationship is deleted. for example. 6-106. as shown in Fig. Note: when configuring the connection relationship of the fourth PCM. the BIE panel type can be modified. modify EBIE to the BIE. 6-106 Modifying the BIE panel (2) 8. Configuring the divider/combiner Right click the TRU panel to pop up a menu as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-107. Fig. 6-107 Adding a new TRU board Page 467 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In the right-click menu. as shown in Fig. Fig. If the BTS type is BTSV2. 6-108 Configuring the divider/combiner (1) Page 468 of 516 . and the diversity receiver can be configured. select “Add Panel” to pop up a dialog box for selecting the divider and combiner. 6-109. one divider and one combiner must be configured. as shown in Fig. one CDU can serve as both the divider and combiner. If the BTS type is BTSV1A. 6-108. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 469 of 516 . right click to pop up the menu. 6-110. 6-109 Configuring the divider/combiner (2) 9. as shown in Fig. Modifying the CDU type On the CDU panel. 6-111. and then the panel type can be modified.Then the “PEU” panel appears. as shown in Fig.Click “OK”. 6-111 Modifying the CDU type (2) 10. 6-112. Select “Set As PEU” from the menu.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. select the “Panel Properties” menu. Configuring 80W Right click the TRU panel to pop up the menu. as shown in Fig. then modify is successful. Note that if the connection relationship of this CDU has been configured. the panel type cannot be modified. 6-113. Page 470 of 516 . Fig. 6-110 Modifying the CDU type (1) In the pop-up menu. 6-113 Configuring 80W (2) 11. Configuring the radio information Right click “Site 1” node in the physical view to pop up the menu as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 471 of 516 . 6-112 Configuring 80W (1) Fig. 6-114. 6-115 Configuring the radio information (2) The list displays the radio information that has been configured to this site. as shown in Fig. Page 472 of 516 . 6-114 Configuring the radio information (1) Select the “Set Radio” menu to enter the wizard. Click “Next”. 6-115. Fig. 6-116.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-117. 6-116 Configuring the radio information (3) After the “Finish” is clicked. 6-117 Configuring the radio information (4) Page 473 of 516 . the program will automatically add the corresponding logical site into the radio view.The functions of the menus will be introduced in detail in the subsequent chapters. Fig. Right click the logical site in the radio view to pup up the menu as shown in Fig. 6-118. So. as shown in Fig. 6-119. the mobile country code and the mobile network code should be correct during the initial configuration. it cannot be modified. select “BSC Radio Information”. right click the “BSC” node to pop up the menu as shown in Fig.Once a command is sent. Page 474 of 516 . 6-118 Pop-up menu of the BSC In the pop-up menu. Then the user can edit the BSC radio information. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 12. Modifying the BSC In the radio view. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-120 Configuring the cell information (1) In the pop-up menu. 6-120. Fig. right click the “Logical Site” node to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. select “Create Cell Radio Information” menu Page 475 of 516 . Configuring the cell information In the radio view. 6-119 Modifying the BSC 13. as shown in Fig. 6-122 Configuring the cell information (2) . and the MCC+MNC+LAC+CI is unique.cell information (GPRS) Page 476 of 516 . The LAC and Cell Code (CI) are allocated by the MSC. 6-121 Configuring the cell information (2) – GSM Fig. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 to pop up the interface for editing the cell radio information. 6-122 and Fig. 6-123 (in the GPRS environment). 6-121 (in the GSM environment) or in Fig. Fig.GPRS info (GPRS) 14. 6-124 Pop-up menu of the cell Page 477 of 516 . right click “Cell 1” to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. 6-124. 6-123 Configuring the cell information (2) .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Configuring TRX In the logical view. select “Create TRX Radio Information” to configure the TRX parameters. One and only one BCCH carrier frequency must be configured in a cell. 6-126 (in the GPRS environment).GSM Fig.GPRS Page 478 of 516 . 6-125 Configuring TRX . as shown in Fig. 6-125 (in the GSM environment) or in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In the pop-up menu. Fig. 6-126 Configuring TRX . such as “Create Cell Handover and Reselection”. Page 479 of 516 .Which kind of related cell to be configured can be selected. 6-128. select “Add the Related Cell” to pop up the interface for editing the related cell. as shown in Fig. right click the “Cell” node to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. Configuring the related cell In the radio view.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 15. 6-127. and “Create Interference Cell”. A kind of related cells can be created through the menu. Fig. 6-127 Configuring the related cell (1) In the right-click menu. 6-129 Configuring the external cell (1) Page 480 of 516 . 6-128 Configuring the related cell (2) 16. Fig. right click the “Physical Equipment” node to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. 6-129.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Configuring the external cell In the radio view. right click the “BSC” node to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. 6-132 (in the GPRS environment).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In the pop-up menu. Configuring the EasyWay In the physical view. Fig. 6-130. as shown in Fig. 6-131 (in the GSM environment) or in Fig. 6-130 Configuring the external cell (2) 17. select “Create External Cell Radio Information” to pop up the interface for editing the external cell. Page 481 of 516 . as shown in Fig. 6-132 Configuring the EasyWay (1) . 6-133 (in the Page 482 of 516 . select the “Configure EasyWay” to pop up the interface for editing the EasyWay.GPRS In the pop-up menu.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-131 Configuring the EasyWay (1) .GSM Fig. of this BTS. The system will automatically input the rack No. 6-134 (in the GPRS environment). Fig. e. In the case of the PECM.g. 6-133 Configuring the EasyWay (2) .GSM Page 483 of 516 . hanging line. and TS in turn. PCM.Select the EasyWay type.. the DROP must be configured. Select the rack No.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 GSM environment) or in Fig. First input the BTS. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 484 of 516 . as shown in Fig. 6-135. Fig. 6-135 Saving the file (1) After “OK” is clicked. 6-134 Configuring the EasyWay (2) . as shown in Fig. click the “Save” button on the toolbar. 6-136. Then the user will first enter the validity check phase. the list of checking results will be displayed.GPRS 18. Saving the file After the configuration is finished. click “OK”. only the BSC will be added. When a user conducts the initial configuration. please modify the configuration according to the prompt information. 6-137 Saving the file (3) To add MSC. Page 485 of 516 . After the user succeeds. 6-138. Fig. 6-137. as shown in Fig. the user needs to confirm whether the MSC will be added.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. as shown in Fig. he will enter step 3 of wizard: send the script to the server for ICC resolution. otherwise. 6-136 Saving the file (2) If the validity checks result has an error prompt. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. the system will automatically enter step 4. 6-138 Process of generating the MML command (1) Directly click “Next”. as shown in Fig. Page 486 of 516 . 6-140. Fig. 6-139 Process of generating the MML command (2) After the resolution succeeds. The script will be sent to the server. 6-139. as shown in Fig. the command window will prompt: batch submission is successful. Now. 6-140 Process of generating the MML command (3) The Batch mode is recommended. Page 487 of 516 . After the command is successfully sent.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. the initial configuration is finished. the dialog box for entering step 2 of wizard will automatically pop up. the system will first obtain the data script from the database. as shown in Fig. 6-142. 6-141 Incremental configuration (1) Input the BSCID whose configuration needs to be modified.3. 6-142 Incremental configuration (2) After this succeeds. 6-143. as shown in Fig. Note that this BSCID must exist in the system. 6-79. At this time.2. Click “Next”. 6-141.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. Page 488 of 516 .2 Modifying the configuration If the user selects “Modify Configuration” shown in Fig. Fig. as shown in Fig. Fig. it is recommended that the sites be added one by one during modification to the configuration. the system starts to obtain the data. To improve the efficiency of executing the MML command script. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 489 of 516 . 6-143 Incremental configuration (3) Click “Next” to enter the phase of editing the script. The operations that follow are the same as those in the initial configuration. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6.3. 6-144. as shown in Fig. 6-145. 6-132. Fig.2. Page 490 of 516 . 6-144 Dialog box for adding racks Select the GIU and SPCU racks and then click “OK”. Configuring the GPRS shelf In the pop-up menu shown in Fig. select the “Add Rack” menu to pop up a dialog box.3 Configuring GPRS 1. as shown in Fig. Page 491 of 516 . 6-145 Racks In Fig. as shown in Fig. 6-146. right click the PUC board.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. select the “Add Board” menu to pop up the dialog box as shown in Fig. 6-145. Fig. 6-146 Configuring the PUC (1) In the pop-up menu. 6-147. right click the FRP. 6-147 Configuring the PUC (2) In Fig. select the “Add Board” menu. 6-148 Adding the FRP board Page 492 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Fig. 6-148. as shown in Fig. 6-145. Then the FRP board can be added. In the pop-up menu. as shown in Fig. 6-145. Page 493 of 516 . Then the BRP board can be added. In the pop-up menu. 6-149. right click the BRP. and right click to select the “Add Board” menu to pop up a dialog box as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In Fig. Select the TIC of the GIU shelf. 6-150. Fig. 6-149 Adding the BRP board Then configure the TIC and the BRCH with GB interface. select the “Add Board” menu. 6-150 Configuring the TIC with GB interface Click “Configure BRCH” to display the following dialog box. as shown in Fig. Fig. 6-151.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-151 Configuring BRCH (1) Page 494 of 516 . 6-152. right click the “BSC” node to pop up the menu as shown in Fig. as shown in Fig. 6-153. Fig. Fig. In the physical view. 6-153 Configuring NSVC (1) Page 495 of 516 . 6-152 Configuring BRCH (2) Then configure the NSE and the NSVC.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Select “PUC Location of BRCH”. 6-155. Fig. as shown in Fig. select “Edit NSVC” menu to pop up a dialog box for editing the NSE.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 In the right-click menu. 6-155 Configuring NSVC (3) Page 496 of 516 . 6-154. as shown in Fig. 6-154 Configuring NSVC (2) Click the “Add NSVC” button to pup up a dialog box for editing NSVC. Fig. and right click to select the “Create Cell Radio Information” as shown in Fig. Page 497 of 516 . 6-156 Configuring a GPRS cell (1) In this way. Configuring the GPRS cell Select the “Logical Site” node. 6-157. select “Support GPRS”.If the cell is a GPRS cell. The “GPRS Info” tab is shown in Fig. the relevant parameters of the GPRS cell can be configured. 6-156. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 2. Configuring the GPRS TRX Right click the “Cell” node to pup up the menu. Select the “Create TRX Radio Information” menu to edit the relevant parameters of the GPRS TRX. as shown in Fig. 6-157 Configuring a GPRS cell (2) 3. 6-158. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-158 Configuring GPRS TRX Page 498 of 516 . 2-10) to enter the main interface for dynamic data management (as shown in Fig.4 6. Fig.4. After a user successfully logs in. unblock. so as to implement the dynamic management of the land resource state. and disassemble operations. It mainly initiates from the client the operations of inquiring or modifying the states of various land resources and displays the operation results. block. including inquiry. activate. 6-159). assemble. he can click “Configuration Management → Dynamic Data Management” menu in the OMCR (V2) client main interface (as shown in Fig.1 Dynamic data management Overview Dynamic data management mainly provides the function of dynamically managing various land resources at the OMCR (V2) client. 6-159 The main interface for dynamic data management Page 499 of 516 .Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. deactivate. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 6. select the channel to be queried. As shown in Fig.1 Operations of the dynamic data management interface Inquiring/refreshing The state of the land resources with dynamic attribute can be inquired.4. 6-160. 6-161. 6-160 Inquiring the state Refresh is to inquire the state of all channels or TSs.4. right click in the list at the right lower part of the main interface to pop up the menu. and right click to pup up the menu. Select the “Observe” key from the pop-up menu to obtain the inquiry result of this channel state. Select the “Refresh” key of the menu to obtain the state of all channels.2 6. Fig.2. As shown in Fig. Page 500 of 516 . BTS. In the list on the right. 6-162. Select the “Block” or “Unblock” in the pop-up menu to initiate the operation for modifying the management state of channel 2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig.2 Blocking/unblocking Block/unblock serves to modify the state bit of the land resources with dynamic attribute such as BSC. Page 501 of 516 . 6-161 Refreshing the state 6. select channel 2 to be queried and right click to pop up a menu. and TRX.4.2. Take the channel for example. as shown in Fig. 2. Page 502 of 516 . and select the N7LINK1 to be activated or deactivated from the list on the right. 6-163. Select “Activate” or “Deactivate” from the pop-up menu to initiate the operation for activating/deactivating the N7LINK1.4. Then right click to pop up a menu. as shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. 6-162 Blocking/unblocking 6. Select the “LINKID” node in the browse tree on the left.3 Activating/deactivating Activate/deactivate is used to activate/deactivate the N7LINK. Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Select the PCM circuit to be assembled/disassembled from the list on the right. 6-164. and right click to pop up a menu. Page 503 of 516 . as shown in Fig. Select “Circuit Assemble” or “Circuit Disassemble” from the pop-up menu to initiate the operation for assembling/disassembling the PCM circuit.4 PCM circuit assemble/disassemble Circuit assemble/disassemble serves to assemble/disassemble the PCM circuit. 6-163 Activating/deactivating 6.2.4. as shown in Fig.2.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig.5 Global resetting In the tree-shaped list on the left of the main interface. Page 504 of 516 . select “GSM Equipment” or “BTS Equipment” and then right click to pop up a menu. 6-165.4. Select the “Global Reset” from the pop-up menu to initiate the operation for global resetting. 6-164 PCM circuit assemble/disassemble 6. 4. so it will affect the conversation. 2. Any resource without the dynamic attribute will not be embodied in the dynamic management interface. The following problems are easily seen during the dynamic data management: 1. It needs the cooperation between many aspects to operate normally.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Page 505 of 516 . the background MO operation. and the foreground operation. Be careful when using it. so the operation must be initiated to the foreground. Dynamic data management serves to modify the states of land resources with dynamic attribute on the foreground. 3. Dynamic data management serves to manage the land resources with dynamic attribute. Any operation in DEBUG mode where the foreground is not connected will certainly fail.3 Troubleshooting The dynamic data management is a multi-aspect and multi-module complex job that involves the database operation. 6-165 Global resetting 6. The operation of dynamic data management will affect the state of the operated land resource. the communication between the foreground and the background. Any error of the foreground operation will possibly be embodied by operation failure of the dynamic data management. The foreground environment has a big effect on the operation of dynamic data management.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 4. Page 506 of 516 . The database configuration and monitoring belongs to one part of the database management. 7-1. These parameters include: 1. as well as monitoring the operational status. performance table space and alarm table space.2 Interface operations After successful login. Used spaces of the configuration table. performance table and alarm table. whether normal connection has been established between DIF (Database Interface Function) and the database. 7. 4. the following information can be obtained: The usage of the configuration table space. Free space alarm thresholds of the tables Through the database configuration and the monitoring graphical interface. It is responsible for setting and acquiring the database and related parameters of the interface module. 2. Page 507 of 516 . Whether DIF has established the normal connection with the database. 3. Total spaces of the configuration table. the alarm threshold value can be dynamically set. and the alarm threshold of the free space of each table.1 7. select “System Tools → Database Configuration and Monitoring” to enter the database configuration and monitoring interface shown in Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 7 Database Configuration and Monitoring Overview The database management includes the provisioning of the interfaces for the application modules to invoke the database and the monitoring and management on the database and interface functions. At the same time. performance table and alarm table. Expand. Collapse all. Directory and index. Monitor alarm threshold. About… From left to right. display column. Collapse all. tool bar. Page 508 of 516 . the tool buttons on the toolbar in turn are: Monitor database information. Set parameters: Set alarm threshold. 7-1 The main interface of database configuration and monitoring On the interface from the top down. Monitor contents: Monitor database information. Collapse. Expand all. View: Tool bar. Collapse. 5. Expand. Alarm threshold parameter.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. Command box. 4. Database configuration and monitoring help. The menus on the menu-bar are in turn as follows: 1. Acquire parameters: Database parameter. 2. Database parameter. Alarm threshold parameter. Exit. Refresh. Status bar. Help: Database configuration and monitoring help. 3. Set alarm threshold. Exit. command window and status bar. Expand all. Refresh. there are menu bar. Monitor alarm threshold. The buttons on the toolbar correspond to the menus in the menu bar. The right side of the display column is divided into two tabs. in which the user can directly input the MMI command to finish a certain operation. 7-2 and Fig. which displays the database monitoring results. the upper of which shows the detailed information in the form of a list. The first tab is “Database space information”. The second tab is "Alarm threshold information”. Page 509 of 516 . The tab is again divided into two parts. The command box is the character input interface. is on the left of the display column. When the interface operation is performed. 7. It includes the information of each table space and DIF status. 7-3.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 The browse tree. Information such as operation terminal.1 Selecting monitoring contents In Fig. It shall be noted that apart from compound commands. as shown in Fig.2. the relevant MML command will be displayed in the command box. 7-1. which displays the database configuration and monitoring items. while the lower part of which displays the results in a more vivid way by using graphics. which shows each alarm threshold value of the free space of the table. only commands related with database configuration and monitoring can be input in the application window of database configuration and monitoring. operator and communication status are listed in the status bar. click the “Database parameter” and “Alarm threshold parameter” tool buttons on the toolbar or related menu items to enter the interface of monitoring contents selection. FreeSpace of Perform Tablespace. and whether normal connection has been established between DIF and the database (Connect Status of DIF and DB). 7-3 Alarm threshold parameters The monitoring contents include: configuration table space (Config Tablespace).Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Fig. alarm table space (Alarm Tablespace). performance table space (Perform Tablespace). alarm thresholds of the free space of the tables (FreeSpace of Config Tablespace. Page 510 of 516 . 7-2 Database parameters Fig. FreeSpace of Alarm Tablespace). while the graphics are shown in the lower part of the interface. the system will automatically display the acquired parameters in the monitoring result column shown in Fig. 7. select the “Monitor database information” tool button on the toolbar to start acquiring the corresponding database monitoring information.2. After the monitoring is started and the server successfully returns the result. 7-4 Database information monitoring results The interface displays the latest information after the user acquires the information each time.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 7.3 Monitoring alarm threshold The alarm threshold means that when the available free space of each table reaches a certain degree.2. Otherwise the database can not function normally at a Page 511 of 516 . 7-4.2 Monitoring database information After the database monitoring contents are set. the monitoring server of the database will generate the alarm information to prompt the user about necessary preparations. Fig. The description is shown in the upper part of the interface. The alarm information will be shown in the alarm management interface. Select the “Monitor alarm threshold” tool button in the toolbar to start acquiring the threshold value. In specific. The space alarm means that when the free space of a certain table is less than the threshold value. The percentage alarm means that when the free space percentage of a certain table is less than the alarm threshold value.4 Setting threshold parameters Apart from viewing the alarm threshold information and using the default threshold value. the alarm will be generated. Click the “Set alarm threshold” tool button in the toolbar to enter the Page 512 of 516 . the user also can set the more reasonable threshold value by himself. the alarm threshold is divided into two types: Space alarm and percentage alarm. the user can only get the corresponding values after acquiring the threshold parameters. Fig. The acquired parameters will be shown in the second tab of the monitoring result interface shown in Fig. 7-5 Alarm threshold results 7. then the system will use the latest setting as the basis of alarm generation.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 certain time. Since the alarm threshold values are saved in the server. the alarm will be generated.2. 7-5. Fig.Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 parameter setting interface shown in Fig. After the setting is finished successfully. the system will automatically acquire the latest setting for the user’s reference. 7-6. 7-6 Set DB alarm threshold Each threshold value is an integer. Page 513 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Appendix Abbreviations Abbreviation Abis AIPP AIU AUC BAF BCCH BIE BIPP BIU BOSN BRP BSIA BSC BSS BSSAP BSSGP BTS BVC CBCH CCCH CDF CLF CMIP CMIS CRF CS DRT DSP EDRT EFD EGSM ESU FN FR FRP Full name A-bis Interface A Interface Peripheral Processor A Interface Unit Access Unit Controller BSS Adapter Function Broadcast Channel Base station Interface Equipment aBis Interface Peripheral Processor aBis Interface Unit Bit Oriented Switching Network BSSGP RLC/MAC Protocol Base Station Interface Adapter Base Station Controller Base station Sub System Base station Sub System Application Part Base station Sub System GPRS Protocol Base Transceiver Station BSSGP Virtual Connect Cell Broadcast Channel Common Control Channel Commands Dispatching Function Commands Logging Function Common Management Information Protocol Common Management Information Service Commands Resolution Function Circuit Switched Dual-Rate Transcoder Digital Signal Processor Enhanced DRT Event Forwarding Discriminator Extend GSM Executable Software Unit Frame Number Frame Relay FR Protocol Page 514 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Abbreviation FTAM FU FUC GGSN GIPP GIU GPRS GSM GSN HMS HSN LAF LAPD LMF LMT MAC MAF MAIO MIB MIT MF MKF MMI MML MO MOC MOF MP MS MSC MSF MTP NAF NC NEF NMC NS NSVC OMC OMCR Full name File Transfer Access Maintenance Frame Unit Frame Unit Controller Gateway GPRS Support Node Gb Interface Peripheral Processor GPRS Interface Unit General Packet Radio Service Globe System for Mobile communication GPRS Support Node ZXIP10-AS HMS Hopping Sequence Number Local Access Function Link Access Protocol of D-Channel Local Management Function Local Management Terminal Medium Access Control Management Application Functions Mobile Allocation Index Offset Management Information Base MO Instance Tree Mediation Function MMI Kernel Function Man Machine Interface Man Machine Language Managed Object Managed Object Class MO administration Function Main Processor Mobile Station Mobile Switch Center Management Support Function Message Transfer Part NMC Access Function Network Control Network Element Function Network Management Center Network Service NS Virtual Circuit Operation Maintenance Center Operation Maintenance Center Radio Page 515 of 516 . Operation Manual of ZXG10-BSC (V2)-Vol 1 Abbreviation OOF OSF PACCH PAGCH PCU PDCH PDTCH PDU PP PS PTM PTP PUC PVC RACH RMM RLC SDCCH SGSN SMB SMM SMS SSF TC TCH TCPP TIC TMN TRAU TRX UISF WAF WSF Full name Operation Outputting Function Operations Systems Function Packet Associated Control Channel Paging & Access Granted Channel Packet Control Unit Packet Data Channel Packet Data Traffic Channel Protocol Data Unit Peripheral Processor Packet Switched Point To Multipoint Point To Point Packet Unit Control Permanent Virtual Circuit Random Access Channel Radio Management Module Radio Link Control Specified Control Channel Serving GPRS Support Node Short Message Broadcast Service Management Module Short Message Service Session Services Function TransCoder Traffic Channel TransCoder unit Peripheral Processor Trunk Interface Circuit Telecommunication Management Network Transcoder and Rate Adaptor Unit Transceiver User Interface Support Function Windows Administration Function WorkStation Function Page 516 of 516 . Documents Similar To ZXG10-BSC(V2)Operation Manual Vol 1Skip carouselcarousel previouscarousel nextOracle Installiugwin41Oracle Enterprise Manager Cloud Control78_Part_Oracle_Guide.pdfOracle Upgrade Procedure With SBP InstallationManual de Oracle Fedora - InglesToad InstallationOracle Database 12c Client Installation GuideBicg White Papers Obiee 11g Technical Footprint UpgradeASM 11gR2 Installation & Configuration_role_separation_complete_Nov-9-2011_NEW.pdfEBS InstallationInstalin n ConfiguringECC 6 UPgradation Pre StepsChapter 2_ Installing Oracle Software and Building the DatabaseOracle11gXE_SQLDeveloperuresh_resumeCustomize Oracle iExpenses WorkflowsBO_pointsCourse 12 c Administration WorkshopInstalling Oracle Database 11g on Linux272_Central AWR_ppt[1]Error ORAInstall GuideOPDG for Hanging SessionsConfiguring the File Repository Server (FRS) in BI 4 _ SAP BO,BI,Database & Data warehouse FAQ.pdfXulfi's ResumeAuto Workload Repository-Imtiyaz Presentation13ESS_InstallingSiebelApplicationsP6PPM_v70_QIG00-2 About This Document.pdfMore From Bahara KhSkip carouselcarousel previouscarousel nextZXG10-BSC(V2)Operation Manual Vol 2ZXG10 BSC(V2)Installation ManualZxg10-Mscvlr(v3.0) Operation Manual (Volume II)ZXG10-BSC(V2) Maintenance ManualZXG10-BSC(V2) Technical ManualFooter MenuBack To TopAboutAbout ScribdPressOur blogJoin our team!Contact UsJoin todayInvite FriendsGiftsLegalTermsPrivacyCopyrightSupportHelp / FAQAccessibilityPurchase helpAdChoicesPublishersSocial MediaCopyright © 2018 Scribd Inc. .Browse Books.Site Directory.Site Language: English中文EspañolالعربيةPortuguês日本語DeutschFrançaisTurkceРусский языкTiếng việtJęzyk polskiBahasa indonesiaSign up to vote on this titleUsefulNot usefulYou're Reading a Free PreviewDownloadClose DialogAre you sure?This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?CANCELOK
Copyright © 2024 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.